-  x^,*-^^ 


\- 


•  \ 


^ 


ly  the  InterneUArchive 
^  ^'^'■th  funding%om 
Corporation 


http://www.archive.org/details/elegantiaelatinaOOvalprich 


V(cLijpyx  lld^Amv 


OR, 

ILLUSTRATIVE  OF 


^kQautUatin^jm^h:..^^ 


ijY   THE 


T1TIVSES1T1 


IiNTExVDEI)  FOR  _, _ 

rSE  OF  THE  MIDDLE  AND  HIGH 

GRAMMAR  SCHOOLS 


?p«a  Oratio  confermRnda  iion  solum  »ilectione,  sed  etiam  consiti\j:> 
tione  Vprbor«in. Cic. 


FROM  THE  FIFTH  ExNGLISII  EDITION- 


NEW-HAVEN: 
Howe  &  Spalding  Piblishkiu^^ 


S.  CONVERSE,  PRlNTF.r. 

IS  19. 


V 


n-^ 


f^% 


PREFACE 


DURING  the  many  years,  in  which  I  have  been  engaged 
in  the  arduous  but  important  task  of  teaching  the  Classics,  it 
has  never  failed  to  excite  my  wonder  and  concern,  that  in  the 
many  attempts,  which  have  been  made  to  smooth  the  diffi- 
culties,  with  which  the  road  to  classical  excellence  is  attend- 
ed, no  method  tending  to  facilitate  Latin  composition,  has- 
been  successively  pursued  from  the  first  introduction  of  a 
Youth  into  the  Elementary  Exercises,  to  his  arrival  into  the 
flowery  fields  of  correct  elegance  and  dignity  of  style.  The 
greatest  care  is  usually  taken  in  condiictmg  him  to  a  certaia 
point :  when  he  understands  the  plain  application  of  his  rules 
of  Syntax,  he  is  then  thrown  upon  the  wide  world  of  elegant 
Latinity,  in  which  the  range  he  is  to  take,  though  stripped  of 
the  thorns  of  grammatical  analysis,  is  still  very  precarious ; 
his  progress  is  still  ascensu  difficilis.  For  unless  the  Master  is 
at  liberty  to  point  out  very  minutely  the  particular  words  or 
arrangement  of  words  which  constitute  elegance,  he  must 
greatly  depend  upon  his  own  judgment  and  observation  for 
the  knowledge  of  them.  And  there  is  as  great  a  diflference  be-.««^ 
tween  the  mere  grammatical  structure  of  a  sentence,  and  the 
elegant  usage  and  collocation  of  words,  as  between  the  rude 
sketch  of  an  imperfect  outline,  and  the  fine  colouring  of  a  fin- 
ished painting. 

Numerous  are  the  books,  both  in  this  and  otlier  countries, 
which  have  be^n  pubfished  upon  the  elegance  of  Latin  style. 
But  none  do  I  khow  at  all  calculated  to  be  put  into  the  hands 
of  Youth.  Philologi^ts^have  displayed  much  critical  knowl- 
edge in  their  learned  dissertations  upon  the  style  and  the 
beauties  of  the  Lali^l  Language.  But  that  knowledge  and 
those  researches  were  neither  intended,  nor  calculated  to  be- 
•iseful  to  young  beginners.    A  pleasant  little  book,  (Lea  Deli^ 


niKFACK. 

ff#  d€  la  Langne  Laiine^)  was  published  many  yeiir«  ago,  and 
in  imitation  of  it,  or  rather  compiled  from  it,  appeared  on<»  o 
two  in  this  coimtry  hy  Dc-Biincy  and  others.      But   h. 

thfir  incon-'- •'^' —    •,,,!<,,>  ...... ..t  •  -.     «i,. :-  -. — 

will  imme* 

pies,  being  all  in  L^atini  and  that  not  of  the  purest,  can  neithe. 

•  ^ '  y   of  the  scholar. 

T! ...  . ,    .,v  '  •' proprictv    ♦- 

Walker'j*  Phrase?,  and  c  |  :i*s  Par; 

which,  though  rery  useful  and  valuable,  give  the  Latin  of  tho 
Kngiiih   idiom,  nnJ  thi;  sjiy  of  research 

and  as  they  give  n^  "<  .v....   ..,.  v..>  ..^c  or  the  appiica 

lion  of  them,  the  li  .  c  which  ilic  Scholar  ia  to  derivo 

Crom  them,  n^ust  rest  wholly  upon  his  memory  and  mechani 

^..^  J  .-rusal  of  Scheller':5  valu.ihic  work  upon  the  elegance 
9f  Latin  style,  first  suggested  the  idea  that  something  might 
be  attempted,  which,  with  care  and  attention,  might  be  adapt- 
ed to  the  use  of  our  Clns'iical  Schools.     11'  h 

so  severely  lashed  hy  his  countryman,  conti: .^..  .:..■ g 

sense,  and  was  also  instrumental  both  in  tlie  determination 
and  the  execution  of  this  work.  With  what  degree  of  accuracy 
and  judgment  it  has  been  performed,  it  now  rests  with  the 
public  to  determine.  If  I  have  been  mistaken  in  some  points, 
I  shall  hope  to  have  the  error  candidly  pointed  out:  "Nihil 
''  enlm  mihi  snavius  est,  quJtm  corrigi ;  omnis  enira  corrcctio, 
^a  mnguis  viris  pr(»recta,   est  via  ad  discendmvi  lo 

.'profrr:'*    '^^^rt^    nni    vitt:t(r'?:'    D'jliin.     inod<^>    \        ^  it 

Perhaps  some  of  the  practical  observations,  those  th.it/elat 
to  the  Uructurc  of  the  Period,  for  instance,  may  at  firi^t  ap 
pear  intricate,  and  not  so  necessary  as  others.      To  a  young^ 
beginiicr,  they  might  perhaps  appear  so.     It  would  be  as  dif- 
iW:uU  a  task,  and  might  retard  him  as  much  in  his  acquisitir 


▼r.  niEFACE. 

of  a  pure  Latin  style,  if  he  bestowed  too  miaute  a  labour  upon 
them  ;  as  if  he  attempted  to  collect  the  scattered  limbs  of  the 
dissected  Ahsyrtus.  But  as  it  is  presumed  the  Scholar  has 
already  made  some  progress  in  Latin,  before  he  is  introduced 
to  these  Exercises,  the  study  of  those  rules,  as  the  knowledge 
of  anatomy  to  a  proficient  in  surgery,  which  makes  him  ad- 
mire the  more  the  wonderful  structure  of  the  body,  will 
make  the  proficient  Scholar  sea  and  taste  the  beauty  and  ord- 
er of  the  style  the  more,  from  the  dissection  of  the  several 
parts.  Some  rules,  especially  those  that  relate  to  the  use  of 
qui,  quce,  quod,  may  carry  the  appearance  of  repetition  ;  but 
as  they  come  in  illustration  of  different  heads,  they  only  tend 
to  show  in  how  extensive  and  various  a  manoer  the  same  may 
be  used.  It  may  likewise  be  observed,  that  the  particular 
method  which  the  rule  points  out,  is  not  always  more  elegant 
than  another  ;  but  it  is  often  merely  to  show  the  variation  and 
the  manner  in  which  one  phrase  or  expression  may  be  chang- 

«dir>to  another. 

EDWARD  VALPV. 


1^ 


^ 


TO  TIIK  THIRD  EDITION. 


XT  has  been  my  principal  care  to  siinpUiy,  or  wholU 
to  remove  from  this  edition,  those  dilficult  passages,  which, 
notwithstanding  the  general  approbation  with  which  this 
work  lias  been  received,  must  be  acknowledged' to  have  ex- 
isted in  the  former  editions.  When  therefore  tlie  Scholar 
is  first  introduced  into  this  book  of  exercises,  he  should  be 
allowed  to  omit  the  sentences,  which  are  marked  with  aa 
asterisk,  and  confine  liimself  to  the  easier  examples.  The 
second  time  he  travels  over  the  same  field,  he  will  be  equal 
to  the  more  difficult  passages,  to  which  the  asterisk  is  pre- 
fixed, and  to  the  whole  range  of  Latin  composition.  \V  hen 
a  boy  has  gone  through  these  exercises  a  second  time,  lie 
may  be  safely  presumed  to  have  made  no  small  proficiency 
in  writing  Latin*  I  have  witnessed  the  most  pleasing, 
proofs  of  this  assertion.  It  is  presumed  that  this  edition 
embraces  every  thing  within  the  scope  of  research,  which 
was  likely  to  contribute  to  the  elegant  formation  of  style, 
every  thing  by  which  a  sentence ^por^crft/r,  xrrigeiur^  per^ 
fandaiur.  As  the  rules  for  the  structure  of  a  regular  Peri- 
od, which  is  so  essential  to  good  Latinity,  could  not  be  so 
easily  reduced  to  practicaf  illustration,  an  acquaintance 
with  them  will  chiefly  rest  upon  the  scholar's  own  study 
iiod  observation^  aided  by  the  masters  direction  and  super- 
nitendance ;  but  a  close  examination  of  the  rules  and  the 

few  examples  which  accompany  them,  will  be  sufficient  tcta- 

linprinl  ihena  on  his  mincf. 


CONTEXTS 


CHAP,  I. 

©F  the  choice  and  elegance  of  particular  words,  Page  t 

Rules  for  the  pronoun  quiyqucRf.quodj.dLnd  other  relatives,         2& 

©f  Verbs, 4T 

6fParticiples, G^^ 

Gf  Tenses, 73 

Of  the  sucession  of  Tenses,        --.---       78 

CHAP.  n. 

Of  the  order  or  an^angemcnt  of  words,        ...  87 

Of  the  arrangement  of  words,  as  they  depend  upon  the  natural 
order  of  ideas,  -  -  ....  106 

Of  the  an-angement  of  clau8€s>  or  dififerent  rasmbers  of  a  sen- 
tence,       ---.►.-.  117 

CHAP.  Ill 

Of  Conjunctions,,  and  the  mode  of  connecting  words  and 

clauses,        ..-•---.  12T 

CHAP.  IV. 
Of  the  simple  variation  of  words,        -        .        ..        .  144: 

CHAP  V. 

Copiousness  of  Style,        ------  16G 

Pleonasm,         -         - 190 

Dignity  or  strength  of  Style, 196 

CHAP.  VI. 
Of  the  structure  of  a  period,        -----  204 

Of  Prose-measure  or  Harmony,        -        ►       -        -        -      215 

CHAP,  vii: 

Of  Perspicuity, ►  221 

Of  the  structure  of  Themes,       -       -        -        -  '    221 


ELEGANTI^  LATIN/E 

;      \V^         OF    ''  1    >•  ' 

CHAll  EI^VX.  ^         oir      ,< 

(y  f/ic  Choice  and  Elegance  ofFc"^        '  "^ 


Quinam  igilur  dicendi  est  modus  raelior,  qukm  nt  Latino,  ut  plane,  ut 
ornate,  utad  id,  quodcuoci^ue  agetur,  apte  congruenterquc  dicamns. 

Cicero. 


JLllgance,  according  to  the  derivation  of  the 
word,  eUgere^  consists  in  the  choice  of  the  most 
appropriate  words  and  expressions,  and  in  their 
composition  and  clear  and  perspicuous  order.  It 
depends  chiefly  on  the  usage  of  the  best  Latin  wri- 
ters. When  therefore  the  scholar  has  selected 
those  words,  which  are  appropriate  in  their 
meaning  to  the  sense  of  the  subject,  the  next 
thing  will  be  to  consider  whether  tliey  ha^T  heea 
used  by  the  best  writers  of  antiquity. 

But  let  it  be  premised,  that  no  word  can  be 
elegant  or  beautiful  in  itself,  in  its  disjoined 
state,  but  merely  as  far  as  it  strengthens,  con- 
nects, or  illustrates  the  subject ;  or  at  least  as  far 
us  tlic  Latin  word  conveys  in  its  true  meaning 
the  full  force  of  the  English  expression.  It  would 
be  absurd,  therefore,  to  use  at  random  the  first 
word  which  presents  itself,  widiout  considering 
whether  it  is  appropriate  to  the  sense :  as  in  sav 


inc;  that  **  the  ^ood  man  is  cheerful  and  re  ' 

at  *^v^  l"^'!'- -fV  death  •  <^  — --h  tradltiis  si^j^muts 
rt  .    is,   (i-  :p^   it  does   by  no 

means  express  the  English  mc  aning ;  and  tliere- 
fore  it  would  be  r  iry  to  search  till  a  pi-oper 

word  ofTers  itself  ioi  '  in  the  seii  •      '  Ich 

it  bears  in  this  sr^i  irh   iv,   tju..^j..u  or 

contented. 

In  investigatins;  then  the  tine  and  i)roi)er  sig- 
nification of  ^N'ords,  it  will  be  n  ry  to  under- 
stand each  different  sense  in  u  nun  they  are  us- 
ed; and  if  the  scholar  accjuaint  himself  as  much 
as  he  can  with  their  etymoloji^y  and  orip;inal 
meaning,  he  will  be  enabled  to  write  purer  Lat- 
in,  and  to  avoid  many  Grecisms,  obsolete  and 
barbarous  words,  and  those  which  have  too 
great  an  affinity  to  the  English,  introduced  into 
use  by  several  modern  and  inelegant  writers,  as 
recommendare  to  recommend^  ij-c. 

If  the  Latin  should  not  furnish  a  word  suffi- 
ciently elegant,  or  fully  expressive  of  tlie  Eng- 
lish idea,  or  if  the  force  or  dignity  of  the  subject 
require  it,  it  may  be  necessary  to  vary  an  ex- 
pression by  means  of  a  short  periphrasis,  or  of 
a  phrase,  instead  of  a  simple  word.  But  in  the 
choice  of  phrases,  care  must  be  taken  that  they 
do  not  convey  more  meaning  than  we  Avish  to 
express.  Thus,  in  saying  that  mothers  embrace 
their  infant?,  though  mere  in  ampJemm  is  some- 
times a  very  good  phrase  for  amjj/ecti,  yet  who 
would  say,  matres  solent  in  amplexum  infantium 
nierej  when  the  simple  word  expresses  tlic  idea 
so  much  J^otter  ?  And  though  inflcnnmatum  esse, 


ird  is  often  used  for  irascij  yet  it  implies  mucli 
more  ;  and  it  would  ))C  absurd  to  say  scripsit  ei 
j)ater  pauliim  irci  injlmnmaUis^  for  paulo  iratiorj 
rather  angry.  In  short,  the  sense  or  the  context 
must  be  considered  very  minutely  and  accurate- 
ly, before  the  scholar  is  enabled  to  judge  of  the 
propriety  or  the  elegance  of  the  corresponding 
expressions.  Again,  though  utor  is  sometimes 
elegantly  used  for  the  verb  habeoj  yet  in  its  mean- 
ing it  must  include  the  use  as  well  as  the  posses- 
sion of  any  thing.  We  would  not  say  therefore 
avarus  vtiiur  magnis  opibus,  if  we  wished  merely 
to  say  avarus  habet  magnas  opes.  These  few 
preliminary  observations  will  be  sufficient  to 
show  the  necessity  of  selecting  such  Latin  words 
•and  expressions,  as  convey  in  their  full  force  and 
meaning,  the  true  sense  of  the  English. 

Nothing  indeed  will  be  more  conducive  to 
the  purity  and  elegance  of  the  Latin  language, 
than  a  happy  contexture  of  elegant  Roman 
phrases,  or  forms  of  speaking,  used  by  the  best 
and  purest  writers.  With  these,  therefore,  tJie 
learner  should  be  directed  to  store  his  memory, 
and  be  taught  how  to  use  them  in  his  own  com- 
position. For  effecting  this  essential  purpose, 
which  certainly  requires  time,  diligence,  and  ob- 
servation, it  would  be  necessary  that  the  scholar 
should  write  down  daily  whatever  Latin  phrase 
and  elegant  form  of  speaking  he  may  occasion- 
ally meet  with  in  his  lessons,  and  give  a  weekly 
account  of  them  to  the  master.  Tliat  excellent 
little  book,  Valpy's  Dialogues,  should  also  be  put 
early  into  his  hands  :  these  should  be  thorougly 


learnt,  and  well  impressed  on  the  nionioiy,  as 
the  phrases  and  tbrnis  of  speech  tuc  collected 
from  the  purest  wr-"  v- 

It  will  also  be  u-  ry  to  observe  that  tlicre 

ore  many  pecnliar  modes  of  expression,  or  idioms 
in  the  Enj^lish,  which  can  only  be  rendered  by 
adoj)tinjr  some  Latin  phrase,  or  usinir  such  a  vari- 
ation as  u  ill  best  suit  the  Latin  style.  These  will 
be  gradually  exemplified  as  the  scholar  proceeds 
through  these  rules  and  exercises.  For  instance — 

^V  ;/^/  me  word  by  letter  : 

It)  use  a  liti^ral  or  rather  barl)<iiuii>  t  xjim  -iwu, 
w^e  should  say,  mine  milii  verbum:  to  speak  true 
or  elegant  Ladn,  we  should  Sc\yjfac  me  per  lite/ as 
cerlioixnu 

I  am  short  ofmonry : 

Barbarously  or  literally,  6/7    >     '»^'  /)//;/>/>/ 
elegantly,  deficit  me  pecunia. 

1  would  he  loth  to  make  thee  to  be  beaten  : 

I  will  make  them  friends: 

He  made  as  thons;h  he  wept  : 

Such  expressions  on  the  first  view  carry  with 
them  the  appearance  of  English  idioms.  It 
would  be  tlierefore  absurd  carelessly  to  say  essem 
invitus  facere  te  tapulare^  ^*c.  but  v\  ith  a  little 
care  and  judgment^  and  by  considering  their  re- 
al meaning,  it  will  be  easy  to  give  them  a  turn 
which  may  answer  that  meaning,  and  to  find  out 
a  corresix)nding  Latin  expresisioii.  Thus  w  c  shall 
say : 

/  ivould  he  loth  to  m^'l^^'  fhee  be  beaten  :  non  In- 
bens  committerem  tft  .  res^  that  is,  I  ^^ouW 

jaot  willingly  give  cause  that  , 


I IV ill  make  tkemfiiends:  t'etligam  <  gra- 

iiam. 

He  made  as  though  he  ivcpt :  simxdavit  quasi 
fleret^  or,  seflere. 

And  so  on  of  phrases  in  general :  Thus  agahi, 

/  imll  make  goody  that  is,  supply,  supplebo. 

He  made  much  ofme^  i.  e.  he  treated  me  well, 
comiter  me  tractavit. 

He  makes  much  of  himself^  u  e.  he  indulges 
himself,  sibi^  or  genio  indulget. 

You  make  game  of  me,  u  e.  you  laugh  at  me, 
ludis  me,  or  ladibrio  me  habes. 

You  can  do  much  with  him,  tu  muliiim  apud 
€um.  poles. 

You  knoiv  ivhat  account  I  make  of  him^  i.  e. 
esteem  him,  scis  quanti  eumfaciam. 

Pll  have  nothing  to  do  with  your  friendship,  i.  e. 
I  renounce  . . .  renuncio  tuce  amicitice. 

I  have  my  brother  to  entreat,  i.e.  my  brother 
remains  to  be  entreated,  rested  mihif rater  adhuc 
exorandus. 

Thou  maystjor  all  me,  licet  tibi  per  me. 

Thou  mayst  be  gone  for  all  me,  licet  abeas  per 
me. 

To  be  spoken  of  and  ire. 

What  trade  are  you  of?  i.  e.  do  you  pursue  r 
Quam  artemfactitas  ? 

To  ask  the  advice  of  any  one,  L  e.  to  consult; 
consulere. 

You  are  sure  to  be  punished,  i.  e.  a  certain  pun- 
ishment awaits  you,  certa poena  te  manet. 

Be  ruled  by  me,  i.  e.  listen  to  me,  ausculta  m^hi. 


lam  not  in  fault,  i.  c.  blamcable,  or  I  am  free 
from  fault,  vaco  culpa. 

Let  him  loscy  he  made  to  go  Kiihouty  his  supper, 
multetur  cccnd. 

To  he  sick  of  a  disease,  fever,  want^  i.  c.  to 
labor  \mi\vr„Jahorare  morho,  ^^c. 

Besides  a  great  number  of  phrases,  which  arc 
derived  from  the  particular  forms  and  customs  of 
the  Romans,  and  which  a  more  intimate  acquain- 
tance with  Latin  authors, will  soon  render  familiar 
to  the  scholar  :  as,  to  sell  by  auction,  hastce  suhji- 
cere;  with  good  or  ill  luck,  honis  autmalis  avihus; 
to  marry,  ducere  uxorem,  ^'C. 

And  so  on  of  phrases  in  general :  This  shows 
at  the  same  time  the  absolute  necessity  of  atten- 
ding more  to  the  sense  than  the  words,  and 
of  suiting  the  expressions  accordingly. 

Many  English  sentences  may  appear  very  dif- 
ficult and  hitricate,  and  sometimes  at  first  sight 
scarcely  susceptible  of  being  converted  into  ele- 
gant and  appropriate  Latin.  These  sentences, 
the  scholar  should  be  directed  to  read  repeatedly 
till  he  miderstands  perfectly  their  sense  and 
meaning.  His  first  business  will  be  then,  to 
simplify,  so  as  to  reduce  them  to  their  bare  and 
original  idea,  divesting  them  of  every  superfluous 
\\on\  and  idiomatic  expression:  and  he  should  not 
begin  to  write  any  part  of  the  sentence,  till  he 
has  furnished  himself  with  the  Latin  correspon- 
ding to  the  chief  heads  of  it:  for  his  first  attemp 
M  ill  not  always  embrace  the  full  scope  and  pur- 
port ^^  ^^^  meaning,  and  it  may  be  necessary  to 
^  .ivv  lii^  sentence  and  give  it  anew  aud  dKYercm 


tarn,  by  the  change  of  adive  into  passive,  ov 
passive  into  active,  &c.  ana  then  it  will  be  easy  to 
give  it  a  fuller  dress,  and  so  to  connect  it  by  the 
•dddhion  of  any  suitable  and  necessary  words,  as 
may  give  to  the  whole,  a  force,  ec(ual  to  that  of 
the  English. 

For  instance :  let  us  examine  this  sentence,  as  it 
is  ti-anslated  from  Cicero,  which  at  first  sight  ap- 
pears very  difficuU,  and  which,  if  it  could  be  turn- 
ed into  literal  Latin,  w  ould  be  unsufferable  to  the 
ear.  ♦''But  nothing,"  says  he,  "seems  to  me  of  su- 
perior excellence,  than  for  a  speaker  to  have  that 
irresistible  hold  upon  the  assemblies  of  men,  as  by 
the  charms  of  his  eloquence,  to  bend  their  minds 
to  his  own  purposes,  to  lead  them  to  whatever  di- 
rection he  chuses,  o**  dissuade  them  at  pleasure 
from  whatever  object  they  may  have  in  view." 
As  soon  as  the  scholar  begins  to  dissect  this  sen- 
tence, and  reduce  some  of  the  expressions  to  thei;* 
simple  idea,  ^f^  "^^^^  ^*^^  ^i^<x±  it  win  soon  admit 
ol  a  plain,  easy,  and  at  the  same  tijne  an  elegant 
dress.     Thus,  "  of  superior  excellence"  is  a  com- 
mon English  turn  for  the  bare  comparative,  more 
excellent,  prcestabilms^  "  for  a  speaker  to  have 
an  irresistible  hold,"  is  so  perfectly  English,  that 
a  literal  translation  would  not  be  Latin,   and 
means  nothing  more  than  "  by  speaking  to  hold," 
dicendo  ienere ;  "  to  bend  their  minds  to  his  own 
purposes"  is  simply  mentes  allicere^  "  to  his  own 
purposes"  being  a  mere  English  redundancy, 
wholly  unnecessary  in  Latin  ;  "  to  whatever  di- 
rection he  pleases,"  is  evidently  another  turn  pe- 
culiar to  the  English,  which  is  fully  comprehen- 
ded in  this  plain  expression,  Qudvelit ;  "  dissuade 


iheirrat  pleasure  from  \vhatever  object  they  may 
have  in  view,"  is  equiUly  nn  English  tum'of  ex- 
*    K  tiic  II  '"^of  which  is  riilly  included 

:ii  i.iv-o  few  w^fiKi^,  untfe  velit  drducere :  The 
whole  sentence  being  thus  simplified,  will  now 
appear  plain  and  eas^y,  and  >\  ill  (piickly  assume 
an  elegant  and  Ciceronian  dress.     *'  Necptcvero 

'!n(jfn(l(ji(am^  iiuprlt,  prccstabilius  ridctnr.  (pram 
^fossc  dicendo  tenerc  hominum  coetus^  mcntes  alike' 
re,  impellere  quo  velitj  nnde  autem  veUtj  deducere.^^ 

And  as  the  young  Latin  writer  is  apt  to  follow 
too  closely  the  literal  order  of  the  English,  it  may 
be  necessary  to  guard  him  against  this  common 
error,  by  the  following  observation,  ^vliich,  tho' 
coming  more  properly  under  the  head  of  the  or- 
der and  arrangement  of  words,  may  be  introdu- 
ced in  this  place,  as  being  applicable  to  almost 
every  example  in  this  book.  It  is  the  genius  of 
*he  Latin  language,  diat  the  order  and  position 
of  words,  are  not  i>ov»xa  Uy  en  strict  and  immuta- 
ble laws  as  in  other  languages,  though  certam 
rules  must  be  followed,  and  such  an  arrangement 
preserved,  that  the  style  may  not  be  confused, 
puerile,  and  inelegant.  Seldom  therefore  does 
the  nominative  case  come  first  in  the  sentence ; 
l)ut  other  cases,  unless  the  sense  and  perspicuity 
absolutely  require  it,  are  generally  placed  before 
it. 


EXAMPLES. 


1 .  C.  Julius  far  surpassed  all  his  eiders  and  contentporaries 
in  pUiosantrif  and  facetiousness,  and  lliough  he  was  not  a  ve- 
hement and  impetuous  orator,  yet  no  man's  spe«^ches  were  ever 
more  seasoned  with  urbanity,  wit,  and  elegance.  (Beijin  witli 
the  ablatives  and  then  the  nominative.) 


2.  Those  men  appear  to  mc  very  fortunate  indeed,  ichile  I 
revolve  in  my  mindy  and  retrace  in  livj  memory/,  the  annuls  of 
iiur  ancestors y\\\\o\\\  ^\\q\\  eonstituted  re])ublio,  an<  '  '  i 
arrived  at  the  summit  of  ^lory  and  honors,  could   fo'i  ii 

a  mode  of  life,  as  to  be  able  to  pursue  their  high  employments 
without  danger,  or  live  in  ease  and  retirement  with  liouor  and 

dignity. (Here  begin  with  the  dative,  and  change  the  verbs 

revolve  and  retrace  into  participles,  to  agree  with  the  dativ 
But  in  order  to  see  the  necessity  of  this  transposition,  begur 
with  the  nominatives, and  preserve  the  grammatical  order  oj  the 
English,  in  these  two  examples  ;  and  their  inelegance^   when 
compared  with  the  other,  will  immediately  appear,^ 

But  though  elegance  of  style  depends  very 
much  on  this  transposition,  care  must  be  taken 
to  avoid  a  confused  intermixture  of  words,  that 
for  instance,  what  belongs  to  a  clause  of  a  sen 
tence  in  which  the  relative,  qui,  quce^  quod^  oc- 
ciu's,  and  is  dependent  upon  it,  may  not  be  in- 
termixed with  the  clause  w  hich  contains  the  an- 
tecedent; as. 

The  man  who  has  once  transgressed  the 
bounds  of  modesty,  must  be  completely  and  per- 
fectly im})udent. 

It  may  not  be  inelegant  to  say, 

Qui  semel  vereciindice  fines  transierit,  tiuu  j^n ui- 
ms  oportet  esse  impudentem.     But  to  sa}^ 

Qui  semel  verecundice^  eum  prorsus  oportet  esse 
impudentem^  fines  transient^  would  render  the 
sense  obscure  and  unintelligible. 

Besides  this  obscurity,  whoever  wishes  to  ac- 
quire an  elegant  style  will  be  cai'cful  to  avoid  a 
too  frequent  repetition  of  the  same  word,  if  it 
does  not  tend  to  give  greater  weight  or  perspicui- 
ty to  the  subject.  The  same  syllable  too  closely 
and  frequently  repeated,  must  be  har<h  to  i\v\ 


in 


ear,  and  therefore  iiuic^iun,*  ixs  , nonet  et  hurUi- 
tnr.  I  A\ou]cl  not  say,  per  pcrhrem  tempus^  bur 
})tr  tcmpiis  pa  breve ;  thou}z;h  Cicero  hiniseli' 
sometimes  falls  into  this  apparent  negligence,  as 
sed  mulld  etiam  magis  monentc  et  denuntiante  ie. 
Several  words  following  each  other  with  the  same 
termination,  should  be  carefully  avoided  ;  as  eti' 
(un  eeiernos  mvhos  claros  virus  nominarem.  And 
w  hat  can  be  more  oflensive  to  the  ears  than  tJiesc 
words^JIentes^plorantes^  lacrymantes^  ohtestantes  f 
To  this  negligence  must  be  referred  a  too  great 
concourse  or  clashing  of  the  same  letter,  which 
either  must  produce  a  disagreeable  hai'shncss  in 
the  sound,  if  a  repetition  of  the  same  consonants, 
as  Rex  Xerxes,  or  if  they  are  vo^\  els,  must  cause 
such  a  hiatus  as  v^ill  produce  some  dilliculty  to 
pronounce,  as  magna  operto  ore.  Where  it  is  pos- 
sible to  give  a  sti'ict  attention  to  the  smooth  con- 
coui-se  of  the  ^vords,  without  endangering  the 
force  of  the  idea,  when  the  preceding  word  ter- 
minates with  a  consonant  the  next  should  begin 
with  a  vowel,  and  tiee  versa.  There  are  a  few 
words,  however,  the  succession  of  w  hich  is  not 
arbitrarj^,  but  which  has  been  fixed  by  the  unva- 
ried usage  of  the  ancients.  Ac  is  not  found  be- 
fore a  vowel,  but  always  before  a  consonant 
we  do  not  say  ac  ego,  but  atqiie  ego ;  seldom 
cque  autem,  but  neque  vera.  It  will  also  be  verv 
.(  ccssary  to  guard  against  poetical  endings  of  a 
:>rose  sentence,  which  though  not  very  culpable 
►r  disagreeable  in  themselves,  yet  will  not  fail  to 
displease,  as  they  carry  an  appearance  of  aflbcta- 
Tion  and  studied  conceit.    Th^^  fault  indeed  w^ 


1) 

much  sooner  observed  by  the  ancients,  who  are 
supposed  in  their  common  conversation  to  have 
pronounced  the  language  more  according  to 
metre,  than  it  can  be  by  us,  who  pronounce  many 
syllables  different  from  their  quantity;  as  this 
hexameter  of  Tacitus ; 

Urbem  Romam  a principio  regeshahuere. 

Or  tiiis  line  from  the  same  author,  which  is 
still  a  more  complete  verse  : 

Auguriis  patrum,  et  prised  fonnidine  sacram. 

Every  kind  of  ambiguity  should  also  be  care- 
fully avoided,  as  for  instance,  in  the  case  of  ad- 
jectives, where  multorum^  if  used  instead  of  mul- 
tarum  rerum^  might  be  mistaken  for  the  masculine 
gender. 

A  List  of  Latin  Prose  authors,  whose  authority 
may  be  safely  followed  by  the  young  scholar,  and 
whose  style  may  be  imitated  with  advantage,  as 
exhibiting  the  purest  standard  of  Latin  elegance. 

Cicero,  C^sar,  Livy,  Nepos,  Sallust,  Te- 
rence, flourished  during  the  golden  age,  which  is 
commonly  computed  from  the  time  of  the  second 
Punic  war  to  the  year  14  after  Christ.  These 
writers  afford  the  best  specimens  of  classic  purity, 
with  resj^ect  to  the  selection  of  words.  At  the 
same  time  it  may  be  observed,  that  words,  which 
occur  only  once  or  twice  in  Cicero,  as  munitare^ 
invalitudoy  may  be  considered  of  doubtful  au- 
thority ;  and  words  which  occm-  in  Livy,  Ceesar, 
C.  Nepos,  or  Sallust,  only,  as/am^^,  arum,  equal- 
ly doubtful. 

QumituAN,  Tacitus,  CuRTius,  Justin,  Val. 


M  vxiMus,  Pliny  ihe  younger,  flourished  in  the 
silver  age,  which  is  computed  iVoni  the  yeai-  14 
to  about  the  year  140  alter  Christ.  These  au- 
iliors  may  be  safely  followed,  as  the  most  repu- 
table of  that  ai;e  ;  and  though  the  Latin  language 
began  to  decline  in  their  time,  yet  it  exhibited  in 
their  writings  no  unfavourable  model  of  the  pu- 
rity and  elegance  of  the  Augustan  age. 


The  word  vir  is  used  when  the  praise  or  excel- 
lence of  any  one  is  mentioned,  never  when  blame 
is  expressed  :  Homo  is  used  indiscriminatPJv. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  >^  ?«rtw  of  the  greatest  virtue  and  honor  lias  been  cruelly 
put  to  death  by  a  man  of  the  most  abandoned  and  infamous 
character. 

2. 1  am  very  intimate  with  Fabius,  that  most  excellent  ■.^\^d 
learned  man.     (To  be  intimate  witU,  famili a riter  uti. 

3.  He  put  them  in  niind,  that  as  Darius  had  a  greater  num- 
ber oipers>ons,  so  he  had  a  greater  number  of  men. 

The  same  distinction  is  generally  made  be- 
tween the  pronouns  ilk  and  iste  ;  ilk  denoting 
praise,  and  iste  blame  or  contempt,  as  vir  ilk 
maximusj  iste  furcifer. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  Behold  that  liberty,  which  you  have  so  ardently  desired. 
1\   These  thlrifrs  (cruelty  and  insolence)  are  to  be  attributed 
to  arras  and  victory,  not  to  Ca?sar. 

Speaking  of  an  obscure  or  contemptible  person, 
the  Latins  generally  make  use  of  nescio  qiiis  for 
quidam.  Though  they  also  use  nescio  quis^  not 
merely  to  vilify,  but  to  magnify  ajiy  thing- 


13 

1.  W^Kit  liare  you  to  dread,  when  you  are  defendinc^  your 
<'ause  against  some  acciiaer^  whose  eloquence  no  one  ever  leav- 
ed ? 

2.  But  then  I  affirm,  tliat,  when  to  a  good  and  exceflent  nat- 
ural disposition,  the  eiDbellishments  of  learning  are  added  (ra- 
iio  doctrinob)  there  results  a  something  great  and  extraordinary. 


Quispiam^  quisqnam^  iillus,  and  unquam  are  el- 
egantly used  after  negatives  and  comparatives, 
after  vix^  and  5^,  when  there  is  any  doubt,  after 
an  interrogation  or  prohibition,  and  the  preposi- 
tion sine.  Observe  that  quisouam,  quispiam^  and 
ullus  are  thus  distinguished  Irom  qiiivis  and  qui- 
lihet ;  the  former  are  generally  used  in  a  negative 
or  interrogative  sense,  the  latter  always  in  the 
aflSrmative. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  Qiiispiam:  Is  there  o/zj^  person  in  the  world  o/ whom 
you  think  better  ? 

2.  Quisquam:  You  deny  that  the  tyrant  has  been  more 
cruel  to  Syracuse  than  any  one  of  his  predecessors. 

3.  Let  no  mail's  offence  make  you  lose  your  greatness  of  soul. 

4.  They  themselves  had  delivered  many  great  men,  tcithout 
the  suspicion  of  any  one. 

5.  Ullus :  Scarcely  have  you  left  the  other  orators  (with 
their  leave  let  me  speak  it)  any  merit  that  they  can  reap. 

Ullus  should  be  always  used  instead  of  omnis  alter  the  pre- 
position sine  ;  as, 
Without  all  doubt. 

6.  Unquam  ;  Darius  having  in  his  Jfliglit  drank  water,  which 
was  muddy,  and  defiled  with  dead  bodies,  said  that  he  had 
never  drank  with  greater  pleasure. 

(Observe  that  for  the  sake  of  brevity,  the  verb  dico  followed 
by  non  is  not  inelegantly  changed  into  the  verb  negOy  as  negavi 
me  esse  fact  urum^  for  dixi  me  non  factunun  esse.) 


14 

Neqh'M   U  rlrscnntly  used  for  vt  nemo. 


EXAMPLES. 


1.  They  discharged  him  from  his  office,  that  no  one  should 
afterwards  commit  the  same  crime  witli  impunity. 

2.  They  granted  a  writ  auainst  him,  that  no  man  might  say 
that  they  had  not  the  power  to  degrade  a  man. 


Nec  qicidqitam  is  more  elegantly  said  than  et 
nihil. 


EXAMPLE, 


^nd  physicians,  generals  and  orators,  though  they  under- 
stand perfectly  the  principles  of  their  science,  can  efl'ect  nothing 
very  great  or  meritorious,  without  experience  or  practice.  (Ar- 
tie proecepta  percipere,) 


Ipse  is  often  used  for  the  adjective  iotus  or 
integer,  in  defining  numbers  or  space  of  time 
with  great  exactness. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  I  have  been  absent  three  whole  days. 

2.  I  spent  three  whole  months  in  visitmg  and  exploring  a 
country,  wliich  some  writers  have  described  in  so  lively  a  man- 
ner. 


The  pronoun  is,  is  most  frequently  used  for 
talis,  followed  by  uty  or  qui;  as,  non  is  sum 
quern  contemnas. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  J  am  not  sitch  a  man,  that  I  sliould  utter  a  falsehood. 

2.  t  have  seen  surh  a  monster,  that  if  I  should  see  another 
as  terrible,  I  should  die  with  horror. 

3.  We  must  use  such  liberality,  as  may  profit  friends^  anc* 
hart  no  one 


^  OF  TBB         'V- 

15  ffUKIVEESIT'f' 

4.  Many  were  convicted  of  treasoir^^^^Ayij^^Fjl^l^^^ 
clemency,  that  only  three  were  execut^^t^^^Wtw2>F£^^ 
afficu)^  ^ 

5.  iSwcA  was  the  discipline  of  the  Romans,  that  the  son  was 
punished  by  the  father  himself:  and  thus  this  excellent  young 
man  was  capitally  punished  by  his  father  for  his  excessive 
courage.     {Pconas  morte  dedit\) 

Observe,  that  ?i^ poena  properly  signifies  atone- 
ment or  satisfaction,  it  is  put  in  the  accusative, 
the  person  who  inflicts  the  punishment  in  the 
dative,  the  crime  for  which  it  is  inflicted  in  the 
genitive,  and  the  manner  how  in  the  ablative. 
Literally,  he  paid  by  his  death  satisfaction  to  his 
father  for  his  courage. 


Idem  is  most  frequently  used  for  item,  porrd, 
etiam,  simul,  and  tum-tim  :  quod  idem  incestitiam 
reprehendit,  idemjocum. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  For  we  see  that  there  have  been  those,  who  at  the  same 
time  could  speak  with  dignity  and  elegance,  at  the  same  time 
with  artful  evasion  and  subtilty. 

2.  Caninius,  both  your  friend  aiid  ours,  having  come  to  my 
bouse  late  in  the  evening,  and  told  me  that  he  would  go  to  you 
early  the  next  day,  I  told  him  that  I  would  give  him  something 
in  the  morning,  and  begged  him  to  ask  me  for  it. 

3.  He  used  that  kind  of  food,  which  was  most  sweet  and 
wholesome,  and  at  thj^ame  time  most  easy  to  digest. 


Instead  of  rendering  the  English  word  all  by 
omnis,  it  will  sometimes  be  necessary  to  use  om- 
7iind,  sometimes,  nullus  non^  or  quisque^  and 
sometimes  the  relative  qui,  quce,  quod. 


16 

1,  There  were  m  4ul  but  two  \w.j  >,  Uy  which  tht-y  oouki 
go  out  of  tlieir  country  ;  one  through  the  Scquiini,  narrow  and 
dithcuh  3  the  other  through  our  proviuce,  much  ea^^ier  and 
reailier. 

2.  The  queen  most  bountifully  entertained  him  with  all 
courtesy  and  hospitality. 

3,  Because  the  iuiiahitauts  offered  so  httle  money  to  redeem 
the  town,  they  began  to  deraohsh  all  the  nohlvst  huUdbtgs^ 

4.  All  the  time  that  he  spent  upon  his  hists  and  sports, 
{which  was  a  great  part  of  his  time)  he  stole  from  the  slate,  the 
governmeot  of  which  he  had  undertaken. 


For  the  English,  all  ofthcm^  allofwhom^  the 
1)cst  Latin  writers  use  illi  omnes^  qui  omnes. 


EXAMPLE. 


1.  Our  men,  seeing  the  enemy  entirely  dispersed,  aU  of 
trhom  had  thrown  down  their  arras,  retired  within  their  own 
entrenchments. 


The  English  word  every  may  also  be  varicjus- 
ly  rendered  by  singulis  qitisque,  when  it  implies 
each  :  sometimes  by  sijigtili  repeated  ;  by  alhfs 
aliusy  w  hen  it  implies  a  diversity ;  each  in  their 
separate  cases  :  as,  Trahit  sua  ouemque  Volup- 
tas  ;  singulis  legimiihus  singiilos  legatos,  Every^ 
before  a  word  of  time,  or  used  distributively, 
may  likewise  be  rendered  by  in  with  an  accusa- 
tive case. 

t 


EXAMPLES. 


1 .  The  strength  of  all  sciences,  like  the  old  man's  facrgot, 
consists  not  in  every  a'mgle  sticky  but  in  all  of  them  united  in 
the  band. 

2.  The  Biographer  of  Atticus  observes,  that  they,  who  arc 
one  day  at  the  height  of  power  and  honor,  arc  often  the  n^wt 


ir 

]JB  the  gulph  of  daoger  and  despair ;  so  that  this  remark  i^ 
generally  very  true :  every  man's  manners  fashion  and  shape 
his  fortune. 

3.  To  every  thinf^  there  is  a  season^  and  it  is  the  duty  ol 
every  man  to  use  hrs  time  profitably  to  himself  and  others. 

4.  In  every  corner  of  the  court  there  was  a  court,  (plarai) 

*5.  Every  man  has  his  particular  delight.  As  for  me,  my 
pleasure  lies  in  wise  thinking  and  reasonable  desires ;  give  me 
a  sound  and  a  sober  undei'standing — a  temper  that  never 
falls  out  with  men  and  accidents — that  takes  all  things  with 
good  humor,  computes  rightly  upon  their  value,  and  puts  them 
to  the  use  for  v^hich  they  are  fit.  (alia  alium^  with  a  vetb  ac- 
tive.) 

6.  He  changes  his  wavering  mind  every  hour. 

7.  No  one  gave  less  than  eighteen  bushels  evury  acre. 


The  word  some  also,  when  repeated,  or  follow- 
ed by  the  word  other ^  is  rendered  by  alifur^  aliv 
oi*  hie  and  ille. 


EXAMPLES. 

1.  Of  the  things  objected  to  him,  some  be  ackuowIorUred^ 
some  lie  extenuated,  some  he  excused  by  reason  of  huniaii 
frailty,   the  greater  part  he  flatly  denied. 

2.  They,  alledging  some  one  cause^  and  some  another,  with- 
drew themselves  daily,  by  degrees,  out  of  that  rude  and  barba- 
rous country. 

3.  Certainly  the  inrhnation  of  princes  to  so?n€  men^  and 
their, a  version  toothers,  may  seem  fatal. 

4.  Some  think  one  thing,  some  another. 


One  another  is  also  rendered  by  hie  and  ilk^  by 
alter  alter^  alius  aliiiSj  and  quisqile :  as  one  man 

3 


18 

delights  in   07ie  style   of  speaking,  another  in 
another :  alius  alio  dicendi  genere  gaudet. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  It  was  agreed,  that  there  should  be  free  commerce,  till 
rnie  prince  should  denounce  war  against  the  other, 

2.  There  is  o?ie  kind  of  deportment  due  to  a  father,  and 
e^iother  to  a  son ;  one  to  our  own  countryman,  and  another  ta 
a  strangei'  j  one  to  a  friend  or  benefactor,  and  another  to  an 
tneroy  who  has  injured  us. 

3.  It  is  very  difficult  to  determine  nicely,  what  one  man 
ought  to  make  good  to  another. 


Modern  writers  often  place  the  preposition  de 
for  of  before  the  place  of  abode  of  any  person,  as 
Thomas  of  Nonmch  ;  Thomas  de  Norvico.  But 
this  is  inaccurate,  and  never  used  by  classical 
writers.     We  should  say,  Thomas  Norvicensis. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  Aristotle  of  Stag)Ta  slept  little,  and  always  had  one  arm 
out  of  his  couch  and  held  in  his  hand  a  bullet,  which  by  falling 
into  a  brazen  bason  underneath,  early  awaked  him. 

2.  Some  writers  have  denominated  Vatavinity^  those  ex* 
pressions,  and  a  certain  Dialect,  which  they  seem  to  discoret 
in  the  style  of  Livy  of  Patavium. 


Instead  of  is  expressed  in  Latin, 
1st.  Before  a  substantive,  by  pro  with  an  abla- 
tive, loco  or  vice  with  a  genitive. 


EXAMPLES. 


1.  Cato  alone  is  to  me  instead  of  a  hundred. 

2.  Men  who  read  Luciljus  imtoad  of  Horace,  and  Lucre- 
tius instead  of  Virgil. 


19 


3,  You  have  so  endeared  yourself  to  me  by  y<1lir  kindliest; 
that  you  shall  always  be  to  me  instead  of  a  brother. 


When  a  succession  or   change  of  place  is  ex- 
pressed, instead  of  is  rendered  by  in  locum. 


EXAMPLES. 


1 .  When  men  are  about  to  engage  in  battle,  hov/  could  thc} 
shake  off  the  fear  of  so  many  toils  and  pains,  and  even  o 
AJeath  itself,  if  instead  of  tJiem^  piety  and  fortitude,  and  the 
image  of  honor  were  not  present  to  their  minds  ? 

2.  He  sent  me  instead  of  another. 


2dly,  before  a  verb. 

If  the  subject  is  a  thing  that  ought  to  be  done 
instead  of  is  expressed  by  cum  with  the  subjunc- 
tive of  debeo ;  as, 

Instead  of  studying  he  plays. 

We  should  say, 

Ludit  cmji  studere  deberet. 

EXAMPLES. 

1 .  The  conduct  of  our  generals  deserves  the  greatest  repre 
hension.  They  waste  their  precious  time  in  disputing  amon^ 
themselves,  instead  of  marching  directly  against  the  enemy 
and  commencing  the  engagement. 

2.  Instead  of  showing  his  gratitude  for  the  favors  which  he 
has  received,  he  wholly  neglects  his  friends. 

3.  Instead  q/*observing  a  strict  discipline,  the  soldiers  of  the 
enemy  are  now  dispersed  over  the  whole  country. 


If  the  subject  is  a  thing  that  mifiht  be  done,  in- 
stead of  is  expressed  by  cum  with  the  subjunc- 
tive of  posum ;  as, 


We  sliotild  say, 

^^nJcf  ctun  hdere  jpossa. 

KXA>frL£.S. 

1.  Tnsfeadof  b«f;  msclf  to  n^t,  after  tie  nKirtcCs  aD<i 

blioui-s  of  the  (lay,  h.  .  .  v.  to  retire  into  his  closet,  where  ke 
^^enerally  dcvctccl  several  hours  of  the  night  to  study  and  medi- 
cation. 

e.  Instead  of  ?»li€ltering  liimself  umler  a  tree,  he  encoua- 
ters  the  whole  fury  of  the  storm. 

S,  How  pitial '  '  '  \  case,  who,  in  his  journey  throu{^hli(e, 
instead  of  eu]i)\\\  li    moderation  tlie   fruits  of  his  houesT 

lUbors,  even  debars  himself  of  those  innoeent  refreshments 
Vhich  oflftr  themselves  by  the  way. 


Observe,  if  the  verb  is  in  a  past  tense,  dtheo 
ox  possum  must  be  put  in  the  pluperfect;  as, 

He  played,  instead  of  studying  ; 

We  should  say, 
Ludebat  cum  studere  dcbuisset. 

EXAMP1.KS. 

1.  Instead  of  pursuing  the  enemy,  and  reaping  the  fruit«  of 
his  glorious  victory  at  Canna?,  Hannibal  kept  his  army  the 
greatest  part  of  the  winter  at  Capua,  th€  dissoluteness  and 
)uxiui«s  of  which  city  so  enei*vated  the  minds  and  bodies  of 
his  soldiers,  that  Marcellus  seems  to  have  said  with  great  pro- 
priety, that  Cnpua  had  proved  a  Canna?  to  Hannibal. 

*2.  He  retarded  the  progress  of  his  attainments  and  studies 
by  a  culpable  carelessness  and  indifference,  iixstead  of  putting 
to  the  best  advantai^e  and  improving  those  excellent  talentj 
which  nature  had  given  him. 

3.  The  Tyrant  Dionysius,  instead  of  adx^rnlno;  the  miud  of 
the  son  of  Dion  with  virtue  and  leaniimr,  brought  him  up  i 

n  plungec 


21 

Sdly,  If  it  is  a  thing  that  ouj^ht  not  to  be 
done,  instead  of  is  turned  into  and  not^  or  rather 
than;  as, 

You  ought  to  study,  instead  of  playing. 

We  should  say, 

Stadere  deberes,  non  autem  ludere  ;  or,  studere 
deberes^  potiiis  qncim  ludere. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  A  wise  governor  ought  to  encourage  peaceful  arts,  ?«- 
stead  of  endangering  the  safety  of  his  country  by  useless 
wars. 

2.  Shall  we  spend  our  precious  time  in  ease  and  idleness, 
instead  of  studying  the  liberal  arts,  and  storing  our  minds  with 
va-rious  kinds  of  knowledge  ? 

3.  We  ought  to  apply  a  part  of  our  fortunes  in  relievingr  the 
indigent,  redressing  the  oppressed,  and  in  doing  acts  of  kind- 
ness to  all,  instead  of  squandering  our  riches  in  profligacy  and 
extravagance. 


So  far  from  is  rendered  in  Latin  sometimes  by 
adeb  non^  ita  non^  sometimes  by  tantum  abest  utj 
followed  by  ut^  or  by  non  modo  non-sed  etiam^ 
non  solum  non-verum  etiam ;  as. 

You  are  so  far  from  loving  me^  that  you  rather 
hate  me  :  Tantum  abest  ut  one  ames^  lit  me  potius 
oderis. 


EXAMPLES. 


1.  He  was  so  far  from  being  superstitious,  thai  he  despisr  d 
those  many  sacrifices  and  temples  in  his  own  country  :  so  far 
from  being  fearful  of  death,  that  he  was  slain  in  battle  in  the 
service  pf  the  public. 

3  * 


72? 

2.  He  was  so  far  from  beir  v  of  mone;^',  fkat  he 

made  no  other  use  of  it,  tliaa  to  i..  ^  ...s  friends  from  dangers 
-and  inconveniences  with  it.  (An  ablative  iciihparticij^lcfuL 
in  dus,) 

'?.  Attieiis'  peacefulness  and  neutrality,  were  so  acceptable 
to  Cresar,  that  when  he  was  victor,  and  commanded  money 
f  by  letter*,  he  was  so  far  from  molesting 

t.  v\\  him  up  his  sister's  son  out  of  Pompcv'S 

vump. 

4.  You  are  so  far  from  loving  me,  that  you  injuri'  r.»<.  ;  ^ 
iuuch  as  you  can. 

5.  So  far  is.  my  grief /ro//i  being  lessened,  that  it  is  in^ 
creased. 


On  the  point  qfy  is  rendered  in  Latin  by  in  eo 
ut;  it  is  in  agitation  to,  by  itl  agitar  ut :  and  in 
the  case  of  before  a  noun,  is  expressed  by  in 
with  an  ablative* 


EXAMPLES. 

1.  As  he  had  been  cast  in  his  suit,  he  was  on  the  point  of 
b^ing  ruined. 

2.  They  made  a  sally  from  ever>^  gate,  and  were  already  on 
the  point  of  being  repulsed,  when  they  sounded  a  retreat,  and 
leturned  into  the  town. 

3.  He  had  as  many  votes  as  tha  law  required,  and  it  was 
understood  that  it  teas  in  agitation  to  elect  him  consul. 

4.  What  strange  perverseness  is  that,  if  the  same  thing  be 
iione  in  your  case^  which  you  yourself  did  in  the  case  of 
another. 

5.  He  assured  them  that  he  would  do,  as  he  had  done  in  the 
ccte  of  his  oilier  enemies. 


Primus^  %tnt^,  sohsj  uUimuSj  frustra^  ^e.  are 


I 


f 

used  simply  with  the  verb,  instead  of  prmiisfmi 
qui,  ^-c.-as  also  the  interrogative  quis  :  as, 

fVho  is  there  that  would  not  embrace  virtue  her- 
self?  Quis  virtutem  non  ampleditur  ipsam  ? 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  He  was  the  only  one  who  remained  at  his  post. 

2.  Sicily  was  the  Jirst  of  foreign  states  wfiich  courted  the 
friendship  of  the  Roman  people. 

3.  But  the  Ubians,  who  were  the  only  nation  of  all  those  be- 
yond the  Rhine  that  had  sent  Ambassadors  to  Caesar,  earnest- 
ly entreated  him  to  come  to  their  assistance. 

4.  It  is  in  vain  for  a  man  to  avoid  prodigality,  if  he  turn  to 
the  contrary  excess. 

5.  Who  is  there  that  does  not  hate  a  vicious  and  saucy 
young  man  ?  On  the  contrary,  who  is  there  who  does  not  ad- 
mire and  love  modesty  and  faithfulness,  though  they  no  way 
concern  himself  ? 


Without  before  a  substantive  after  a  negation 

may  be  expressed  by  nisi^  nisi  cum ;  as,   They 

Jight  not  without  pay :  non  pugnant  nisi  stipendiati. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  Labienus,  when  he  had  spoken  these  things,  swore  that 
lie  would  not  return  into  the  camp  without  victor}'.  (Without 
being  victorious.) 

2.  The  Queen  answered,  that  she  had  no  power  to  give  the 
daughters  of  her  subjects  in  marriage,  without  the  consent  oi 
their  parents. 


Or  it  may  be  expressed  by  a  verb,  a  partici- 
ple, or  an  adverb  ;  as,  Grass  groios  xcithout  bid- 
dings or  sowing:  injussa  virescunt  Gramina, 


24 


EXAMPLES. 


1.  The  death  of  this  man  was  not  without  suspicion  of  poi- 
son among  the  vulgar,  who  always  suspect  those  to  be  poisoned 
whom  they  love. 

2.  If  Pompey,  when  he  w*|s  sick,  had  died  in  Naples,  he 
would  not  have  been  engaged  in  a  war  with  h»s  fatlier-in-law ; 
he  had  not  taken  up  arms  without  pj-ejiaration. 

3.  The  best  things  which  we  do  arc  painful,  and  the  exercise 
of  them  grievous,  if  they  arc  continued  without  intermission. 

4.  He  lluished  the  business  without  staying  longer. 

5.  They  went  off  without  observing  that  they  were  closely 
watched. 

Let  it  be  observed,  that  where  the  latter  clause 
is  emphatical,  the  verb  should  be  used  instead  of 
the  participle. 

6.  He  walks  through  the  garden  without  admiring  the 
sweetness  of  the  lilies  and  roses,  the  beautiful  order  of  the 
walks,  and  the  melodious  singing  of  the  birds,     (^nec  tatneu.) 


WitJwuU  before  a  verb,  may  be  expressed  by 
the  relative  qui^  quce^  quod,  by  quin,  or  by  an 
ablative  absolute ;  as,  He  does  nothing  imthout 
consulting  you  :  nihil  agit  quin  te  consulate  or  te 
inconsulto. 


EXAMPLES. 


1.  Since  my  father  does  nothing  great  or  small  urithout 
communicating  it  to  me,  why  should  he  conceal  this  from  me  ? 

2.  I  cannot  read  Tully  concerning  old  age ;  concerning 
friendship  ;  his  offices ;  or  his  Tusculan  questions,  without  ai- 
Bost  adoring  lliat  divinely  iriSpired  breast. 


IS 

3.  It  is  a  miserable  thing  to  die  before  o»e*s  iime.  Wkat 
time,  I  pray  ?  That  of  Nature  ?  Why  Nature  for  h^r  part  gave 
you  the  use  of  life,  as  of  so  much  money,  without  setting  any 
Uciy  of  payment. 


Opus  est  IS  elegantly  followed  by  the  ablative 
of  the  participle  passive ;  as,  instead  of  muturare 
opus  esty  we  should  say,  rnaturato  opus  est. 

EXAMPLE. 

Before  you  begin,  it  is  necessary  to  deliberate,  an(J  when 
you  have  deliberated,  you  must  act  with  vigor  and  dispatch. 
(mature  facto  ) 


Observe  that  where  there  is  a  neuter  adjective 
or  pronoun,  especially  when  followed  by  quo^  it 
is  better  for  the  sake  of  perspicuity  to  use  opus 
with  the  nominative ;  or  as  some  grammarians 
have  it,  opus  must  become  an  adjective ;  as, 

He  has  need  of  what  he  enjoys  :  Id  ei  opus 
est,  quofruitur.  It  would  not  be  so  well  to  say, 
opus  est  eo  quo^  because  they  might  be  taken  for 
the  masculine. 


EXAMPLES. 


1.  Yoti  have  no  need  of  that  ichich  I  have  need  of;  whilst 
you  are  contented  with  your  own  condition,  and  even  superflu- 
ities are  become  necessary  to  me. 

2.  He  has  need  of  that  very  thing  which  Hannibal  and  ma- 
ny other  generals  used  in  the  midst  of  the  greatest  dangers,  and 
i«  every  engagement  which  they  call  presence  of  mind. 


We  say  that  the  verb  sum  is  followed  by  a 
genitive  or  an  ablative  when  it  serves  to  denote 
a  quality,  praise  and  blame,  &€•  but  it  is  only 


If 

wlien  there  is  an  adjective  added  to  the  sub^taiv 
live  ;  as, 

That  lady  is  of  remarkable  beauty. 

We  should  not  s?iy  pidchntucUne  alone.  And 
it  must  be  observed  that  the  genitives  or  abla- 
tives are  not  ahvays  used  indiscriminately  ;  we 
should  not  say  est  magni  natus^  but  magno  natn. 

EXAMPLES. 

*1.  But  lest  I  should  entertain  too  sanguine  a  hope  of  suc- 
cess in  a  pursuit,  which  admits  of  so  much  uncertainty,  I  com- 
mit myself  and  my  fortunes  solely  to  your  favour  and  well 
known  benevolence  y  for  indeed  what  right  have  I  to  use  so 
pressing  a  solicitation  to  you,  who  are  of  the  highest  authority 
and  roost  consummate  wisdom  ? 

2.  When  Timoleon  had  so  great  an  authority  aud  such 
complete  poirer^  that  he  might  have  governed  them  even  against 
their  will,  but  at  the  same  time  so  much  possessed  the  love  and 
aflections  of  the  Sicilians,  that  he  might  have  obtained  the  king- 
dom with  the  unanimous  consent  of  all;  preferring  their  love  to 
tlieir  fear,  he  abdicated  the  sovereign  power  and  lived  a  private 
man  at  Syracuse. 

*3.  He  is  a  man  of  consummate  prudence  but  his  brother  tV 
a  youth  of  a  daring  disposition* 


Oportei,  opus  est,  necesse  est^  veUniy  ^c.  usually 
take  an  infinitive  after  them,  or  a  subjunctive 
with  the  conjunction  ut :  but  it  is  more  elegant 
to  omit  this  conjunction ;  as  it  is  likewise  to 
leave  it  out  after  the  verb  caveo. 


EXAMPLE. 


There  is  a  certain  intemperate  degree  of  aflfection  toward  our 
Iheods,  which  it  is  necessary  that  we  should  restrain. 


27 

But  instead  ofnon  opus  est^  non  oportet,  quid 
est  opus  J  it  is  more  elegant  simply  to  say  non  est 
quod^  nihil  est  quod ;  as,  nihil  est  quod  mihi  agas 
graticis ;  There  is  no  reason  that  you  should 
thank  me. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  Concerning  the  affairs  of  Britain,  I  understand  from  your 
letters,  that  there  is  no  need  to  apprehend  any  danger. 

2.  I  am  distracted  with  my  apprehensions  concerning  the 
health  of  our  Tullia,  concerning  which  there  is  no  need  to 
write  more  largely  to  you. 

3.  What  occasion  is  there  to  build  a  tragedy  on  so  trifling  a 
subject  ? 


i8 


1 


RrCE^   F0»  THE    PilOMdfW  ^l/t,   ^Ji<f,   ^iftrf,   AST)  OTirER  REIATITE5 

Nec  quidquam  est.  quod  tarn  deceat  studiosum  rectte  Latiai- 
tatis,  quam  iste  usus  pronominis  istius. 

Nothing  occurs  more  frequently  in  Cicero, 
and  in  the  best  Latin  authors,  than  the  use  of 
qui^  qiice^  quod^  varied  according  to  the  sense  and 
structure  of  the  sentence ;  but  in  most  cases  it 
Avill  be  found  to  contribute  to  brevity,  as  form- 
ing an  etsential  part  of  elegance,  and  will  give 
a  more  compact  and  close  connexion  to  senten- 
ces. After  digmis  and  indignus^  especially  qui 
Is  used  in  its  different  cases  for  ut  ego,  ut  tu,  ut 
is  J  lit  mens,  ut  tibi,  ut  noster,  ^c.  followed  by  the 
subjunctive  mood :  as,  you  are  worthy  to  be 
loved ;  dignus  es,  qui  aniens. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  Your  mother  deserves,  or  is  worthy,  that  yow  should  love 
her,  obey  her,  and  learn  of  her,  (Use  the  pronoun  qui  in 
these  different  cases,  as  governed  by  the  different  verbs.) 

2.  You  are  worthy  that  I  should  look  to  your  happinessr. 
(Quorum,) 

3.  You  have  been  wortliy  that  we  should  listen  to  you. 

4.  My  parents  are  worthy  that  every  kind  of  happiness 
should  befall  them, 

*5.  But  after  they  have  spent  their  youth  in  the  greatest  de- 
bauchery and  profligacy,  after  they  have  disgraced  their  birth 
mid  noble  name  by  the  vHost  actions,  and  mo^t  atrocious  crimes. 


^^       OF  THB 

tijcy  arc  indeed  uninorthy  that  you  should  j^a^aj^lHiilQii^^ 
mities,  or  again  receive  them  into  your  society.  ^""^ 

One  of  the  greatest  difficulties  which  the  scho- 
lar meets  with,  in  writing  correct  and  elegant 
Latin,  is,  to  ascertain  when  the  relative  qui^  and 
other  relative  particles,  require  the  subjunctive 
mood  after  them,  though  the  sense  of  the  Eng- 
lish seems  to  demand  an  indicative ;  I  shall 
therefore  offer  a  few  rules  and  observations  on 
this  subject,  for  the  substance  of  which  I  am  in- 
debted to  the  valuable  remarks  of  Dr.  Crombie, 
in  his  "  Gymnasium,"  who  seems  to  l)e  the  first 
critic  who  has  suggested  the  principle  of  tiie  first 
rule. 

When  the  relative  clause  does  not  refer  to  the 
sentiments  of  the  author,  but  of  the  person  or 
persons  of  whom  he  speaks,  then  the  subjunctive 
mood  is  used  :  as,  Tarquin  said^  that  he  (Servius) 
was  a  partisan  of  the  lowest  rabble^  from  ivhomhe 
sprung ;  that  he  laid  upon  the  nobles  all  the  bur- 
dens^ which  before  were  common :  Esse  fautorcm 
infimi  generis  hominum^  ex  quo  ipse  sit ;  omnia 
o7iera,  qucB  commu7iia  quondam  fuerint^  incUnaS" 
se  inprimores  civitatis.  Here  the  relative  clauses 
do  not  express  the  sentiments  of  the  author,  Li- 
vy,  but  of  the  person,  Tarquin,  of  whom  he  is 
speaking.  At  the  same  time  it  will  be  necessary 
to  observe  the  distinction  between  the  subjunc- 
tive and  the  potential  moods ;  because,  in  many 
cases,  the  sense  may  require  the  potential,  without 
being  affected  by  the  relative :  as,  He  ordered 
them  to  report  ivhat  they  said^  quce  dicerent^   ilmt 

4 


so 

is  tvhat  they  should  smjy  potential.     If,  on  the  con 
trary,  the  relative  clause  refers  to  thesentimenl- 
of  the  author  or  writer,  or  is  the  actual  language 
of  the  person  of  whom   the  author  is  speaking, 
tlie  relative  is  followed  by  the  indicative  mood. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  He  declared  that  he  was  now  eighty  years  old,  and  had 
carried  arms  in  the  very  territory  now  in  question,  not  indeed 
when  he  was  a  very  young  man,  for  he  was  then  serving  for 
the  twentieth  time,  when  that  war  broke  out.  He  wondered 
in  what  manner  those  neighbours  could  hope  to  obtain  from  a 
.people,  to  whose  decision  they  appealed^  those  lands,  of  which 
they  had  never  claimed  the  rights  while  that  state  flourish- 
ed. As  for  himself,  he  had  but  a  short  time  to  live,  but  he 
could  not  satisfy  his  mind,  without  lending  his  feeble  voice, 
old  as  he  was,  to  assert  their  right  to  that  tenitory,?rAt'fA  he^ 
%chcii  a  soldier^  had  conquered  by  arms,  fighting  with  all  tlje 
courage  he  possessed.  (This  evidently  refers  to  the  senti- 
ments of  the  speaker,  and  not  to  those  of  the  writer  :  as  also  in 
the  subsequent  example.) 

2.  He  rested  the  point  of  controversy  not  on  the  order  of 
succession,  but  on  the  felicity  of  his  birth.  That  his  brother 
indeed  had  been  born  first,  but  it  was  while  his  lather  was 
yet  in  a  private  station;  that  he  on  the  contrary  was  the  first 
born,  after  his  father  had  been  advanced  to  the  throne. 
That  his  brothers,  therefore,  who  were  born  before  hirjK  might 
claim  as  their  right  the  private  patrimony,  which  their  father 
jwssesffed  at  that  time,  but  not  the  kingdom ;  but  that  he  was 
the  first,  whom  his  father  had  brought  np  after  he  had  obtain- 
ed the  kingdom. 

3.  You  see,  he  said,  the  dress  and  ornament  of  your  gene- 
ral, which  not  any  one  of  my  enemies  has  laid  ttpon  me  ; 
for  that  would  have  been  some  consolation.  (These  are  the 
indentical  v/ords  of  the  speaker,  and  not  the  sentiments  of  the 
author  ;  and  therefore  the  relative  clause  is  followed  by  an  in- 
dicative :  if  instead  of  being  the  very  words  of  the  speaker, 
they  had  been  his  sentiments,  as  reported  by  the  historian,  the 
verb  would  have  been  the  subjunctive,  imposuisHct :  in  this 
manner,  lie  told  tliem  that  they  saw  the  dress,  which  not  an 
tncmy  h^d  laid  on  him.) 


31 

« 

4.  He  tlicn  marched  into  Greece,  and  overlluew  many 
cities,  by  tlie  extermination  of  which  the  Spartans,  being 
filarmed,  enchjse  with  fortifications  their  city,  which  they  had 
always  defended  with  arms,  and  not  whh  wails,  in  opposition 
to  their  oracles,  and  the  ancient  glory  of  their  ancestors.  (This 
refers  evidently  to  the  sentiments  of  the  writer,  and  therefore 
the  relative  is  followed  by  an  indicative.) 


When  the  relative  clause  expresses  the  cause  of 
the  action,  and  may  be  rendered  in  English  by 
the  preposition  in  with  the  participle ;  or  when  it 
is  used  for  et  quod  is,  et  qiioniam  is,  ^c.  or  comes 
after  ut  pote,  ut  qidppe,  it  will  be  followed  by 
the  subjunctive  mood  :  as,  omnes — laudare  for- 
tunas  meas,  qui  gnatum  haberem  tali  ingenio prce- 
ditiim;  All  praised  my  fortunes,  who  had,  or,  in 
having,  or,  because  I  had,  such  a  son. 

EXAMPLE. 

1 .  Happy  sailor,  who  gained  the  shores,  and  was  safely 
drawn  on  dry  land. 

2.  How  imgrateful  you  are  to  fortune,  whot\\\x%  make  a  toil 
of  a  pleasure. 

3.  Since  there  are  many  kinds  of  guests,  icho  estimate,  or 
and  because  they  estimate  my  expense  by  their  own,  and  des- 
pise my  homely  fare,  them  I  never  will  invite. 


When  the  relative  follows  an  interrogative,  or 
a  negative,  and  expresses  the  same  thing  and 
fjubject  as  the  antecedent  clause,  it  is  joined  with 
the  subjunctive  mood  :  as,  There  is  no  one  tvho 
docs  not  hate  you :  nemo  est,  qui  te  non  orderit. 
This  is  for  the  sake  of  avoiding  ambiguity ;  since, 
if  we  said,  nemo  est,  qui  te  non  odit,  it  might  be 
construed,  he  who  hates  you  not  is  nobody. 


S2 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  h/to  is   {\w  boy,  who  can  ap^}Ii/ \o  his  studios,  wUcic 
there  is  surh  a  noise  ? 

2.  There  is  ?io  one  who  does  not  umlersfandj  that  the  body 
'     '  '     -       '         "        '         '   '      t  recruiied,  when  it  is 


The  relative  coming  alter  the  English  verbs  to 
he,  to  be  founds  when  preceded  by  the  word  there^ 
is,  for  the  sake  of  perspicuity,  followed  by  the 
subjunctive  mood :  as,  There  are  men  tvbo  say : 
sunt  qui  dicant. 

EXAMPLES. 

1 .  Tliere  have  been  found  men,  who  voluntarily  shortened 
iheir  own  life  :  these  I  think  worse,  and  more  mischievous. 

2.  There  are  philosophers,  who  think  that  the  most  precious 
thing  in  life  is  time. 


When  the  relative  comes  after  intensive  word^, 
as,  such,  so,  and  is  used  for  ut  ego,  ut  tu,  ^-c.  it 
is  followed  by  the  subjunctive  :  as,  lam  not  such 
a  man  as  to  say,  or,  /  am  not  the  man,  icho  says  ; 
non  snm  is,  qui  dicam.  This  w^ill  not  take  place 
after  the  demonstrative  pronoun  is ;  for  it  would 
then  be,  /  am  not  that  man,  who  say,  non  sum  is 
qui  dico,  or,  Lwho  say  am  not  that  inan. 


EXAMPLES. 


1.  I  am  not  so  hard-hearted,  as  to  deny  you  your  request. 

2  Such  h  the  authority  of  this  man,  that  it  can  neither  be 
shaken  by  the  secret  intrigue  ol  his  enemies,  nor  by  the  opeu 
attacks  of  the  muhitadc. 


For  the  sake  of  perspicuity  the  subjunctive  will 
be  used  after  qui^  \v  hen  it  is  preceded  by  such 
resti'ictive  words  as,  solus^  imicus,  umis  :  as,  He 
is  the  only  one  of  the  family  who  learns  ;  est  solus 
exfamilid  qui  discat ;  were  we  to  say  discit,  it 
might  be  mistaken  for,  he  who  learns  is  the  only 
one  of  the  family. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  He  was  the  only  one  of  the  philosophers,  iclio  maintain- 
ed that  wisdoin  was  the  only  guide  of  life,  which  led  to  happi- 
ness. 

2.  He  was  the  only  one  who  saidxh?iX  the  soul  of  man  is  the 
man,  that  the  body  is  nothing  but  a  dwelling  or  an  instrti- 
ment. 


When  qui  is  used  foi  the  interrogative  indefi- 
nite quis^  and  not  as  a  mere  relative,  it  is  follow- 
ed by  the  subjunctive ;  as  Tell  rne,  ichom  you  see^ 
.  die  mihi  quern  videas  :  if  it  was  merely  the  rela- 
tive, as  in  this  sentence,  /  know  the  man  whom 
you  see^  it  would  be,  notus  est  mihi  homoj  quern 
vides, 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  As  for  me,  from  the  time  when  I  first  saw  you,  and  learnt 
from  most  men,  with  whom  I  conversed,  what  erudition  and 
virtue  ynu  possessed,  it  became  the  first  object  of  my  wishes, 
to  gain  your  love  and  esteem. 

2.  Do  you  inquire  to  what  end  tend  so  many  sciences,  and 
by  what  arts  men  hav£  polished  the  rude  manners  of  barba- 
rians, and  have  changed  worse  for  better,  disgraceful  for  excel- 
lent, and  the  vilest  for  the  most  precious  things  ? 


It  is  not  only  after  dignus,  that  the  relative  qui 
is  used  for  ict^  but  in  general  where  the  relati\  e 

...      .  4* 


34 

olausc  indicates  any  final  causr,  design  or  piir- 
jyusc,  and  might  be  rendered  by  a  supine,  by  vt 
or  ae/j  llieji  qui  may  be  elegantly  used :  a^ 
He  sent  embassadors  to  sue  for  peace ;  misit  It  ga- 
tes qui  pacem  peterent. 

EXAMPLE. 

1.  He  sent  certain  men  to  bring  him  to  town. 

2.  Then  Romulus  by  the  advice  of  the  Fathers  sent  Embas- 
sadors to  the  neighboring  states  ^;.sohcit  the  friendship  anvl 
connubial  alliances  with  this  newly  established  people. 

3.  I  did  not  give  you  money  to  use  at  your  pleasure. 

4.  He  further  enjoined  them  to  send  spies  into  all  parts  to 
learn  the  designs  ai>d  motions  of  their  enemies. 

5.  As  he  could  not  assault  the  place  by  covert  ways,  he  or- 
ilered  the  engines  to  be  ready,  to  assault  it  by  open  force. 

6.  I  gave  you  those  books  to  send  to  your  brother.  (This 
might  aLo  be  elegantly  rendered  by  the  participle  future  pas- 
sive.) 


And  in  many  other  instances  it  is  used  for  the 
English  infinitive,  where  the  sense  will  easily 
admit  of  it. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  As  a  calm  at  sea  is  understood,  when  the  least  breath  of 
wind  does  not  stir  the  waves ;  so  is  the  quiet  and  peaceful 
itate  of  the  mind  beheld,  when  there  is  no  passion  to  discon^ 
pose  it, 

2.  They  have  no  clocks  to  distinguisJi  hours,  nor  miles  to 
show  the  distance  of  places. 

3.  My  drift  is  not  to  take  away  the  army  from  Pompey,  and 
keep  it  myself,  which  yet  were  no  difficult  matter  for  me  to  do  j 
but  that  he  may  not  have  it  to  use  against  me. 

4.  Caesar  does  us  wron^  to  kssen  our  tributes  by  his 
comiDg. 


Ill  sentences  which  admit  of  a  transposition, 
without  creating  any  obscurity,  it  is  very  elegant 
to  put  the  relative  qui,  quce^  quod^  and  its  com - 
pounds^  before  the  antecedent,  in  the  beginning 
of  the  sentence  ;  as  qnam  mecum  colis  amicitiam^ 
nmlti  laudant :  and  to  give  greater  force  or  stress 
to  the  sense,  and  in  order  to  form  a  stronger  con- 
nexion between  the  relative  and  the  antecedent, 
the  pronouns  is^  hie,,  idem,,  &c.  are  elegantly 
placed  before  the  second  member  of  the  sen- 
tence ;  as  quern  deus  misit^  ei  iion  creditis,  whom 
God  hath  sent,  him  ye  believe  not. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  We  commonly  say  that  those  men  are  always  asleep,  irho 
ill  our  o})inion  are  indifTerent  and  careless  about  every  thing. 
(Quos  })utavius,) 

2.  Nothing  can  be  more  foolish  than  those,  who,  in  a  free 
city,  behave  themselves  in  an  audacious  and  alarming  man- 
ner. 

3.  Let  every  man  exercise  himself  in  the  profession,  which 
he  knows ! 

4.  Whatever  change  of  manners  takes  place  in  princes  will 
soon  pass  into  the  people. 

*5.  W^hat !  did  not  those  men  destroy  every  vestige  of  re- 
ligion, who  asserted  that  the  opinion  we  entertain  of  the  im- 
mortal Gods  W21S  artfully  inculcated  by  some  wise  men  from 
motives  of  state  policy;  that  religion  might  lead  those  men  to 
the  performance  of  their  duty,  wham  no  principle  of  reason 
could  influence. 

*6.  For  certainly  no  one  invested  with  supreme  power  and 
authority,  would  (unless  he  was  moved  by  the  persuasion  of 
sublime  and  enchanting  oratory,)  so  far  condescend  to  listen  to 
justice,  without  a  violent  effort  on  his  part,  as  to  suffer  himself 
to  be  put  on  a  level  with  those  whom  he  possessed  such  means 
of  excelling  y  and  of  his  own  free  will  to  depart  from  those  dtr 


36 

Hirhtful  habits,  which  must  already,  from  their  antiquity,  have 
obtained  the  force  of  nature. 

7.  Drops  of  crimson  blood'  distil  and  stain  the  earth  with 
core  fmm  the  tree,  which  I  tore  from  the  soil,  having  first 
broken  its  roots  asunder. 

8.  The  same  land  shall  receive  you  returning  thither  in  its 
fertile  bosom,  which  first  brought  you  forth  the  race  of  mighty 
ancestors. 

9.  For  every  one  after  the  loss  of  life  covered  with  his  body 
that  spot  of  ground,  which  he  had  chosen  and  occupied  in  the 
engagement  when  alive. 

10.  Those  monuments,  which  lie  had  erected  to  his  fame  by 
the  greatness  of  his  genius  and  learning,  lived  many  agrs 
after  him  ;  and  even  afterwards,  when  a  thick  and  impenetra- 
ble cloud  had  almost  entirely  extinguished  the  light  of  sciences, 
they  were  indeed  erased  from  the  sight  of  men,  but  they  left  in 
the  minds  of  the  learned  an  incredible  regret  and  sorrow  for 
their  loss. 


When  the  relative  in  the  beginning  of  a  sen- 
tence is  used  for  hoc^  id^  ^c.  and  serves  as  a  con- 
nexion to  what  goes  before,  then  it  must  always 
be  placed  the  first  word. 

EXAMPLES. 

1 .  When  cranes  traverse  the  seas  in  search  of  warmer  cHr 
teates,  they  are  observed  to  form  the  figure  of  a  triangle. 
Those  at  the  base,  nestle  their  necks  and  heads  in  the  back 
of  those,  that  fly  before  them.  Since  the  leader  himself  can- 
not do  this^  because  he  has  nothing,  by  which  he  may  sup- 
port himself,  he  flies  back  that  he  may  also  in  his  turn  rest 
himself  and  one  of  those  that  have  rested  succeed  to  his  place. 
This  mutual  succession  is  preserved  during  their  whole 
flight. 


Estj  sunt,  eritj  ^c.  elegantly  admit  the  rela- 
tive qui,  quce,  quod,  witli  the  omission  of  the  an- 


37 

tx3cedent  aUquis  quoddam,  ^c.  followed  by  an  iu* 
dicative  or  a  subjunctive  ;  as, 
Est  de  quo  tibi  gratulor. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  There  is  some  one  to  whom  you  can  give  tliese  letters. 

2.  You  have  what  to  write,  in  these  eventful  times. 

3.  There  were  some  men  at  that  time  wlio   said  Cicero  did 
not  deserve  so  highly  of  his  country. 

4.  There  are  some  men  lohose  delight  is  to  follow  the  campi 
and  to  encounter  the  dangers  of  war. 


The  omission  of  the  antecedent  is  also  ele- 
gant, where  it  may  be  easily  inferred  from  the 
sense  of  the  subject ;  as, 

You  have  one,  or,  a  friend,  who  w  ishes  you 
well  : 

HabeSj  qui  tibi  bene  cupiat. 


EXAMPLES. 


1.  He  sent  men  or  servants^  to  invite  all  his  friends  to  sup- 
per. 

2.  Sciences  are  soon  acquired,  if  you  have  a  master  who  can 
t^ach  them  with  diligence  and  faithfulness. 

(This  rule  may  be  referred  to  the  former.) 


The  pronoun  is.  or  ille^  is  oftener  understood 
before  tlie  relative  qui.,  quce,  quod. 


EXAMPLES. 


1.  He  who  despises  riches,  is  a  wise  man. 

2.  Cut  if  we  retreat  through  fear  and  consternation,  these 
same  circumstances  will  be  adverse  to  us;  neither  the  advan- 
tage of  situation,  nor  the  number  of  allies,  will  be  able  to  pro- 
tect himj  whom  arms  could  not  protect. 


The  rclath'cs  qualis,  qnaniu$^  quotj  are  ele- 
gantly placed  before  the  anttxedeuts,  talis,  tan- 
tusj  tot ;  and  the  relative  adverbs  quanta  ubi, 
quo,  quam,  quamdiu  qxtoties,  before  tantb,  ibi,  hoc, 
or  60,  tarn,  tamdiu,  toties ;  as, 

Atlas  was  made  as  great  a  mountain,  as  lie 
was  a  man : 

Quantus  erat,  tantus  mons /actus  Atlas. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  Citizens  usually  conform  themselves  to  the  example  of 
those,  who  govern  the  state.  (Say,  suck  as  those,  who  govern 
the  state,  such  are  usually  citizens.J 

2.  There  are  almost  as  many  different  kinds  of  speaking, 
cw  there  are  orators. 

3.  The  more  elevated  we  are  in  rank,  the  more  submissive 
should  we  behave  ourselves. 

4.  As  long  as  the  life  of  Crassus  was  harrassed  by  the  toils 
and  intrigues  of  ambition^  so  long  did  he  receive  greater 
renown  from  his  private  actions  and  greatness  of  mind, 
than  profit  or  glory  from  the  power  and  dignity  of  the 
state. 

*5.  Spurius  Cavilius  having  contracted  a  lameness  from  a 
wound,  which  he  had  received  in  the  service  of  bis  country, 
and  being  ashamed  on  that  account  to  appear  abroad,  his 
mother  said  to  him,  Why  do  you  not  show  yourself  before 
the  public,  my  dear  Spurius,  that  as  many  steps  as  you  take, 
the  mind  may  be  struck  with  the  remembrance  of  so  many 
virtues  ? 


For  omnis  qui,  and  omnia  quce,  it  is  often  much 
better,  as  it  is  more  concise,  to  put  quicunque^ 
qnisquis,  and  quidqrdch 


S9 

EXAMPLES. 


I  wish  3'ou  to  consider  that  in  all  tlii<ng,<ij  in  tvJucJt  you  caa 
siiow  a  kindness  to  my  friend,  you  will  bind  nie  to  you  by  the 
strongest  ties  of  gratitude. 


The  pronoun  quid  is  most  frequently  used  for 
tlie  adverb  cur ;  as, 
fVJiy  do  yo  you  weep  ? 


And  on  the  contrarj'^  it  is  more  elegant  to  use 
the  adverbs  cur^  quare,  quamobrcm,  instead  of 
propter  or  ob  querriy  quam,  qiiod^  ^c.  as, 

Many  reasons  occurred  to  my  mind /or  which  I 
thought  that  labour  would  prove  an  honor  to  you. 

Multa  mihi  veniehant  in  7nentem  qiiamobrem  il- 
ium labor  em  tlbi  honorifore  jnUarem. 

EXAMPLES. 

1 .  Nor  yet  have  I  been  able  to  devise  any  reason,  for  tcMch 
he  ought  to  undertake  their  cause. 

2.  But  if  there  is  no  reason  for  icliich  you  should  load  this 
miserable  wretch  with  so  great  calamities,  my  advice  is  that  you 
>;hould  spare  him. 

3.  But  tlier«3  were  many  reasons  for  which  I  wished  to  be 
there. 

4.  '^There  will  be  that  for  ichich  the  enemy  may  strip  you 
of  .your  arms,  not  for  iclilch  you  should  be  a  terror  to  them. 


To  the  interrogatives  quis^  quce,  quid^  qu% 
qunndo^  the  particle  ec  is  elegantly  prclixed  ;  as, 
Brutus  ecquid  ngit  ? 
Wat  does  Brutus  ? 


4(y 

,  EXAMPLES. 

1.  1  pray  you  f/?/*^/ so  great  misfortune  can  you  iraagin;!, 
which  does  not  fall  to  my  lot  ? 

2.  IFho  had  the  power  of  entering  into  the  forum  ? 

3.  IFhcn  did  you  suppose  that  you  would  give  in  an  account 
of  your  proceedings  ? 


Id  quod  is  most  frequently  used  for  quod,  when 
it  refers  not  merely  to  one  substantive,  but  to  the 
whole  preceding  sentence ;  as, 

You  love  virtue  ;  ivhich  I  commend : 

Amas  virtiitem,  id  quod  hmdo, 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  The  undeserving  are  often  loaded  with  wealth  and 
honors,  whilst  the  good  meet  with  contempt  and  repulse ; 
which  is  the  reason  that  virtue  itself  is  not  practised  with  much 
zeal. 

2.  But  the  man  who  feels  no  shame,  lohich  I  find  happens  in 
many,  I  consider  not  only  worthy  of  reprehension,  but  even  of 
j)unishment. 

S.  You  have  signified  your  intention  to  leave  this  country 
soon  5  ithich  has  aifected  us  all  with  the  most  lively  concern. 


When  the  pronoun  is^  is  used  for  talis,  it  is 
olegantly  followed  by  qui,  quae,  quod,  instead  of 
ut  is,  ut  ea,  ^c.  as  by  the  same  rule  quantus^ 
qualis,  quot,  quoties,  will  be  more  elegantly  put 
lor  ut  iantus,  talis,  tot,  toties  ;  as, 

Such,  or  so  great  is  your  desire  of  revenge, 
that  if  I  was  inflamed  with  //,  1  should  be  very 
miserable. 

Ea  or  tanta  est  tua  vindictce  cupido,  qua  or 
fjuantd  si  Jlagrarem.  miserrimus  essem. 


it 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  Such  indeed  is  your  learning)  that,  if  I  possessed  Uy  1 
tiliould  call  myself  fortunate. 

'*2.  For  I  would  not  have  Civsiir,  to  whom  I  am  bound  by 
the  strongest  obligations,  imagine  me  capable  of  giving  suck 
advice  to  Pompcy,  that,  if  he  had  followed  it,  he  might  indeed 
have  obtained  the  first  celebrity  and  jwe-cminencein  the  forum, 
but  he  would  not  have  attained  so  great  power  as  he  now  pos- 
sesses. 

*3.  As  for  L.  Ccesar,  wlien  I  had  come  to  him  at  Naples, 
though  he  was  bowed  down  and  afilicted  with  diseases  of  the 
foody,  yet  before  he  could  have  an  opportunity  of  embracing 
nie,  he  exclaimed,  O  my  dear  Cicero,  I  congratulate  you  on 
having  so  much  inlluence  with  Dolabella,  that,  if  I  had  as 
much  interest  with  my  sister's  sou,  i  should  pronounce  myself 
«]uite  recovered. 

4.  You  have  read  Homer  f^o  often,  thai,  if  I  had  read  him 
m  often,  things  would  go  on  much  better  with  me. 

5.  We  have  gained  so  many  trophies  from  our  enemies,  thai 
jio  nation  can  boast  of  ever  having  gained  so  many. 


Qui,  quce,  quod,  is  often  elegantly  used  simply 
for  talis,  or  tantus,  or  qualis ;  as, 
Such  is  thy  love  towards  me: 
Qui  tuns  est  erga  me  amor, 

EXAMPLES. 

T .  Such  is  thy  hardness  of  heart,  the  divine  judgments  will 
t  last  fall  upon  thy  guilty  head. 

2.  Cities  also,  as  well  as  other  things,  spring  from  the 
lowest  beginnings;  afterwards,  such  as  their  own  bravery 
;jnd  the  gods  assist,  get  themselves  great  power,  and  a  great 
name. 

3.  Every  person  holds  an  inward  and  secret  conversation 
with  his  own  h^rt,  diwd  such  as  it  highly  concerns  him  to  regu- 
late properly. 


42 


And  what  deserves  to  be  imitated,  as  beiii}!; 
particularly  elegant,  is  the  use  of  qaalis,  without 
being  preceded  by  talis  ;  as, 

You  cxre  blessed  with  such  a  child,  tliot  if  I 
had  such  a  one,  1  should  greatly  rejoice : 

Felix  es  pueroy  qualis  si  mihi  esset,  magnopere. 
gauchnem. 


EXAMPLE. 


Especially  as  the  senate  and  people  of  Rome  had  then  such 
a  leader,  that,  had  they  now  his  fellow,  Uie  same  fate  would 
overtake  thee,  which  then  befel  them. 


Qui,  quce,  quod,  w  ith  or  without  quippt,  is  very 
elegantly  used  for  cum,  or  quod  ego,  cum  tu,  ^c. 
and  cujus,  for  cum  ejus,  cum  meus,  cum  tuus ;  cm 
for  cum  mihi,  &^c.  Avith  the  verb  that  follows  in 
tlie  subjunctive  mood ;  as, 

What  w  onder  that  men  die,  ivhen  we  know 
that  they  are  mortal? 

Quid  minun  homines  mori,  qiios  sciamus  mar- 
tfiles  esse  ?  Quos  used  for  cum  cos. 


EXAMPLES. 


1.  Ilow  is  it  possible  that  you  should  converse  on  the  sub 
Vcct  of  literature,  since  you  never  paid  the  leajJt  attention  tc 
iif 

2.  And  certainly  that  conduct  of  mine  is  entitled  to  the  hieii 
est^commendation,  in  that  I  was  unwilling  that  my  fellow  citi 
zens  should  be  exposed  to  a  band  of  armed  rufiians. 

ru  They  rated  and  blamed  the  Belgae,  for  having  svrrcib 
dercd  themselves  to  the  people  of  l^ome,  and  abandoned  th< 
bravery  of  tln.'ir  proeenituj^. 


43 

*4.  The  RuniHii  power  had  already  acquired  sufficient 
strength  and  stability  to  become  a  match  for  any  of  the  neigh- 
bouring states  in  war ;  but  from  deficiency  of  women,  it  was  a 
Gfreatness  that  could  last  but  one  generation  of  man,  since  they 
had -at  home,  no  hope  of  progeny,  and  were  debarred  from  all 
intermarriages  with  their  neighbours.  (Say,  unce  neither  the 
hope,  &c.  nor  intermarriages  were  to  thcm^  &c.  And  use  the 
relative  qui^  qitccy  quocL) 


The  relative  qxii^  qucb^  quod,  is  elegantly  used 
after  idem  instead  oi  ac  or  cum ;  as. 

Nor  had  he  the  saine  master  as  his  father : 
Nee  eodern  magistro,  quo  pctter^  usas  est. 

EXAMPLES. 

1 .  The  wise  man  is  not  confined  within  the  same  bounds  irith 
the  rest  of  the  world.  No  age,  no  time,  no  place,  limit  his 
thoughts,  but  he  penetrates  and  passes  beyond  them  all. 

2.  At  the  same  time  icitli  the  ^dui,  the  Ambarri  also  ac- 
quaint Caesar,  that  their  country  being  depopulated,  they 
cannot  easily  keep  off  the  violence  of  the  enemy  from  their 
towns. 

3.  This  nation  is  not  so  warlike  as  the  neighbouring  states; 
and  it  does  not  make  use  of  the  same  weapons  in  war,  as  other 
nations. 


Qui,  quce,  quod,  is  also  elegantly  used  for  et  is, 
et  ego,  et  tu,  <^'C.  foi-  is  vero,  tu  veto,  ^c.  in  the  be- 
ginning of  a  sentence,  or  a  member  of  a  sen- 
tence, when  it  may  be  easily  referred  to  what 
goes  before  ;  as, 

It  happened  in  my  absence,  and  had  I  been 
present : 

Me  absenie  accidit,  qui  si  adfuissem;  ior  et  ego, 
si,  or  si  vera,  ^^c. 


RXAMPLfeS. 

1.  You  hfiVe  al'vays  given  me  wholesoni*?  advice;  end  if  I 
Uiul  always  I'ollowcd  it,  I  should  have  been  happy. 

2.  When  I  received  the  iururmation  of  the  death  of  your 
drtugliler  TuUia,  1  leh  indeed  that  sorrow  and  aflliotion  for  her 
loss,  which  1  could  not  but  feel ;  I  looked  upon  it  as  a  common 
calamity ;  and  if  I  had  Been  present  at  it,  1  would  not  Jiave 
feeen  wanting  to  you.  and  I  would  have  openly  nianifesied  and 
declared  my  own  grief  to  you. 

*3.  But  he  employed  the  interval  that  followed,  not  in  en- 
deavouring to  blot  out  the  memory  of  the  ancient  quarrel, 
bat  in  concerting- measures  to  renew  the  war  ;  and  after  he  had 
built  and  equipped  the  most  formidable  fleets,  and  had  raised 
powerful  armies,  under  pretence  of  carrying  the  war  into  the 
flominiona  of  the  neighbouring  states,  he  sent  Ambassadors  into 
Spain  to  those  commanders,  against  whom  the  Romans  were 
in  actual  hostilities. 

4.  A  friend  was  then  at  my  house,  and  he  told  me  that  he 
feared  it  would  not  succeed.  (Utsuccederet,  Vereornejiaty 
expresses  what  we  wish  not  to  happen ;  vereor  utfiat,  what  we 
wish  to  happen,  but  are  afraid  it  may  not.) 

6.  I  asked  hira  this  question  \  and  when  he  did  not  answer  I 
refused  to  do  it. 


Qiu*,  quae^  quody  may  also  be  used  for  quia^ 
nam  ego,  tii,  is,,  ^c.  when  it  is  clear  from  the 
context,  that  though  the  causal  conjuiiclion  is 
not  inserted,  yet  it  may  be  easily  inferred  from 
the  sense ;  as, 

You  are  truly  reprehensible,  for  when  you 
stand  in  need  of  the  friendship  of  all,  you  injure 
all: 

Vert  rpprehensione  dignus  es,  qui,  cum  omnium 
amicltid  indigeas,  omnibus  noces ;  for  7iam  cum  tv 
omnium,  ^-c. 


45 
EXAMPLE. 

*1.  And  even  our  calamities  will  furnish  some  variety  to 
your  writings,  not  unaccompanied  with  that  kind  of  pleasure, 
v/hich  has  the  power  of  arresting  the  mind  in  the  perusal  of 
history.  For  nothing  is  more  calculated  to  aftord  dehght  to  the 
reader,  than  the  changes  of  times,  and  the  vicissitudes  of  fortune. 
For  though  to  our  own  experience  the?/  could  not  he  very  desi- 
rable, yet  in  the  perusal,  they  will  be  entertaining ;  and,  indeed, 
the  remembrance  of  past  calamities,  when  no  longer  attended 
with  danger,  affords  a  sensible  deliglit. 

2.  For,  certainly,  it  is  not  my  part,  since,  as  you  are  used 
to  wonder,  I  apply  generally  so  much  industry  in  writing,  to 
commit  myself  so  far,  as  to  appear  to  have  been  negligent  in 
it,  especially  as  that  would  be  the  crime,  not  only  of  negli- 
gence, but  also  of  ingratitude. 

5.  It  was  not  the  part  of  that  general,  since  he  knew  that  ho 
was  in  the  midst  of  enemies,  to  suffer  his  soldiers  to  go  out  of 
the  camp  unarmed,  and  to  straggle  about  the  fields. 


Qui^  quce,  quod,  is  also  often  used  for  cwn  in  a 
narration. 


EXAMPLES. 


1 .  Caesar  knowing  that  the  enemy  would  immediately  aban- 
don their  camp,  advanced  with  his  forces  against  them. 

2.  The  man  being  of  some  authority,  of  a  grave  demeanoui . 
advanced  in  years,  and  a  father  too,  was  struck  dumb  with  as- 
tonishment, at  the  barefaced  proposal  of  this  shameless  man. 


The  relative  qiiij  quce,  qnod,  is  often  used  for 
a  substantive,  especially  after  the  verbs  sum  and 
habeo,  when  the  sense  seems  to  demand  such  a 
variation ;   as, 

I  have  a  request  to  make  to  you. 

Est  quod  te  rogem. 

6  * 


EXAMPLK?. 

1.  If  thou  brinej  thy  sift  to  the  altar,  an<l  thfrc  rrni»'ni!)rn..st 
dial  thy  hrotlior  hath  ous^ht  ng(finsf  (hff,  (thatis^n  comphunty 
that  of  trhich  he  may  complain)  leave  there  thy. gift  before  the 
cihar,  and  go  thy  way  ;  first  be  reconeiled  to  thy  brother,  and 
then  come  and  ofler  thy  gift. 

2.  I  have  an  accusation  against  thee,  that  thou  has  deserted 
thy  fii*st  love. 


Qui,  mice,  q^wd,  may  in  some  injslances,  be  used 
for  the  English  particle  after ;  as, 
The  fourtli  year  after  he  had  come : 
Quarto  quo  venerat  anno^ 


EXAMPLE. 


What !  have  you  not  heard  of  Ca3sar-s  achievments  in 
Spain  ?  Two  armies  beaten  ?  Two  generals  defeated  ?  Two 
provinces  taken  ?  These  things  were  done  forty  days  after 
Caesar  was  come  in  view  of  the  enemy. 


It  must  be  observed,  that  though  the  English 
very  often  omits  the  relative,  yet  the  ellipsis  must 
always  be  supplied  in  Latin. 

EXAMPLES. 

l.The  man  I  saw  yesterday,  told  me  of  your  disaster. 

2.  Go  into  the  village  over  against  you,  and  bring  away  all 
the  provision^  you  can  collect^  that  we  may  set  sail  again  im- 
fnediutely. 


'ir 


OF  VERBS. 

As  it  is  5^ometimes  difficult  to  determine,  when 
an  accusative  with  the  infinitive  is  to  be  used,  af- 
ter the  English  conjunction  that^  and  when  it  is 
better  to  turn  that  into  quod  or  ui  with  a  nomi- 
native followed  by  an  indicative  or  subjunc- 
tive, it  will  be  proper  to  attend  to  these  few  ob- 
servations. 


We  always  use  ut^  and  never  the  accusative 
with  the  infinitive,  after  ita^  sit,  talis,  or  is  used 
for  talis,  tantus,  adeo ;  after  verbs  of  causing  or 
effecting,  persuading,  impelling,  exhorting,  advis- 
ing, compelling,  entreating,  beseeching,  decreeing, 
commanding,  except  jubeo ;  and  after  verbs  of 
telling,  writing,  and  armonncing,  when  they  cai'- 
ry  with  them  the  force  of  a  command ;  as, 

Tell  him  to  come. 

The  Senate  wrote  to  him  to  return. 

And  also  after  accidit.  Jit,  contingiL 

EXAMPLES. 

1 .  Heipersuadedftne  to  write. 

2.  I  beseech  you  to  come. 

3.  I  happened  to  see  you. 

4.  He  commanded  me  to  come. 

5.  Your  neighbor  is  plunged  into  such  profligacy  and  ktxu- 
ry,  that  words  cauuot  describe  his  desperate  condition. 


49 

C.  Tlierefore  lie  goes  directly  to  Marius ;  he  informs  him  of 
what  had  been  done,  and  advises  him  to  attempt  the  castle  on 
the  side,  by  which  lie  had  chmbed  up  ;  he  promises  that  he 
himself  would  point  out  the  way  and  share  the  danger. 

But  let  it  be  observed,  that  when  moneo  de- 
notes information,  and  not  advice,  it  is  always 
joined  with  the  infinitive ;  as, 

He  apprised  him  by  a  trusty  messenger,  that  it 
was  in  agitation  to  break  down  the  bridge. 

In  the  same  manner,  persnadeo,  though  gene- 
rally followed  by  nt^  when  it  signifies  to  convince^ 
is  always  followed  by  an  infinitive ;  as, 

I  wish  you  thoroughly  to  convince  yourself, 
that  no  one  is  dearer  to  me. 

Observe  also,  that  the  articles  of  every  agree- 
ment, or  condition  of  a  bargain,  are  expressed 
by  ut. 

After  verbs  denoting  a  doiiht  or  opinion^  the 
Latins  elegantly  use/ore  or  futimim  esse,  follow- 
ed by  tit  or  qui  J  with  the  subjunctive,  instead  of 
the  future  of  the  infinitive ;  as, 

I  doubt  not  thai  there  will  be  many  who 

No7i  dubiio  fore  plerosque,  qui 

EXAMPLES. 

1 .  I  hope  that  he  will  return  into  your  favour. 

2.  I  do  not  doubt  that  many  ivill  think  this  mode  of  writing, 
trifling  and  insignificant,  and  altogether  unworthy  of  the  char- 
acters of  those  great  personages.  *  • 

3.  I  never  thought  that  a  power,  which  seemed  so  firmly 
established,  would  so  soon  fall  to  the  ground. 

This  form  seems  to  have  been  originally  made 
use  of  in  verbs,  which  wanted  a  supine,  and 
consequently  a  future  of  the  infinitive,  and  to 


49 


iiavc  been  afterwards  adopted  more  nniversaliy 
on  accotmt  of  the  elegance  of  the  variation. 


After  the  verbs  to  will,  to  wish,  to  desire,  to  suf- 
fer, and  after  csquum  est^  oportet,  necesse  est,  se- 
quitiir,  either  iit,  or  the  accusative  with  the  infi- 
nitive may  be  used  indifferently. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  I  desired  that  my  father  should  write. 

2.  A  man  must  die. 

3.  It  is  right  this  should  be  done. 

4.  Hence  it  follows,  that  no  man  can  make  a  great  progress 
in  literature  without  genius. 

5.  He  wished  him  to  assemble  his   forces  and  to  march 
against  the  enemy. 


Actives  should  be  changed  into  passives,  or 
quod  and  ut,  should,  if  possible,  be  used  wiiere 
two  accusatives  with  an  infinitive  might  create 
an  ambiguity,  which  of  the  two  was  the  case  of 
the  infinitive  ;  as  patrem  te  amare  diciint :  Here 
it  is  doubtful,  whether  you  love  the  father,  or  the 
father  you.  You  will  therefore  say,  either  pa- 
trem (l  te  amari,  or  a  patre  te  amari. 


Quod  may  be  used  when  it  implies  the  cause 
or  reason,  of  what  goes  before,  when  it  might 
easily  be  changed  into  quia,  and  alter  verbs  of 
certain  affections,  as  of  rejoicing,  griemng,  ^^c 


^juod  may  be  safely  vised,  as  well  as  the  accusa*- 

(ivo  with  the  infinitive  ;  as, 

I  am  glad  that  you  are  returned  safe  : 

Quod  redieris   incolumis^  oi*,  te  rcdiisse  incola- 

meiriy  gaudco. 

KXAMI'LES. 

1.  After  the  troubles  of  mind  and  the  pains  you  have  eii- 
♦  Inred,  I  cannot  but  rejoice  that  you  are  so  well.  (Qudd  here 
implying  the  cause  or  reason,  that  I  rejoice,  may  be  equally 
used,  or  the  accusative  with  the  infinitive.) 

2.  I  have  received  letters  from  homo,  and  am  overwhelmed 
with  the  deepest  sorrow,  that  my  fathw  is  so  ill. 

With  these  few  exceptions,  however,  the  ac- 
cusative with  the  infinitive,  is  most  frequently 
used  by  the  ancients. 


But  the  conjunctions  ut  and  qnod  are  not  to  be 
used  indiscriminately :  the  chief  difference  seems 
to  be,  that  when  the  preceding  clause  is  or  ought 
to  be  the  cause  or  reason  of  the  following,  we 
should  use  ut ;  otherwise  the  accusative  with  the 
infinitive,  or  sometimes  quod. 


EXAMPLES. 

1.  You  have  often  exhorted  me  to  make  a  collection  of  my 
epistles,  if  I  should  write  them  with  any  degree  of  acourarv- 
("Here  the  exhortation  is  evidently  the  cause  of  collecting  tl»e 
epistles.) 

2.  So  many  and  rrreat  favours  have  you  heaped  upon  nu . 
that  so  far  from  ropayiug  them,  I  must  live  and  die  ron«(  i<:u.s 
•f  my  own  ingratitude. 


^ 


After  the  comparative,   the  sign 
too,  too  mack,  we  must  make  use  o^^^/a  t/^  \^8)|^ 
the  subjunctive ;  as,  ^  ^  ^ 

He  is  too  proud  to  teach  youjt  U  N I  V  K  it-  S  I T 
Superbior  estj  qmm  ul  te  doce^^.      ov     ^k 

EXAMPLES.  ^^^i^^IjFOIS^^ 

1.  His  learning  and  virtue  are  too  great  to  he  setfortli  witli 
advantage  by  me,  and  too  well  Jcnoicn  every  where  to  need  it, 
unless  I  would,  according  to  the  proverb,  show  the  sun  with  a 
lantern. 

*2.  Caesar  \vas  too  old,  in  my  opinion,  to  amuse  himself 
with  projecting  the  conquest  of  the  world.  Such  an  imagina- 
tion was  excusable  in  Alexander,  a  prince  full  of  youth  and 
fire,  and  not  easy  to  be  checked  in  his  hopes  ;  but  Csesar  ought 
10  have  been  more  grave. 

3.  Some  boys  are  too  idle  to  learn,  and  too  contumacious  to 
obey  the  precepts  of  their  masters. 


The  conjunctions  ut  ne  joined  together  are 
often  elegantly  used  for  ne ;  as, 

The  first  principle  of  justice  is,  that  no  one 
should  do  an  injury  to  another  : 

Justitice  primum  mimus  est,  ut  ne  cui  noceas. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  And  do  not  so  far  commit  yourself,  lest  when  you  have 
been  supplied  with  every  thing  by  us,  you  should  appear  to  have 
been  wanting  to  yourself. 

2.  We  must  also  take  care  that  we  may  not  appear  to  do  this 
through  anger. 

3.  When  you  return  from  abroad,  always  remember,  tliat 
the  death  of  your  wife,  or  the  illness  of  your  daughter,  arc 
common  and  possible  events^  in  order,  that  nothing  may  be 
new  and  unexpected  to  you. 


5^ 

Tlicxrommon  rule,  that  when  two  vcrbitoiiK 
together,  the  second  is  put  in  the  infinitive,  must 
be  resti-icted  within  very  naiTOw  limits.  It  is 
chiefly  and  only  used  after  certain  verbs,  as  volo, 
nolo^  cupiOj  amo,  conor^  tento^  audeoj  studeo  cogi- 
tOy  possum,  nequeo,  obliviscor,  debet,  ccepi,  incipio, 
constituo,  soleo,  consuevi,  cogor,  scio,  ^-c. 

EXAMPLES. 

1 .  IMy  father  urged  mc  to  write  to  liim,  by  the  tendcrest 
motives  of  aflection  and  gratitude.  (We  should  not  say  im- 
j)ulit  scribere,  but  ad,  or  ut).  Per  anwrem  et  omnia  pietatis 
officia. 

2.  Since  my  parents  wish  to  educate  me  in  the  liberal  arts,  I 
^Itall  do  my  utmost  endeavours  to  learn  many  things. 


Care  must  be  also  taken  not  to  fall  into  Gre- 
cisms,  by  too  rash  a  use  of  the  infinitive  ;  as, 

He  instigated  him  to  ask  for  this.  (Here  the 
infinitive  ivoidd  be  tvrong.) 

He  xcent  to  the  river  to  wash  away  the  blood. 

The  same  caution  must  be  used  after  adjec- 
tives;  as, 

He  is  a  fit  person  to  do  that. 

My  brother  is  very  desirous  to  learn. 

That  lesson  is  very  easy  to  understand. 

Quin  is  used  for  ut  no/i,  followed  by  a  subjunc- 
tive. 

It  is  impossible  that  a  man  of  genius  and  of 
great  industry  should  not  be  a  learned  man. 

Often  for  quod  non : 

I  dare  7iot  blame  what  you  have  done^  not  that 
I  do  not  differ  from  you  in  my  opinion,  but  because 
I  know  you  have  acted  from  the  best  of  mot ices^ 
arid  to  the  be^t  of  your  judgment. 


S6 

For  qui  non^  in  tliese  forms  : 

There  is  none^  who  dors  not  know. 

Who  is  there,  who  does  not  believe  it  ? 

Very  often  for  cur  non,  followed  by  an  indica- 
tive. 

Why  do  you  7iot  fly  hither  ? 

Why  do  you  not  arm  yourseJf? 

JVIiy,  if  we  feel  the  vigor  of  youths  do  we  not 
mount  our  horses  ? 


After  a  negative  expression,  or  even  an  inter- 
rogation, the  Latins  make  use  of  nisi,  quin,  where 
the  EngUsh  usually  has  the  particle  but ;  and 
sometimes  of  quij  quce,  quod  :  as, 

They  are  fit  for  nothing,  but  to  be  slaves: 

Eos  non  decet  nisi  esse  servos. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  There  is  a  time,  when  the  richest  women  ought  to  mnr- 
ry ;  they  seldom  let  slip  an  opportunity  at  first,  but  it  fills  their 
minds  with  disappointment  and  hitter  anguish. 

2.  Among  the  Epicureans,  there  is  nothing,  but  wiiat  a 
crowd  of  atoms  can  perform. 

3.  Caesar's  translation  of  estates  from  the  rightful  owners  ({J 
strangers,  ought  not  to  he  accounted  liheral  5  for  nothing  is  lihe- 
lal,  but  what  is,  at  the  same  time,  just. 

4.  What  is  it  to  recollect  one's  self,  but  to  i-ally  the  scattered 
and  disordered  parts  of  the  soul  into  their  proper  place  r 

5.  When  riches  take  their  flight  and  forsake  us,  we  should 
consider,  they  deprive  us  of  notliing,  which  was  properly  and 
truly  our  own.  If  they  should  slip  away  from  us,  they'll  take 
nothing  away  but  themselves. 

*6*  When  Romulus  was  snatched  from  the  people,  the  sena- 
tors  ruled  by  turns.  Upon  this,  the  commons  murmured 
that  their  slavery  was  multiplied,  that  a  hundred  lords  were 

6 


put  upon  them  for  one:  nor  did  tliey  any  longer  sicm  likely 
to  endure  any  other  but  a  king,  and  liini  too  of  ihcir  own 
making. 


The  conjunction  quasi  has  a  subjunctive  mood 
after  it ;  but  it  must  be  observed  that  it  is  al- 
ways used  by  the  ancients  with  a  present,  if  the 
precedhig  verb,  or  the  subject  itseh'  be  concern- 
ing a  thing  present,  though  the  English  has  the 
perfect  or  imperfect ;  and  if  the  subject  refers  to 
the  past,  it  is  always  used  with  the  perfect,  though 
the  English  has  a  pluperfect ;  as, 

You  are  silent,  as  if  you  did  not  know  that 
the  thing  is  so : 

Tacesj  quasi  nescias  rem  ita  esse. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  You  are  silent  concerning  this  business,  as  if  you  did  not 
know  it. 

2.  Are  you  not  a  foolish  fellow,  to  ask  me  what  I  think  will 
be  done  in  this  business,  as  if  I  was  acquainted  with  what  he 
himself  does  not  know? 

3.  For  he  writes  in  such  a  manner,  as  if  I  had  been  obliged 
to  go  to  them,  and  not  they  to  me. 


The  conjunction  qmim,  or  cum,  when  implying 
a  reason  previously  known,  or  given,  and  an- 
swering to  the  English  since,  is  usually  followed 
by  the  subjunctive  ;  and  when  it  is  used  for  et^. 


EXAMPLES. 


1.   JFhen  I  know  you  are  accustomed  to  read  pood  books,  I 
wonder  tliat  you  reap  so  little  ac!  from  them. 


55 

"5.  Things  heing  sOy  or  this  being  the  case,  I  shall  say  Uo 
iTiore. 

3.  Since  this  is  the  case,  and  as  he  loves  tliese  studies,  let 
Iiiin  be  indulged. 

4,  Though  ihey  pleaded  his  cause  with  great  eloquence,  yet 
he  was  condemned  to  be  banished. 


The  English  panicle  heiiig,  implying  a  cause,; 
is  variously  rendered  into  Latin :  chiefly  by  quuniy 
cmij  quippi  qiiij  ut  qui,  utpote,  ut  pole  ciim^  ut. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  He  was  noted  for  the  wisest  person,  that  had  ever  been  ; 
there  heing  no  sort  of  knowledge,  with  which  his  mind  was  not 
stored  in  great  abnndance. 

*2.  Music  lays  us  asleep,  when  we  would  go  to  rest ;  recre- 
ates our  spirits,  when  we  are  tired  with  business ;  banishes  mel- 
ancholy, when  we  are  oppressed  with  sorrow  5  and  augments 
our  pleasure,  when  we  would  be  merry;  being  no  less  fit  to 
wait  upon  feasts,  than  they,  that  attend  at  the  table. 

3.  He  was  as  much  valued  and  esteemed  by  the  whole  party, 
as  any  man ;  and  he  deserved  it,  being  more  accomplished  thaa^ 
any  of  them. 

4.  This  we  most  earnestly  request  of  you,  as  being  a  thing 
so  agreeable  to  equity,  that  we  think  we  cannot  demand  a  more 
equitable  one. 

5.  The  king  honors  him  greatly,  being  a  person  in  whose 
fidelity  and  prudeiice  he  can  confide. 


When  a  subjunctive  goes  before  in  a  sentence, 
conjunctions,  which  in  themselves  govern  an  in- 
dicative, or  even  the  simple  relative  qui^  qticBj 
quod  J  will  generally  require  the  verb  following  to 


tie  likewise  in  the  subjunctive,  if  the  two  xortiis 
are  closely  connected  in  tht  idea ;  as, 

It  is  right,  that,  when  we  arc  in  health,  wc 
ihould  think  of  death  : 

^quiim  est,  utj  cum  sani  simus^  ile  'inorte  cogi- 

(Note,  That  the  subjunctive  ivc  should  think j 
though  by  transposition  it  comes  in  the  last 
clause  of  the  sentence,  must  be  considered  in 
sense  as  the  lir^t  subjunctive.) 

IXAMPLKS. 

1.  He  is  so  fond  of  writing,  that  he  immediately  commifs 
to  paper  all  the  undigested  thoughts,  which  come  into  his 
mind. 

2.  It  often  happens  that  those,  whom  we  love  most,  aie  the 
soonest  snatched  away  from  us. 

S.  The  king  commanded  that  thopp  things,  trhich  were 
necessary  for  the  war,  should  be  got  ready  with  the  utmost 
iiastc. 

4.  Since  I  had  been  first  accosted  by  those  men,  ir/so  said 
that  our  troops  had  met  with  a  terrible  rcvei'se  of  fortune,  I 
eould  not  but  believe  it. 

5.  I  determined  to  remain  in  the  country,  that,  whilst  the 
season  of  the  year  was  convenient,  I  might  pursue  rural  occu- 
pations. 


And  in  the  same  manner,  after  an  accusative, 
witli  the  infinitive,  a  verb  preceded  by  those 
conjunctions,  or  by  the  relative  qnl^  quee,  quod^ 
will  more  elegantly  be  in  the  subjunctive ;  as. 

Who  will  deny   that  1  have  performed  u!" 
you  enjoined  me  ? 

Q  set  77i€  peijecissej  qttod  prceceperis  ? 


57 

EXAMPLES 

1.  Iknowtliat  my  father  will  soon  reurn,  because  he  has 
not  written  to  us. 

2.  It  behoves  us  not  to  undertake  any  thing  of  moment,  6e- 
fore  we  have  well  considered  it. 

3.  But  know,  that  there  are  more,  who  refuse  to  pay  the  tri- 
bute, than  tiiose  who  wish  to  have  it  exacted. 


Observe  that  the  English  participle  active  or 
verbal  in  ing,  in  several  colloquial  or  vulgar  ex- 
pressions, is  more  elegantly  rendered  by  turning 
the  verb  into  a  passive  impersonal ;  as. 

There  is  no  trusting  to  the  bank : 

Ripce  non  bene  creditur. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  There  is  no  more  resisting  uncontrollable  folly,  than  the 
violent  course  of  a  river. 

2.  He  denies  that  there  canhe  any  living  pleasantly  ^  withcxct 
living  virtuously.  He  denies  that  fortune  has  any  ascendant 
over  a  wise  man. 

3.  These  briars  and  thonis  being  platted  close  together,  were 
fences  to  them ;  into  which  there  was  not  only  no  entering j  but 

^7ioteven  any  seeing  through, 

4.  He  commends  the  courage  and  constancy  of  the  senate ; 
he  acquaints  them  with  his  forces,  that  he  has  ten  legions  ready ; 
besides,  that  he  knows,  and  has  found  for  certain,  that  Csesar^s 
soldiers  are  disaffected  to  him,  and  that  there  is  no  persuadirig 
them  to  defend  or  follow  him. 


Verbs  which  cannot  be  used  personally  in  the 
passive,  must  be  used  impersonally,  or  with  a 
transposition  of  the  active :  as,  He  was  succeeded 
by  his  soriy  successit  eifiUvs.    It  may  be  observed 

6  * 


that  verbs  wJiich  do  not  govern  an  accusativ^em 
the  active,  do  not  admit  of  the  corresponding 
jierson  in  the  passive ;  as,  /  am  believed  ivhen  I 
^eak  the  truths  mihi  vernm  dicenti  creditur. 


EXAMPLES. 


1 .  In  your  wisest  desi^s  you  arc  resisted  by  the  rashness  of 
your  intenperute  and  ignorant  colleague. 

2.  Though  the}' just  now  wished  tosojnd  a  retreat,  they 
r.ow  feel  their  breasts  warmed  with  the  hope  of  victory,  and 
the  general  is  cheerfully  obeyed  through  the  whole  army. 


The  English  termination  in  ing  belongs  to 
both  voices,  active  and  passive,  and  denotes  that 
the  action  is  progressive  or  imperfect.  It  re- 
fers either  to  past^  present  or  future. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  The  master  is  writing,  but  the  boys  are  playing, 

2.  The  house  was  building,  when  the  floods  suddenly  came 
upon  it,  and  left  not  a  vestige  behind. 

3.  The  dinner  loiU  be  getting  ready ,  while  the  guests  are 
assembling. 


The  Enghsh  verbal  in  ing*,  after  verbs  of  pre^ 
venting^  prohibiting^  ^c.  is  rendered  by  the  sub- 
junctive mood,  with  the  conjunctions,  quin^  ne^ 
^nd  quo  minus  ;  as 

I  will  not  hinder  you  from  studying , 
Per  me  non  stabit  quo  minus  studtas. 


EXAMPLES. 


1 .  We  were  not  able  to  deter  even  the  Rheni,  our  brethrec 
aftd  kinsmcD  ia  blood,  fjvw  consenting  mth  these  people. 


5^ 

2.  As  our  enemies  found  the  means  fo  disturb  the  former 
league,  so  they  left  nothing  neglected,  to  hinder  the  renemng  of 
the  same. 

3.  Be  not  hindered  from  paying  your  vow  in  due  time,  nor 
put  it  off  till  death. 

4.  The  winds  hinder  the  bees  from  carrying  their  food 
home. 

0.  Why  do  you  keep  me  from  using  my  own. 


00 


As  there  is  some  difficulty  in  the  use  of  PAR- 
TICIPLES, they  will  require  to  be  more  par- 
ticularly considered ;  since  they  contribute  great- 
ly to  the  elegance  of  style,  when  judiciously 
used,  and  will  as  much  injure  it,  if  adopted  too 
indiscriminately. 


In  general,  as  often  as  the  relative,  qui^  qtirTj 
quod,  occm's,  it  may  be  omitted,  and  the  verb, 
before  which  it  goes,  may  be  changed  into  a 
participle,  which  must  agree  in  case  with  its  an- 
tecedent; as, 

I  wdsh  to  satisfy  my  friend,  who  desires  what 
is  honorable : 

Amico  honesta  petenti  satisfacere  volo. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  By  the  studying  of  the  liberal  arts,  a  name  is  often  ac- 
quired, wJiich  will  never  perish, 

2.  When  a  bungling  cobler,  who  was  perishing  with  want, 
had  begun  to  practice  medicine  in  a  place,  in  which  he  was  not 
known  : 

3.  At  length,  O  Romans,  have  we  driven  away,  discarded 
atid  pursued,  with  the  keenest  reproaches,  this  wretch  who  ivcts 
intoxicated  with  fury,  ivho  was  breathing  mischief,  and  impious- 
Jy  threatening  to  Jay  waste  this  city  with  fire  and  sword. 

4.  Some  shepherds  beholding  this  conflagration,  and  having 
collected  a  band  of  five  hundred,  pursued  the  enemies,  who 
tcere  dispersed^  and  were  ignorant  how  great  the  numbers 
were,  because  their  own  fear  and  the  smoke  of  the  fires  had  in- 
tercepted their  view,  and  having  slain  nine  thousand,  put  the 
rest  of  the  plunderers  to  flight. 


To  define  this  more  fully,  wc  may  $ny,  thai 
when  two  verbs,  or  two  divisions  of  a  sentence 
are  so  closely  connected  together,  that  the  one 
is  the  cause  or  the  antecedent  of  the  other,  and 
both  refer  to  one  subject,  having  the  relative  qutj 
or  the  conjunctions  ubi,  quando,  duni^  postquamy 
^"C.  between  them,  these  last  are  rejected,  and 
the  clause,  before  w  hich  they  were  to  be  put,  is 
expressed  by  the  participle. 


EXAxMPLES. 


1.  And  first  I  will  vindicate  my  present  behaviour  to  Cato, 
mho  governs  his  life  by  the  certain  rule  of  reason,  and  diligent- 
ly weighs  the  motive  of  every  duty. 

It  must  be  observed,  that  the  participle  must  be 
put  in  the  case,  which  the  noun  or  the  verb  of 
the  other  clause  governs ;  as. 

When  the  Roman  citizen  was  fixed  to  the  cross, 
his  hands  dropped  with  blood. 

Here,  hands  is  the  substantive,  which  governs 
the  genitive,  and  the  participle  consequently  must 
be  put  in  the  genitive.  Therefore  we  should  say, 

Civis  cmci  adfixi  manus  safiguine  stillarunt. 

2.  When  I  think  of  this  circumstance,  it  appears  wonderful 
to  me. 

Here  the  verb  videtitr  requiring  a  dative,  the 
participle  must   be  put  in   the  dative,   and  we^ 
should  say, 

Cogltanti  mihi  hac  de  re,  permirum  videtur. 

*3.  Uliile  I  considered  with  myself,  and  for  a  long  time 
revolved  in  my  own  mind,  in  what  way  I  could  best  benefit  as 
many  of  my  follow  citizens  as  I  could,  there  occurred  to  me 
none  more  effectual,  than  to  give  them  rules  and  precepts  for 
ihe  attainment  of  the  liberal  arts. 


4* 

4.  TJut  as  she  did  not  tnist  in  his  promises,  he  seinh  li^r 
icord  tliat  he  wished  to  associate  her  sons  into  a  share  of  the 
kingdom,  with  whom  he  had  carried  on  the  war,  not  with  a 
view  of  depriving  them  of  the  kingdom,  (that  he  might  de- 
prive thorn,)  but  that  he  might  bestow  it  as  of  his  own  free  gift. 

5.  M  hen  he  entered  the  vestibule  on  the  very  threshokl, 
"^oplioiiisba,  the  wife  of  Syphax  and  daughter  of  Asdrubal, 
met  him  ;  and  having  descried  Masinissa  in  the  middle  of  the 
trooj)  of  armed  men,  conspicuous  above  the  rest  for  his  armour 
and  other  habiliments,  supposing,  as  really  was  the  case,  that 
it  was  the  king,  she  fell  at  his  feet  and  said,  ^'  Both  the  Gods 
and  your  valor  and  fortune  have  given  you  an  absolute  power 
over  us.'' 


But  when  two  parts  or  divisions  of  a  sentence 
"have  each  a  separate  nominative,  and  refer  to  a 
different  subject,  the  clause,  which  generally  has 
dum>,  cum,  quando  or  postquam  with  it,  if  it  is 
rendered  by  a  participle,  will  be  turned  into  an 
ablative  absolute  ;  or,  for  the  sake  of  brevity,  in- 
to some  other  case  dependent  on  the  noun  or 
verb,  as  in  the  last  examples :  as  for, 

When  my  father  died,  we  sold  his  books, 

We  should  sav, 

Paire  mortuo,  ejus  libros  vendidimns : 

Or  perhaps  still  more  elegantly, 

Patris  mortui  libros  vendidinius. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  But  when  his  friends  exhorted  him  to  reduce  Greece 
under  his  power,  Darius  fitted  out  a  fleet  of  fixe  hundred  ships. 

2.  But  as,  or  when^  our  men  still  demurred  to  leap  into  the 
sea,  chiefly  on  account  of  the  depth  of  the  water  in  those  parts, 
the  standard-bearer  of  the  tenth  h^i^ion,  having  first  invoked 
the  Gods  fgr  success,  cried  aloud,  "  Follow  me,  fellow  soldiers, 


6i 

«tttlcss  you  will  betray  the  Roman  eagle  into  the  hands  of  ihe 
enemy." 

3.  They  say  that  wJiile  the  boy  was  sleeping,  his  head  ap- 
peared suddenly  in  a  blaze ;  and  that,  ivhen  the  tumult  was  ajv 
peased,  the  queen  forbade  the  boy  to  be  moved,  till  he  awoke 
of  his  own  accord. 

4.  These  atrocious  crimes  were  not  unpunished.  For  zcJiile 
the  Gods  pour  down  their  vengeance  on  so  many  perjuries, 
and  such  bloody  parricide,  he  is  himself  stript  of  his  kingdom, 
and  being  taken  in  battle,  he  loses  his  life  by  the  sword  of  the 
enemy. 

5.  When  the  enemy  was  thus  entangled  in  the  narrow 
stroights,  and  reduced  to  extreme  necessity,  he  sent  an  officer  to 
their  camp,  to  demand  that  they  would  surrender  themselves. 

The  force  of  these  two  rules  may  be  more 
clearly  and  briefly  illustrated  by  these  two  short 
examples,  in  which  it  is  shown,  v/hen  the  abla- 
tive absolute  may,  or  may  not.  be  used : 

fVheii  the  sun  rises,  the  moon  ivithdraivs  her 
light. 

Here  are  two  nominatives  to  two  different  di- 
visions of  a  sentence,  the  first  of  which  may  be 
rendered  by  the  ablative  absolute  :  and. 

When  the  sun  rises^  it  piits  the  stars  to  flight. 

Here  is  only  one  agent  or  nominative  case  re- 
ferring to  two  different  actions  or  verbs,  \\  hich 
are,  however,  closely  connected  together,  and 
consequently,  though  the  first  division  may  be 
changed  into  a  pai'ticiple,  it  must  remain  in  the 
nominative. 


But  it  is  not  solely  by  the  rejection  of  tlie  rela- 
tive, or  of  these  conjunctions,  that  participles  are 
to  be  used ;  for  very  often  and  with  greater  cic- 


gancc,  a  substantive  will  be  changed  into  a  par- 
ticii)le;  as, 

At  the  sight  of  my  father,  1  ran  away.  I  re- 
ceived him  071  his  return,     (redcuntem.) 

Though  in  this  cai^e  also,  the  substantive  be- 
ing thus  turned  into  a  verb,  and  admitting  the 
conjunctions  mentioned  above,  might  be  referred 
to  the  foregoing  rules. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  Tills  officer /rom  Ms  mistrust  of  his  own  safety,  and  that 
cf  the  legion,  rushed  unarmed  out  of  his  tent. 

*2.  And  we  shall  devote  ourselves  wholly  to  the  contemph' 
tion  and  consideration  of  these  subjects ;  because,  first  of  all, 
there  is  implanted  in  our  minds  a  certain  i  'satiable  desire  of 
discovering  the  truth  ;  and  the  more  the  very  skirts  of  the  pla- 
ces, whicii  we  have  already  reached,  facilitate  our  knowledff^ 
of  heavenly  objects,  the  more  do  they  inspire  us  with  the  desire 
of  perfecting  that  knowledge. 

3.  If  therefore  I  am  under  the  necessity  of  arraigning  one, 
I  still  seem  to  adhere  to  the  rule  which  1  have  proposed  to 
myself,  without  deviating  from  the  patronage  and  defence  of 
men, 

4.  For  my  mind  is  agitated  with  many  serious  and  distress? 
ing  thoughts,  which  suffer  me  to  take  no  rest  either  by  day 
or  by  night :  first  the  cares  and  anxieties  of  my  consular  of- 
fice, which,  whatever  troubles  and  difticulties  it  may  occa- 
sion to  others,  to  me,  above  all  men,  cannot  but  be  most  bur- 
densome and  perplexing.  No  indulgence  would  be  given  to 
me  in  any  error y  and  the  most  s})lendid  merit  would  be  recom- 
pensed by  the  small  and  reluctant  voice  of  praise.  In  my 
doubts,  1  could  expect  no  friendly  and  disinterested  advice,  in 
7ny  labors  J  I  should  receive  no  efiectual  assistance  from  the  no- 
bility. (Say,  no  advice  to  me  doubting;  uo  assistance  would  be 
to  me  laboring.) 


65 


XL\er  post  especially  the  substantive  is  elegant- 
Jy  changed  into  a  participle  :  as, 


EXA3IPLES. 


1 .  ^fter  the  building  of  the  city,  many  years  elapsed  Lt'- 
fore  any  form  of  government  was  settled. 

2.  yifterj  or  since,  the  birth  or  creation  of  men,  our  com4.. 
lias  not  been  desolated,  by  so  long  and  dreadful  a  war  as  ti' 
present. 


Of  two  verbs  that  have  a  relation  to  each  oth- 
er, and  have  a  case  common  to  both,  instead  of 
l)eing  connected  by  the  conjunction  et,  and  put 
in  the  same  mood,  the  one  is  elegantly  turned 
into  a  participle  passive  and  becomes  the  case 
of  the  other,  or  if  the  sense  requires  it,  will  agree 
with  the  nominative  case  ;  as, 

He  took  and  killed  him.     Captum  interfecit. 

EXAMPLES. 

3 .  Some  of  these  ivere  selected  and  sent  to  consult  the  Del- 
phic oracle. 

2.  Besides  the  conspirators  were  many,  who  went  to  Cati- 
line, in  the  beginning.  Among  these  was  A.  Fulvins,  the  son 
of  the  Senator,  whom  his  father  drew  back  from  his  intended 
journey,  and  ordered  to  be  killed. 

3.  He  made  an  obstinate  resistance,  and  fought  desperately 
to  defend  the  house  in  which  he  was  ;  but  within  an  iiour  or 
two,  he  is  taken  and  carried  away  to  prison, 

*4.  Other  useful  and  liberal  studies  appear  to  me  to  have 
been  pursued  with  the  greatest  celebrity  by  the  wise  and  good 
men  in  their  leisure  and  retirement,  (concelebrata)  and  to  have 
derived  the  greatest  spleytdor  and  perfection  :  (enituisse)  but 
this  science  seems  to  me  to  have  been  deserted  by  the  greatest 
part  of  them,  and  to  have  fallen  into  neglect  at  a  time  when 
it  was  necessary  that  it  should  be  encouraged  and  promoted 
with  more  than  usual  zeal  and  ardor. 


66 

The  nominative  of  the  participle  present  ac- 
tive is  very  inelegant,  and  is  better  rendered  by 
a  periphrasis  with  a  conjunction ;  and  where 
two  verbs  come  together  joined  by  the  conjunc- 
tion, and,  if  the  first  is  of  the  past  time,  it  may 
be  turned  elegantly  into  the  participle  of  a  verb 
deponent;  as, 

He  kissed  me  and  forbad  me  to  cry  : 

Me  oscidatiis  vetuit  ftere. 

EXAMPLES. 

*1.  He  tJien  complained  bitterh/  of  their  inactivity,  and  in- 
formed  them  he  had  sent  Manlius  forward  to  that  multitude 
whom  he  had  instructed  to  take  up  arms  5  and  had  dispatched 
others  to  convenient  places,  to  make  a  beginning  of  the  war, 
;tnd  that  he  himself  wished  to  take  his  departure  for  the  army, 
if  he  could  first  dispatch  Cicero,  who  stood  very  much  in  the 
^vay  of  his  design. 

2.  A  very  few,  trusting  to  their  strength,  swam  over ;  all  the 
rest,  our  horse  overtook  and  slew. 

3.  He  promised  better  things  of  himself  for  the  future,  and 
then  he  raised  iiis  eyes  to  Heaven,  and  invoked  the  protection 
of  the  Gods. 

4.  He  thought  that  he  could  easily  escape  out  of  their  hands, 
and  suddenly  rushed  i\\xoug\\  the  thickest  of  the  enemies,  but 
he  soon  fell  to  the  ground  pierced  with  a  thousand  weapons. 


After  the  verbs  malo,  volo,  nolo,  euro,  ^c.  par- 
ticiples passive  agreeing  with  their  case  are  more 
elegant  than  the  present  of  the  infinitive  active  ; 
as, 

Fll  take  care  to  find  you,  and  bring  your 
Pamphilus  with  me  : 

Inventum  tihi  cvrabo  et  mecum  addxietum  tuun 
Pamphilum, 


or 

EXAMPLE, 

1.  We  beg  this  one  thing  of  yon,  that,  i^f  out  ot  your  cle- 
mency you  have  determined  to  save  us,  you  would  not  strip 
us  of  our  arms. 

2.  But  there  is  also  something,  of  which  I  should  tvish  to  ad- 
ttse  you  in  a  ^q\\  words. 

3.  lie  loiskes  now  more  than  ever  that  his  son  should  die. 

4.  The  tyrant  would  not  wish  to  free  him  from  his  anguish. 

5.  In  obedience  to  the  orders  of  the  King,  he  took  care  to 
provide  all  things  necessary  for  the  expedition. 

6.  Pie  ordered  that  he  should  tahe  care  to  slay  him,  under 
pretence  of  holding  a  conference  with  him. 


The  participle  future  passive,  with  the  dative 
of  the  person,  is  more  elegant  than  the  verbs 
debeo,  oportety  necesse  est ;  as 

Diogenes  being  asked  at  what  age  a  man 
ought  to  marry,  said,  young  men  not  yet,  old 
men  never : 

Diogenes  interrogatus  qua  cetate  ducenda  sit 
uxor ;  juvenibusj  inquit,  nondiim,  senibus  nun- 
quam. 

EXAMPLES. 

1 .  There  is  nothing,  which  old  age  ought  to  guard  agaimt 
so  much,  as  sinking  into  languor  and  inactivhy. 

2.  We  must  not  only  acquire  wisdom,  but  we  should  exer^ 
eise  it  for  the  good  and  advantage  of  mankind. 


The  gerund  in  do  is  often  elegantly  used,  with 
the  omission  of  the  adjectives  signifying  conven- 
ience, &c.  as  Par,  idoneus,  ^c.  as, 

He  is  equal  to  paying ;  Est  sohendo. 


6S. 


EXAMPLKS. 

i.  Farmers  slioultl  lake  caro  y^-hai  .^r.u 


■\      ^lUl    ill    Hi. 

iith  :  for  okl  and  woni-out  seed  is  not  ft  for  b-owing, 

•L\  Brown  or  pack  paper  is  not  Jit  for  wrtting. 

3.  I  know  not  \s  herlier  I  ever  saw  a  stronger  man  :  Uc   h 
•  quid  to  batrin'j  iniy  \\<M^r},t. 


The  gerund  followed  b>  a  substanlivc  is  ele- 
gantly changed  into  the   participle  future  pas- 
ive,  and  agrees  with  that  substantive  in  gender, 
number,  and  case  :  but  only  in  those  verbs  that 
govern  an  accusative  ;  as, 

I  shaJl  ease  all  my  regret  hy  sending  and  re- 
ceiving letters : 

Omne  desiderium  Uteris  mittendis  accipiendis- 
que  Uniam. 

EXAMPLES. 

1 .  In  all  my  distresses  and  difficulties  it  has  always  afforded 
me  a  heartfelt  satisfaction  to  behold  your  alacrity  and  readi- 
ness in  defending  my  cause, 

2.  I  have  always  been  the  foremost  in  defending  your  lib- 
erty,    (Frinceps  with  a  genitive.) 

3.  What  can  be  more  difficult  than,  in  determining  the  dif' 
ferences  of  adverse  parties,  to  acquire  the  good  will  of  all  ? 

4.  We  are  by  nature  prone  to  love  virtue,  and  to  detest  vice. 


A  finite  verb,  or  a  verb,  which  determines  th( 
sense,  or  the  action,  is  often  changed  into  the 
participle  future  passive,  with  or  w^ithout  csscy 
where  the  subject  depends  upon  the  will  or  tin 
judgment  of  the  agent,   and  the  verbs  pulo^  cu 
bitror,  existimo,  credo^  censeo.jvdico^  statiio.  ducc. 


69 

tideor  or  video^  ctiro^  ^c.  are  added  ;  as  scriben- 
dum  putaviy  for  scripsi ;  but  care  must  be  taken, 
that  the  choice  of  tliese  verbs  be  appropriate  to 
the  sense,  as  we  should  not  say,  that  a  man  mo- 
riendum  pittavit  for  mortuiis  est,  as  not  depend- 
ing upon  his  will. 

EXAMPLES.  ♦ 

1.  Caesar,  seeming  sufficiently  to  understand  the  minds  or 
his  soldiers,  tried,  (or  thought  Jit  to  try,)  what  intention  or 
inclination  Pompey  had  to  fight. 

2.  When  the  Temple  of  Janus  was  shut,  and  he  had  by 
means  of  treaties  and  alliances  conciliated  the  good  will  of  all 
the  neighbouring  states,  and  thus  removed  the  dread  of  foreign 
dangers,  lest  the  minds  of  his  subjects,  whom  the  fear  of  the 
enemy,  and  a  strict  military  discipline,  had  hitherto  kept  un- 
der restraint,  should  become  enervated  by  luxurious  ease,  he. 
instilled  into  them  the  fear  of  the  Gods,  which  he  thought 
the  most  efficacious  method  to  restrain  a  multitude  in  that 
age  so  rude  and  uncivilized. 

3.  What  so  popular  as  peace?  which  methinks  brightens 
not  only  those  beings,  to  whom  nature  has  imparted  animal 
sense,  but  the  very  houses  and  fields  with  the  smile  of  joy ; 
what  so  popular  as  liberty?  which  you  see  not  only  men, 
but  the  very  beasts  of  the  fields  longing  after,  and  even  pre- 
ferring to  every  thing  else ;  what  so  popular  as  ease  ?  which 
is  so  gratifying,  that  every  man  distinguished  for  his  bravery 
will  gladly  undergo  the  greatest  toils  and  difficulties,  that  he 
may  one  day  live  at  ease,  especially  if  accompanied  with 
power  and  dignity. 

*4.  No  avaricious  views  diverted  him  into  the  pui*suit  of 
plunder ;  no  criminal  passion  seduced  him  into  pleasure ;  the 
charms  of  a  country  provoked  not  his  delight ;  the  reputation 
of  a  city  excited  not  his  curiosity  ^  nor  could  even  labour 
itself  sooth  him  into  a  desire  of  repose.  In  short,  he  did  not 
so  much  as  visit  thqse  paintings,  statues,  and  other  ornaments 
of  the  Greek  cities,  which  the  other  Gejierals  canted  off  at 
pleasure. 

5.  I  wish  to  explain  more  at  large,    ia  this  assembly  c€ 

7  * 


70 

learned  men,  that  discipline  wliich  Petronius  has  lightlv 
loiiclicd  upon,  especially  as  in  die  examination  of  it,  I  may 
be  able  to  exliibit  and  explain  that  plan  and  method  of  doc- 
trine which  1  myself  pursue. 

6.  The  wisest  men  have  dratcn  from  these  sources,  that  is 
from  Greek  and  Latin,  every  improvement  of  human  genius, 
all  true  and  solid  learning,  every  precept  of  true  wisdom  and 
prudence,  and  ^hat  is  of  much  greater  consequence,  the  best 
examples  for  the  •formation  and  direction  of  a  good  life  fbcnc 
instituendce  vitao.) 


A  pai'ticiple  passive  is  often  elegantly  joined 
to  a  verb  as  antecedent  to  it,  and  put  into  the 
neuter  gender,  being  made  to  agree  with  the 
sentence,  though  either  of  the  two  verbs  would 
liave  been  suflicienty  as,  Qimm  relaium  legerint. 

A  similar  mode  is  very  frequently  adopted 
Avith  the  verb  habeoj  when  the  English  word  to 
have  refers  not  merely  to  the  perfect  but  to  the 
present ;  as, 

JVe  have  found  or  discovered  that  the  sun 
> lands  still : 

Covipertum  hahemus  solem  consistere. 

EXAMPLES. 

1 .  AVe  have  received  it  from  tradition^  (or  we  have  recciv- 
'  d  it  as  delivered  from  antiquity.^ 

2.  I  comprehend  in  my  mindy  (or  I  hold  it  comprehended  in 
my  7nind.) 

3.  Yqu  could  scarcely  mention  any  thing  which  he  did  not 
know :  for  as  we  mark  with  letters,  whatever  we  wish  to 
commit  to  a  lasting  monument,  so  he  had  engraven  all  things, 
on  his  mind. 


The  participle  future  active  should  be  used^ 


71 

instead  of  the  verbs  cupio^  volo,  and  statuo,  with 
the  omission  of  the  conjunctions  cmn  and  si, 
when  they  merely  imply  something  future  ;  as, 

If  you  intend  to  set  out  on  your  journey,  shake 
off  your  sleep  : 

Iter  initurus  eripe  te  somno, 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  When  you  wish  to  write  verses,  read  Virgil,  and  thus  hi> 
manner  may,  by  degrees,  be  imperceptibly  transfused  into 
your  poetry. 

2.  When  I  was  thinking  of  writing  this  letter  to  you,  intel- 
ligence was  brought  to  me,  that  you  were  gone  into  Italy. 


All  verbs  signifying  motion  to  a  place,  may 
be  variously  rendered :  either  by  a  supine,  a 
gerund,  or  by  ut  with  the  subjunctive  ;  but  with 
greater  elegance  by  the  participle  future  active  ; 
as, 

He  came  to  snatch  away  the  boy  : 

Venit  ut  eriperet  puerum  ; 

Venit,  ereptum  puerum ; 

Venit  J  eripiendi  puerum  causa  ;  or  ad  eripicn- 
dum  puerum  : 

But  more  elegantly, 

Venit  erepturus  puerum. 

EXAMPLES. 

*1.  He  was  so  harrassed  by  remorse,  and  driven  to  despair 
by  the  stings  of  an  evil  conscience,  that  he  retired  into  the 
deepest  recess  of  a  wood,  to  kill  himself  by  his  own  sword ^ 
but  when  he  thought  he  had  collected  sufficient  resolution,  and 
was  already  on  the  point  of  plunging  the  steel  into  his  owr 
breast,  his  courage  failed  him,  and  he  returned  home  without 
accomplishing  his  purpose. 

2.  I  am  come  to  extricate  you  from  all  your  difficulties. 


3.  ne  retired  into  the  temple,  to  imjyiore  the  favour  of  the 
Cods,  arul  to  consult  the  oracle,  but  a  band  of  ruffians,  un- 
mindful of  the  sacred  place  in  which  so  foul  a  deed  would  be 
perpetrated;  rushed  upon  him  and  slew  him  before  the  altar. 


One  or  two  more  words  in  a  sentence  are  ele- 
gantly placed  between  the  participle  and  the  verb 
sunij  which,  in  that  case,  generally  comes  first. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  I  think  I  shall  not  be  very  far  from  the  truth,  in  assertinj^, 
that  among  all  those,  toho  have  been  employed  in  the  most  libe- 
ral studies  of  the  arts  and  sciences,  there  have  existed  a  very 
small  number  of  excellent  poets. 

2.  I  had  not  the  least  doubt,  that  many  messengers,  and  re- 
port itself,  would,  by  its  rapidity,  anticipate  this  letter. 

*3.  But  those,  whose  grovelling  souls  are  fixed  upon  the 
earth,  whose  whole  thoughts  are  bent  on  worldly  and  perisha- 
ble objects,  those  men  we  see  depart  from  life  with  manifest  re- 
pugnance and  difficulty.  And  not  without  a  reason.  For  hav- 
ing a  nearer  view  of  the  immortality  of  their  souls,  they  already 
feel  unspeakable  torments,  as  if  eternal  punishment  teas  on  the 
eve  of  overtaking  a  life  spent  in  the  commission  of  enormous 
r  rimes* 


'^^-j^^H%'^ 


rs 


OF  TElNSES, 

In  a  coiitinucd  narration,  which  is  intended  to 
I  epresent  circumstances  as  it'  they  were  present 
to  the  eye,  the  present  indicative  is  more  in  use, 
than  the  perfect. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  The  Commander,  observing  the  general  consternation, 
called  a  council  of  war,  and  having  summoned  all  the  Centuri- 
ons of  the  army  to  be  present,  inveighed  against  them,  with 
great  severity,  for  presuming  to  enquire,  or  at  all  concern  them- 
selves, which  way,  or  on  what  design,  they  were  to  march. 

2.  A  few  days  after,  Ennius  liaving  come  to  Nasica,  and 
asking  for  hiro  at  the  door,  Nasica  cried  qui  that  he  was  not  at 
honae. 


It  is  usual  with  the  Latins,  in  a  narration,  to 
make  use  of  the  present  infinitive  instead  of  the 
indicative,  with  the  ellipsis  of  ccepij  or  of  some 
other  verb  ;  this  is  called  the  historic  infinitive : 
as  in  that  line  of  Virgil : 

Nos  pavidi  trepidare  metii^  crinemqueflagrantem 

Excuterc. 

EXAMPLES. 

1 .  In  the  mean  while,  both  knights,  patricans  and  consufs, 
were  predpitittwg  fast  into  slavery.  Those  chiefly,  who  werr 
distinguished  by  thf  ir  dignity  and  eminence,  assumed  the  mask 
Mf  hypocrisy:  put  on  a  hurried  step,  aud  displayed  reserve  ami 


74 

«  omposure  in  their  countenances,  and  from  a  dread  of  manift'>- 
lirifr  at  first  too  great  an  excess  either  of  joy  or  sorrow,  at  tlu 
<leccase  of  the  Prince,  tliey  took  care  to  blend  equally  togeiijci 
their  tears  and  joy,  their  adulation  and  complaints. 

*2.  The  Vjneae  were  worked,  and  drawn  up,  with  tHee^reat- 
s-t  danger,  and  to  no  purpose;  for  as  soon  as  they  had  brought 
-iiem  reasonably  close,  the  fire  and  stones  that  poured  upon 
them  soon  destroyed  and  nMidered  them  useless.  The  sol- 
diers could  neither  stand  before  their  works,  on  account  of  tlie 
inequality  of  the  ground,  nor  be  of  any  service  among  the  ^  i- 
ne£e,  without  the  most  imminent  danger.  The  bravest  of  tin* 
troops  were  cither  slain  or  wounded^  and  the  rest  were  struck 
with  an  irresistible  panic. 

3.  Then  all  in  the  assembly  exclaimed  that  the  country  was 
m  danger,  and  that  tiie  enemies  were  already  at  the  gates ;  they 
then  suddenly  rushedforth,  determined  either  to  conquer,  or  to 
die  bravely  for  their  country. 

4.  The  man  being  struck  with  the  fear  of  impending  danger, 
faulteredy  hesitated^  and  blushed. 


Where  the  subject  is  general,  and  the  word 
man  is  either  expressed  or  understood,  the  passive 
is  not  always  used,  but  it  is  as  elegant  to  put  the 
second  person  singular  of  the  subjunctive,  or  the 
infinitive,  with  the  verb  est  or  licet ;  as, 

A  man  may  easily  understand  what  use  is  to  be 
derived  from  literature : 

Animadvertere  est^  quanta  ex  re  literarid  quceri 
possit  utilttas. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  2d.  Persov  Pres.  Sub. — In  every  business,  before  m^/i 
undertake  any  thing  of  moment,  they  should  first  deliberate, 
and  use  the  utmost  caution. 

2.  What  is  promised  with  an  oath,  as  if  God  were  a  witness, 
must  be  inviolably  kept. 


75 

S.  In  FIN.  wiih  Est  or  Licet. — Men  are  seen  everywhere 
covetous  of  mone3\ 

4.  Men  are  often  seen,  not  so  much  from  a  natural  benevo- 
lence, as  from  a  desire  of  appearing  generous,  doing  actions, 
which  seem  to  proceed  rather  from  ostentation  than  good  will. 

5.  77^^«  maj/  be  seen  in  our  other  senses,  that  we  are  not  so 
long  delighted  with  perfumes  of  a  very  high  and  sweet  savour, 
as  with  those  that  are  more  moderate. 


In  the  epistolary  style,  instead  of  the  present 
tenses,  the  past  tenses  are  often  used ;  most  fre- 
quently the  imperfect.  The  writer  seems  to 
consider  the  time  of  the  letter's  being  read,  not 
of  its  being  written,  as  the  moment  of  narration : 
as,  /  am  ill :  the  letter  writer  should  say,  JEgro- 
taham^  because  his  illness  may  have  left  him  be- 
fore the  letter  is  received.  A  future  is  rendered 
by  the  partciple  future,  with  the  imperfect  of  the 
verb  sum. 

EXAMPLES. 

1 .  There  is  (say  was^  a  report,  that  you  have  succeeded  in 
3'our  enterprize. 

2.  I  am  thinking  of  setting  q^  to-morrow.  (Participle  fu- 
ture with  imperfect  of  sum.) 

3.  If  there  shall  be  a  long  interval  between  my  letters,  do 
not  wonder  at  it  ;  (perfect  subjunctive,)  for  I  shall  he  absent 
o  r  a  whole  month. 

4.  I  write  this  on  the  twelfth  of  June,  and  send  it  by  the 
letter-carrier. 


There  is  some  difficulty  in  the  use  of  the  fu- 
ture perfect,  owing  to  the  incorrectness  of  the 


76 

English,  which  generally  nses  the  sinij>le  prt^i 
ent  lutiuT,  or  perfect,  ^^  here  It  (Might  to  ha\  e  n 
future  perfect.     It  generally  follows  these  parti 
cles,  c?7m,  ubij  5/,  (juando,  and  is  used  w^heu  ili« 
\  erb,  that  accompanies  it,  is  in  the  future  im- 
perfect, and  itself  denotes  a  future  action  abso- 
lutely completed ;  as. 

When  he  comes,  we  shall  sing. 

Cum  venerit  ille^  canemus. 

EXAMPLES. 

1 .  When  your  fallier  comcs^  I  shall  tell  him  wiiat  i>rogrts  - 
}  ou  have  made  in  3^our  learning. 

2.  When  you  have  sent  me  that  book,  I  shall  give  it  to  m 
father.-' 

S.  If  you  do  thisj  I  shall  be  highly  indebted  to  you. 

4.  Whatever  you  resolve^  will  please  me. 

5.  To-morrow  ifi\\G  enemy  go  out  of  their  camp,  to  forage 
and  lay  waste  the  nritrhbouring  country,  I  shall  give  orders  for 
a  chosen  troop  to  sally  forth,  and  if  possible,  to  take  the  forag- 
ing party  in  the  rear,  and  cut  them  off  from  their  main  army. 

6.  And  if  I  show,  as  fully  as  I  am  able,  that  there  is  no 
>ulid  doctrine  or  useful  art,  worthy  the  cultivation  of  a  liberal 
juind,  which  the  Greeks  have  not  either  invented,  or  of  which 
they  have  not  as  it  were  most  abundantly  sr  '  the  seeds 
if)  all  parts  of  the  world;  and  if  1  prove  at  1  ^  .0  lime  by 
the  most  convinciiig  reasons  that  it  was  they  who  from  the 
depth  of  darkness  not  only  brought  to»light  and  cultivated  the 
noblest  sciences,  but  also  carried  them  to  such  a  he ii>hl  of  per- 
fection as  almost  to  take  away  from  us  every  hope  of  following 
or  imitating  them  ;  what  youth  ivill  not  feel  his  breast  glow 
with  the  warmest  zeal  towards  that  learned  nation,  and  attach- 
ment to  it  ? 


This  tense  is  by  some  e:ranimarians  very  er 


5wv     or  THE 

roneously  called  a  future  subjunctj 
ins  invariably  use  the  participle  future,  and  the 
verb  sum^  to  form  a  future  subjunctive ;  as,  I  do 
not  doubt  but  he  w^ill  prove  a  learned  man :  Non 
dubiiOj  (juin  evasurus  sit  doctus.  When  verbs 
have  no  supine,  and  consequently  want  a  parti- 
ciple future,  they  employ  the  periphrasis/ore  utj 
as  we  have  already  observed  ;  as,  1  hope  he  will 
learn ;  spew ^  fore  ut  discat. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  Such  is  his  skill,  bravery,  and  knowledge  of  the  military 
art  that  he  will  without  doubt  extricate  Jdmself  from  that 
danger. 

2.  He  will  use  so  many  arts,  that  he  will  corrupt  ray  son. 

3.  I  think  that^  if  misers  bury  their  treasures  in  a  chest, 
not  only  their  thoughts  but  their  bodies  will  always  havg  over 
that  chest. 


And  often  where  the  English  has  a  future,  the 
Latins,  speaking  with  greater  accuracy,  make  use 
of  a  present,  when  the  matter  relates  to  a  tiling 
present. 


EXAMPLES. 


1.  Who  i/?i7Z  e/cwy  this  ?  I  am  so  far  from  invalidating  the 
force  of  this  argument,  that  I  wish  to  pay  all  possible  resperi 
to  so  high  an  authority. 

2.  Every  one  mU  easily  understand^  that  the  whole  of  my 
discourse  tends  to  confute  so  erroneous  an  opinion. 


The  Latins  often  very  elegantly  use  the  pfc- 
tcrperfcct  subjunctive,  instead  of  the  present. 

8 


78 

EXAMPLES 

1.  Some  one  wm^  s«y,  that  virtue  is  Its  own  reward ;  but 
rew  men  will  be  induced  to  love  virtue  for  its  own  sake,  if  tliey 
are  not  at  the  same  time  impelled  by  other  more  powerful  rea- 

(»ns. 

2.  You  may  object  to  this,  that  man  is  born  to  labor,  and 
therefore  he  cannot  e.xpcct  a  life  of  repose. 


The  present  siibjiinctive  of  the  verbs  volo^  ma- 
lo,  7iolo,  possum,  is  often  used  for  the  imperfect, 
as  is  the  case  with  other  verbs,  when  there  is  an 
nterrogation. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  I  would  ratJier  please  you  and  Bnitus. 

2.  If  he  must  be  sent  for,  which  I  should  hij  no  means  wish 
e  cannot  but  be  struck  with  astonishment,  at  this  unheard  of 

;)rodigy. 

S.  Who  could  not  understand  a  thing  so  intelligible  ? 

4.  Who  coidd  believe,  that  you,  who  are  already   so  much 
^  dvanced  in  years,  should  think  of  marriage  ? 


Concerning  the  SUCCESSION  OF  TEN- 

'^ES  to  eacli  other,  as  far  as  it  varies  from  the 

^^nglish,  as  it  is  often  attended  with  some  diffi- 

ulty,  it  may  be  observed,  that  after  ut,  ne,  quo, 

'UO  minus,  quin,  qui,  quce,  quod,  (piis,  and  other 

articles,  that  govern  the  subjunctive,  if  a  pres- 

1  nt  or  future  goes  before,  it  is  right  to  use  tlie 

>rcsent ;  if  an  imperfect,  perfect,  or  phiperfect, 

hen  the  imperfect  follows  :  as,  he  will  be  wor- 

hy  to  be  loved  :    dignus  erit,   qui   ametur :    he 

/vas  worthy  to  be  loved :  dignus  ernt  qui  amarc- 


79 

tur.  But  it  will  be  necessary  to  pay  strict  re- 
gard to  the  nature  of  the  tenses,  and  the  sense  of 
the  subject ;  hence  some  exceptions  may  some- 
times occur. 

A  Present  after  a  Present. — When  speak- 
ing of  things  present. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  YLoJiglitSj  as  lilie  contended  for  his  life^ 

2.  You  tell  me  that  your  destiny  is  placed  in  my  own  hands, 
as  if  it  were  possible^  that  I  should  obtain  this  boon.  (Here 
it  would  be  wrong  to  say  consequerer,  because  ^en  possit  goes 
before,  though  the  English  might  seem  to  authorize  it.) 

3.  I  do  not  think,  that  tJiere  are  any  men,  who  would  not 
wish  to  be  informed  of  the  fate  of  their  absent  friends. 

*4.  Do  yon  imagine  that  we  could  be  supplied  with  sufficient 
materials y  so  that  loe  could  plead  every  day  on  such  a  variety 
of  subjects,  if  our  mind  were  not  cultivated  with  science;  or 
that  it  could  bear  being  stretched  to  such  a  degree,  if  it  were 
not  sometimes  unbent  by  the  amusement  qi  learning. 

5.  You  write  me  word,  that  men  are  struck  with  amaze- 
ment, how  I  should  dare  to  do  that,  because  it  is  not  credible 
that  a  man  in  his  senses,  could  undertake  so  hazardous  aa  en* 
ferprize. 


But  these  will  be  excepted : 

A  perfect  must  come  after  the  present,  if 
speaking  of  a  circumstance  that  is  past ;  and  a 
future,  if  speaking  of  the  future. 


EXAMPLES. 


1.  You  are  now  afraid,  as  if  youfiad  not  at  all^eenpreff- 
ent,  as  if  you  yourself  had  not  obtained  that  wealth  un- 
justly. 


so 

^.  Is  U  nui  rt'iij  orcessaryyilmi  a  man  /^iitjiUd  itarn,  M:(niitl 
jiave  Iciirnl)  many  things,  before  lie  ventures  to  instruct  others  > 
(Here  h  would  be  very  improper  to  say,  nt  discal.) 

n.  IIow  rash  and  impious  are  those  men,  who,  in  the  hoiii 
of  despair,  often  ?mA,  that  they  had  never  been  bom, 

4.  It  is  to  be  hopcdy  that  that  report  of  the  murder  of  om 
friend  teas  false. 

r>.  It  is  not  possible,  tliat  an  indolent  man  can  ever  acquire 
dignity.     (A  future.) 

6.  I  fear  lest  my  father  should  return  before  that  can  be 
done. 

7.  I  am  not  a  man,  who  never  is  to  die. 

8.  Tell  me,  when  your  father  comes. 


In  like  manner,  an  imperfect,  or  a  pluperfect, 
must  come  after  a  present,  in  such  forms  as 
these : 

1 .  Tell  me  what  you  would  do. 

2.  Tell  me,  whether  you  would  have  come^  Sfc. 

3.  I  wish  that  you  Jiad  avoided  those  associates* 


In  a  succession  of  three  verbs,  where  the  prin- 
cipal verb  is  in  the  preterite,  and  tlie  two  fol- 
lowing denote  a  future,  that  which  comes  after 
the  future  infinitive,  and  implies  an  event  then 
completed,  will  be  elegantly  put  in  the  pluper- 
fect potential :  as,  he  promised  that  he  would  da 
it,  when  they  returned.  Se  idfacturum  esse^  cunt 
rediissentj  pollicilus  est. 

IBXAMPLES. 

1.  O  the  memorable  voice  of  that  youth,  who  having  sha- 
ken off  the  chains  of  idleness,  and  removed  far  away  every  al 


61 

lureinent  to  pleasure,  declared  tliat  he  tcould follow  that  mode 
of  life,  whicli  his  parents  advised. 

2.  He  said,  that  he  should  cease  to  be  the  master  of  the  ship, 
if  his  favorite  mates  did  not  embark  with  Iiim. 

3.  But  he  refused  to  leave  the  ship.  He  said,  that  he  iconld 
perish f  when  his  beloved  riches  were  sunk. 

4.  He  answered,  that  he  would  preserve  the  state,  if  they 
surrendered  before  the  battering' eng-ines  reached  the  wall,  but 
there  could  be  no  other  condition  of  their  surrender,  than  to  de- 
liver up  their  arms  ;  and  that  whatever  he  did  in  the  case  of 
his  other  enemies,  {in  aliis  hostibits)  he  would  do  in  their  case. 


But  when  tlie  principal  verb  is  not  in  the  pre- 
terite, then  the  otlier  verb  wliich  comes  ai'ter  the 
future  infinitive,  will  be  usually  put  in  the  fu- 
ture perfect :  as,  hiovj  that  you  ivill  do  me  a 
great  kindness,  if  you  come.  Sclas.  pcrgratum 
te  mihi  facturum,  si  veneris. 

EXAMPLE. 

27tei/  say,  that  they  will  leave  o^' childish  plays,  whm  fh'if 
are  become  great  boys. 


A  Present  after  a  Future. — Generally  after 
(tj  ncj  qub^  quin, 

EXAMPLE?. 

1.  Whoever  will  persuade  me  to  utter  a  falsehood,  wiU  at 
last  force  me  to  consider  him,  as  an  impudent  wretch. 

2.  If  I  do  any  thing,  I  shall  inform  you  of  it,  novthall  I  ever 
send  letters  home,  without  adding  those  which  I  wish  to  b(-* 
delivered  to  you.     (Not  adjuncturus  sim.) 

And  always  after  qui,  quce,  quod,  in  these  ex- 
pressions : 

1.  There  icillhe  some,  who  will  say 

8  * 


82 

?.  There  tciU  he  found  some,  who  trill  affirm 

3.  B(it  be  well  assured,  that  I  shall  certainly  do  what  I 
know  you  will  wish  me  to  do. 

And  after  these  particles,  wti,  quis^  quid^  quan- 
do,  cur,  i^.  when  the  idea  of  a  thing  present 
may  be  inferred  ;  as, 

1.  I  shall  see  to-morrow  wftat  you  do,  and  in  what  kind  of 
house  you  dwclL 

2.  I  shall  soon  be  able  to  tell  you,  whence  it  comes,  that 
you  give  me  so  much  displeasure. 


But  other  tenses  will  also  come  after  a  future, 
if  the  sense  require  it,  as  a  perfect  after  the  fu- 
ture. 

1.  If  ray  father  does  not  return  to-morrow,  I  shall  fear  that 
he  is  killed  by  robbei*s. 

2.  Some  one  loill  complain  perhaps,  of  your  being  so  long 
with  us,  without  any  advantage. 


And  also  a  future  after  a  future ;  as 

1.  If  your  father  does  not  soon  return,  I  slutll  fear  that  he 
may  not  return  for  many  months. 


An  Imperfect  after  the  Imperfect. — And  it 
may  be  observed,  that  though  a  pluperfect,  if 
the  sense  require  it,  sometimes  comes  after  an 
imperfect ;  neither  a  present,  nor  a  perfect,  nor 
a  future,  should  ever  be  placed  after  it. 

EXAMPLES. 

J.  The  house  shone,  as  '\iit  hud  been  of  gold. 

3-.  I  have  received  your  letters,  which  informed  me  vfcat 


83 

yuu  employed  yourself  in,  and  when  /  Muld  see  you,    ( I  Im- 
rus  esee/n,) 

3.  Though  these  thhigs  seemetT  to  surpass  my  beUef,  yet 
when  I  received  your  letters,  I  did  not  entertain  the  least 
doubt,  but  that  things  were  in  tliat  situation. 

4.  I  should  leish  indeed  never  to  have  seen  that  wicked 
wretch.     (A  pluperfect.) 


An  Imperfect  after  a  Perfect,  especially  af- 
ter Ut :  After  verbs  of  imshing,  asking,  advising^ 
persuading,  permitting,  after  necesse  fuit,  cequum 
fait,  and  other  verbs,  that  require  the  conjunc- 
tion ut  after  them  ;  and  after  sic,  talis,  tarn,  ita^ 
tantus,  quin,  qui,  ne,  ^c. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  Your  father  took  care  to  be  thought  rkh. 

2.  Though  I  spoke  the  truth,  being  once  detected  in  a  lie,  I 
could  not  persuade  men  to  believe  me 

3.  Pompey  by  his  actions,  obtained  the  name  of  Great.— 
(Assecutus  est  ut.) 

4.  I  have  been  prevented  by  that  circumstance,  from  being 
able  to  perform  this  business  so  soon. 

5.  I  never  entertained  the  least  doubt,  but  I  am,  (or  was) 
very  dear  to  you. 

6.  And  when  he  could  clearly  distinguish  the  threatening  as- 
pect, and  heard  the  menacing  words  of  tlie  approaching,  and 
enraged  multitude,  and  he  wanted  the  courage  to  fall  upon  his 
own  sword,  a  friend  was  found  to  dispatch  him.     (Qui.) 


Let  it  be  observed  that  when  the  action  is  im- 
plied as  fully  completed,  the  pluperfect  is  ele- 
gantly used. 


84 

*  EXAMPLES. 

1.  He    '     '     '    him  to  come  into  school  till  his  hands  and 
ice  were  <  .,  and  his  head  combed, 

2.  He  tcould  not  suffer  him  to  depart,  till  the  business  traa 
jimshcd. 


There  will  also  occur  many  exceptions  to 
this :  the  perfect  must  sometimes  be  used  alter  a 
perfect,  as, 

1 .  He  enga^d  m  so  narrow  a  strait,  tliat  the  whole  line  of 
his  ships  could  not  be  extended. 

2.  So  far  loas  he  from  betraying  the  insolence  of  triumph^, 
that  he  even  pitied  the  fortunes  of  his  fallen  enemy. 


And  if  the  sense  require  it,  a  present  or  a  fu- 
ture will  also  be  found  after  a  perfect ;  as, 

1 .  This  man  has  learned  so  little,  that  he  can  now  scar(fely 
read. 

2.  You  have  been  the  cause  by  your  own  perfidy,  that  no 
one  will  for  the  future,  repose  any  confidence  in  me. 


An  imperfect  is  also  used  after  the  pluperfect, 
subject  to  some  exceptions,  which  the  sense  will 
easily  point  out. 

/       EXAMPLES. 

1.  If  you  had  delivered  this  message  to  him,  notJiing  would 
have  prevented  him  from  coming  to  us, 

2.  If  you  had  persuaded  him  to  pursue  tliose  measures,  he 
certainly  would  have  followed  your  advice. 


As  to  the  succession  of  tenses  in  the  infinitive 
mood,  concerning  which  such  various  opinions 


rj 


liave  been  given  by  grammarii^,  it  must  be  ob- 
served, tliat,  though  it  may  be  assumed  with 
Sanctius  and  others,  that  the  infinitive  is  often 
\  ery  indeterminate  in  its  tenses,  since  we  say 
cola  legere,  and  volni  Icgere^  and  Terence  says, 
eras  mihi  argentum  dare  se  dixit,  and  Virgil,  Pro- 
geniem  sed  enim  Trojano  a  sanguine  daci  audie- 
rat,  yet  we  may  safeJy  give  it  as  a  general  rule, 
that  the  tense  of  the  verb,  w^hich  is  used  in  the 
infinitive,  must  be  determined  by  the  time  of  its 
action,  or  state,  relatively  to  the  former  verb. 
Thus  w^hen  Cicero  says,  vidi  enim,  (nam  tu  abe- 
ras)  nostros  inimicos  cupere  bellum :  cupere  is 
present  in  relation  to  the  time  when  he  saw  that 
they  wished  for  war,  and  therefore  it  is  put  in 
the  present,  and  cannot  be  said,  as  some  gram- 
marians would  affirm,  to  be  used  for  cnpivisse. 
Had  it  been  cnpivisse,  it  would  have  had  a  re- 
ference to  that  wish  of  the  enemy,  as  existing 
prior  to  the  vidi,  which  is  a  sense  not  intended 
to  be  conveyed.  Sed  abunde  erit  ex  iis  duo  exem- 
pla  retulisse.  The  circumstance  of  having  pro- 
duced these  two  examples,  is  antecedent  in  time 
to  the  former  verb :  it  would  therefore  not  have 
been  so  correct,  and  quite  a  different  meaning,  to 
have  said  referre. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  On  that  day  there  was  much  speaking  on  our  side,  and 
my  words  seemed  to  make  a  strong  impression  on  the  senate. 

2.  J  kneto  there  had  eocisted  men  of  the  first  celebrity  for 
learning  and  wisdom  in  the  state. 

3.  When  he  heard  ih?it  the  enemy  had  declared  war,  and 
understood  at  the  same  time  that  thei/  ravaged  the  noighbouc- 
ing  states. 


;i^  86 

4.  Tlie  wisest  jfflWsophers  maintained  that  there  was  only 
one  God. 

5.  He  then  takes  a  magnificent  view  of  himself,  and  derives 
delight  and  no  small  advantage  from  storing  Wis  memory  wiili 
an  immense  mass  of  names  and  deeds,  and  aequiring  a  variot y 
of  erudition  ;  and  though  he  does  not  himself  neglect  true  learn- 
ing, yet  he  determines  this  to  he  the  most  solid  advantage  of 
history,  in  contemplating  the  splendid  and  immortal  genius  of 
great  men,  to  form  his  own  mind  and  that  of  his  pupils,  by 
their  eminent  virtues,  and  thus  to  receive  the  assistance  of  their 
wisdom  and  niiulcnce,  rather  thaii  of  mere  erudition. 


CHAPTER  II 


OF   THE    ORDER   OR  ARRANGEMEMT   OFV  WORDS. 


Felicissimus  sermo  est,  cui  et  rectus  ordo,  et  apta  junctura,  et 
cum  his  Humerus  opportune  cadejis  contingit. — Quint, 

A.S  these  three  requisites,  order  or  arrange- 
ment, connexion  and  harlnony,  seem  to  be  point- 
ed out  by  Quintilian,  as  necessary  to  form  an 
elegant  style,  we  shall  offer  some  observations 
upon  each. 

The  order  or  arrangement  of  words  is  either 
fixed  or  arbitrary ;  that  is,  words  must  either  re-  IR 
tain  the  same  invariable  order,  which  tlie  an- 
cients have  assigned  them,  or  will  chiefly  depend 
upon  the  natiu^al  succession  of  our  ideas. 


These  words,  for  instance,  arc  always  placed 
in  the  beginning  of  a  sentence,  n«m,  at,  vcriim, 
sedj  quart,  quamohreyn,  and  si,  nisi,  etsi,  quan- 
quam,  quia,  quoniam,  cum ;  except  in  few  cases, 
where,  if  these  words  occur,  they  will  claim  the 
.first  place,  as,  qui  nisi,  quod  si,  qui  quia,  tu  si,  ^t. 


anvavs 


On  the  <^*^^^V^  7  fiiun^  vera,  autemy  quoquc, 
quidemj  arc  aW^s  useil  after  one  or  tA> o,  but 
geiy^rally  after  the  first  word  of  a  sentence. 


*1.  For  I  much  fear  that  nature,  \\\  giving  us  weak  and  in- 
hrm  bodies,  and  subjecting  tliem  to  incurable  diseases  and  in- 
sufferable pain!^)»has  also  given  us  minds  both  ready  to  sympa- 
tldse  with  the  pains  of  the  bodies,  and  often  tormeUted  with 
their  own  separate  anguish  and  disquietude!|p 

2.  But  we  both  magnify  future  evils,  by  our  dread  of  them, 
and  aggravate  present  calamities,  by  our  unavailing  sorrows, 
and  choose  rather  to  throw  the  blame  on  the  nature  of  things, 
than  on  our  own  errors. 

3.  Philosophy  indeed  is  so  far  from  meeting  with  the  just 
commendation,  which  its  benefits  to  mankind  deserve,  that  by 
most  men  it  is  utterly  neglected,  and  by  many  it  is  openly  con- 
demned. 


Etenim^  itaque^  ergh^  deniqxie^  tandem,  are  us- 
ed either  as  the  first  or  second  words. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  A  debauched  and  intemperate  young  man  will  undouht- 
edly,  if  he  live,  transmit  weakness  and  infirmities  to  his  latter 
days. 

2.  Let  us  then  sufler  ourselves  to  be  exercised  and  porhops 
cured  by  this  wholesome  discipline. 


Ne  quidem  are  elegantly  separated  by  one  or 
more  words  coming  between  them,  generally  by 
that  or  those  words,  on  which  the  stress  of  th** 
restriction  is  laid ;  as, 


1 


He  is  ofibiidcd  not  even  at  the  smuUe^i  triilo : 
A^e  minima  quidem  re  offenditur, 

EXAMPLKS. 

1.  For  my  part  I  do  not  thinky  that  the  knowledge  offut> 
rity  would  even  be  attended  with  any  utility  to  ws.     How  mii- 
erable,  for  instance,  would  have  been  tlie  life  of  Priam,  if.  he 
had  known  from  his  youth  tlie  calamities,  which  were  to  befal 
him  in  his  old  age. 

2.  So  far  are  you  from  Iiaving  perused  all  those  !)ooks,  tb . 
you  have  not  even  read  one, 

3.  The  poor  are  sometimes  so  destitute  of  necessaries,  that 
ihey  have  not  even  enough  to  clothe  themselves. 

4.  Hence   it  follows,  that  if  one  body  is  not  driven  by  an- 
other, they  cannot  even  touch  one  another. 


The  parts  of  a  compounded  word  maybe  cl 
egantly   divided  by  some   other  word  coming 
between  the  parts  ;  as  rem  vero  publicum  amls- 
simus. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  You  will  do  me  a  very  great  favor ^  if  you  will  \(\\e  me 
an  opportunity  of  showing  the  high  regard,  I  entertain  for  you ; 
as  I  wish,  by  every  means  in  my  power,  to  satiyfy  our  love  and 
friendship. 

*2.  To  a  reliance  on  the  divine  goodness,  this  roust  be  ad- 
ded, that  we  should  acquiesce  in  the  divine  will,  and  bear  with 
patience  whatev^  accidents  may  befal  us,  ichattoevrr  they 
may  appear  to  human  nature. 

3.  Since  you  postpone  all  things  to  silver. 


Nullus  and  nunquam  are  elegantly  divided, 
principally  when  coming  with  the  conjunctions 
et^  nee  or  neque ;  as, 

9 


90 

Any  c\il  catl  nf  re/  lmj)ptn  lo  a  gooJ  m 
Arc  cjiim  tnujuam  bono  quidquam   /'  '^'* 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  There  is  nothing  which  I  desire  more  than  to  speak  to 
,  ou  :  for  I  have  no  leisure  to  write  lo  you,  and  no  messenger 
t* ver  comes  near  me. 

*2.  I  confess  that  iIr*  ronsciousncss  of  v'l^j^ht  inuniious  is  tliC 
greatest  comfort  in  any  accident  that  niay  befal  us,  ajid  tliat 
there  is  jio  greater  evil  than  the  persuasion  that  it  is  our  (»wn 
fault. 


When  two  words  are  joined  together  b}^  a  con- 
junction, some  other  word,  having  a  reference  to 
them,  will  be  elegantly  placed  between  tliem;  as, 
A  rural  and  rustic  voice  delights  some  men : 
Rustica  vox  et  agrestis  quosdam  delcctat. 

EXAMPLES. 

1 .  See  the  levity  and  the  inconstancy  of  men. 

2.  O  Brutus,  we  are  attempting  quite  a  cliJicuU  and  arduous 
4.ask  ;  but  nothing  is  difficult  to  a  lover ;  and  1  love  and   have 

tlways  loved  your  genius,  your  pursuits,  and  your  principks. 


Anie^  priiis^  postj  and  poste(\  arc  elegantly  sep- 
irated  from  quom ;  as, 

I  shall  sooner  fiTrgct  my  own  name,  than  the 
benefits  which  you  have  conferred  upon  me : 

Nomcn  meum  prius  ohliviscar^  quum  qua;  apud 
me  collociisti  henejicia. 


EXAMPLES. 


1.  Vou  know,  that  at  a  certain  time  I  went  to  Metapontus 
vilb  you,  and  that/nerer  retired  to  my  host  before  I  had 


?^er.  the  very  place  and  tii^ 
his  Hie. 


\vllt'l>'    I     S   lli.I''Ul  .1-5 


2.  I  shall  answer,  that  Caesar,  if  I  know  him  well,  will  con- 
cult  your  honour,  b.fore  his  own  interest. 

3.  It  becomes  a  wise  man  fo  fry  every  thing  by  words  and 
persuasion,  6r/Io»re  h<^  \yA<  n<n.n>;.'  t.^nrm^. 


Qm<m  plarod  hct\v(\^n  two  words,  may  be 
mai  e  elegantly  put  before  the  eompai'ativc ;  as 
Amciiia  quam  pccvnia  delectat  ampiws :  Except 
when  it  comes  with  mac:is  and  potius,  which  it 
should  immediately  follow. 

EXAMPLES. 

*1.  It  is  very  unpleasant  for  a  prudent  man  to  ask  a  g^^eat 
favor  of  one,  whom  he  thinks  he  has  obliged,  for  fear  of  ap- 
pearing to  demand,  leather  than  to  beg,  and  to  place  it  to  the 
account  of  a  recompense,  rather  than  of  a  favor. 

2.  Hence  friendship  seems  to  originate  from  nature,  ratlier 
than  from  weakness. 

3.  More  people  study  to  obtain  riches  than  virtue. 

4.  Good  men  are  always  more  suspected  by  tyrants  than 
bad  men  :  for  virtue  is  always  very  formidable  to  them. 

5.  Though  Themistocles  is  justly  celebrated,  and  his  name 
more  illustrious  than  Solon's,  yet  virtue  and  wisdom,  though 
not  dazzling,  are  more  beneficial  to  mankind. 

G.  For  guilt  in  point  of  time,  goes  before  punishment,  (^pri- 
or) and  to  be  reformed  grows  out  of,  or,  is  posterior  to  abuses. 
(Peccai^e,) 


When  tiie  English  word  the  other,  or  another^ 
is  rendered  by  a  repetition  of  the  same  substan- 
tive, to  v/bi^h  it  refers,  or  two  words  occiu*  in  the 


mic  sentence,  one  of  which  is  derived  from  the 
>ther,  they  must  closely  follow  one  another;  as, 

One  love  is  expelled  by  anothn\  as  one  spike 
i<  removed  by  the  other: 

jimore  amor^  utchtvusclavo^  tnidhur. 

As  also  tw  o  words  ha\  in;;  u  contrary  signiii- 
*  acion,  if  they  are  opposed  to  each  other,  give 
i;reater  elegance  to  the  sentence,  if  no  other  word 
intervenes  between  them,  as  thus  their  opposi- 
lion  becomes  more  evident ;  as, 

They,  who  wish  to  appear  learned  in  the  sight 
of  fools  J  appear /bo/6  in  the  sight  of  the  learned. 

Qui  stultis  eruditi  videri  volunty  stulti  eriiditis 
ridentur, 

EXAMPLES. 

1 .  One  wedge  drives  in  tlie  other. 

2.  One  hand  washes  the  other, 

3.  The  rashness  of  the  son  verified  the  wise  saying  of  the 
father. 

4.  For  how  is  it,  that  old  age  creeps  upon  youth,  faster  than 
7jouth  on  childhood  ? 

5.  Friends  tdike  the  greatest  delight  in  the  society  of  friends. 

6.  That  is  called  a  civic  crown  which  a  citizen  presents  to 
the  citizen^  by  whom  he  has  been  preserved,  as  a  pledge  of  his 
safety  and  of  the  preservation  of  his  life. 

7.  You  covet  money  and  reject  virtue. 

8.  Despair  and  necessity  render  even  the  timid  braise. 

9.  Socrates  used  to  exhort  young  raen  to  view  themselves  of- 
ten in  a  glass,  that,  if  tliey  were  handsome,  they  niiaht  render 
themselves  worthy  of  tiiat  beauty,  and  '\(  deformed,  they  miL'hi 
skreen  and  qualify  that  deformity  by  learning. 

10.  It  was  '  ill  his  pride  or  his  wealth,  that  the  nolle 
claimed  a  sujm  ^  over  XhQ  ig^noblr^hui  in  his  good  name 
^d  brave  exploits. 


93 

11.  In  my  ahfiencCj  I  cherished  andeiijo3^ed  the  recoUeciion 
of  my  absent  friend,  iu  the  same  manner  as  in  his  jjrcscnre  I 
had  been  accustomed  to  enjoy  his  familiar  converse,  fprvesvnn 
prccsentis,) 

12.  You  went  poor  into  your  province,  you  returned  rich  to 
Rome. 


When,  for  the  sake  of  brevity  and  elegance,  aliuSj 
alius^  or  diversi,  diversi,  each  in  their  proper  ca- 
ses, are  used  for  one  man  thisj  and  another  man 
that ;  different  people  this ;  and  different  people 
that ;  as,  one  man  says  this,  another  that,  Aims 
aliud  dicit;  they  must  closely  follow  each  other. 
And  so,  alius  alid,  or  aUorsum^  for  one  man  to 
one  place ^  another  to  a  different  place ;  and  alius^ 
aliunde,  for  one  man  on  this  side,  the  other  on  that 
side. 


EXAMPLES. 

*1.  Nor  indeed  did  he  think  that  he  could  find  in  one  bod3'' 
all  the  qualities  which  he  sought  to  constitute  beauty  ;  because 
there  is  nothing  in  its  simple  and  individual  kind,  which  nature 
has  polished  and  made  perfect  in  every  part;  therefore,  as  ii 
she  was  not  likely  to  find  what  to  bestow  on  the  rest,  if  she 
granted  every  thing  to  one,  s\e  dispensed  one  advantage  to  owe, 
and  another  to  another,  with  the  mixture  of  some  disadvan- 
tage. 

2.  One  patron  has  defended  my  cause  with  much  more  zeal 
than  the  other, 

3.  They  were  disputing  across  the  river,  one  on  this  side, 
the  other  on  that  side. 

4.  When  war  was  declared,  the  king  sent  one  .army  to  one 
r^acc.  and  another  to  another,  hoping  that  he  would  surprize 

9* 


04 

tiie  enemy,  and  defeat  their  design^: ;  but  ?^^  one  historian  i  j- 
lates  ofte  t/fiuir,  another  anoikcr^  it  is  difl'icult  to  delennini 
wiiat  credit  is  to  be  given  to  them. 


Alius,  aliusy  signifying  so7nej  and  other^  will 
be  separated,  and  if  we  speak  of  only  two,  the 
adjective  alter  will  be  used,  instead  of  alius. 


EXAMPLES. 


1.  Some  men  we  see,  who  excel  in  swiftness  for  the  course, 
and  others  in  strength  and  vigor  for  wrestling. 

2.  One  of  whom  has  betrayed  the  troop,  and  the  other  h<« 
sold  them. 

The  pronoun  qnisque  is  generally  placed  after 
suns,  sibi,  se,  and  when  it  is  joined  to  superla- 
tives and  comparatives,  as  it  were  a  substantive 
with  its  adjective,  or  coming  with  numeral  and 
cardinal  nouns,  it  should  always  be  placed  after 
them  ;  as, 

Suum  cuique  ptilchrmn  est. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  Every  man  loves  his  own  verses  best. 

2.  Such  is  the  alarming  situation  of  affairs,  that  evcrf/  Tnan 
dreads  his  own  destiny. 

3.  Every  seventh  day  is  dedicated  to  sacred  purposes. 

4.  Every  good  scholar  thinks  so.     (  Optimus.) 

♦j  Do  not  imagine,  as  you  often  read  in  fables,  that  those, 
who  have  been  guilty  of  impiety  or  wickedness,  arc  terrified 
and  tormented  by  the  burning  torches  of  the  furies.  Every 
man^s  own  wicked  fraud,  and  consequent  terror  are  his  chief 


95 

tormentors;  every  inarvs  own  iniquity  Ijarrasscs  and  drivr- 
him  to  madness;  his  own  wicked  thoughts  and  remorse  of  con- 
science terrify  him.  These  are  the  constant  and  domestic  fu- 
ries that  attend  the  wicked  !  which  night  and  day  inflict  on  the 
polkited  ofispring  the  punishments  due  to  the  crimes  of  the  pa- 
rents ! 

6.   The  more  virtuovs  a  man  is,   with  more  difficulty  is  he 
led  to  suspect  others  of  being  dishonest. 

7.,  The  more  learned  any  one  is,  the  greater  pains  he  takes 
in  teaching. 


On  the  contrary,  the  possessive  pronouns 
meiis^  simsy  ^^c.  are  generally  placed  after  their 
substantives,  as  pater  mens ;  except  when  an  ad- 
jective or  a  preposition  is  added  to  the  substan- 
tive, and  then  the  possessive  is  usually  placed 
first. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  Onr  love  towards  you  is  very  conspicuous. 

2.  I  only  beg  of  you,  that  you  will  substitute  me  in  the  place 
of  Hirtius,  both  on  account  of  your  love  for  me,  and  tny  res- 
pect for  you.  (Though,  as  Quintilian  remarks,  there  is  no 
great  certainty  in  these  exceptions,  as  they  depend  wholly  up- 
on the  perspicuity  and  harmony  of  the  sentence.) 


Observe,  likewise,  that  a  pronoun  primitive  is 
elegantly  placed  between  the  pronoun  posses- 
sive, and  the  substantive,  witli  which  it  agrees ; 
as, 

Your  labor  is  profitable  to  me. 

Tuus  mihi  labor  prodesL 

EXAMPLES, 

1.  Owr  studies  delight  Am  greatly. 


96 

2.  Your  letters  were  brought  mc  at  a  time  when  I  could  not 
uit  receive  the  greatest  comfort  from  them  :  for  your  imimacy 

IS  by  no  means  impleasing  to  me. 

3.  Some  news  have  been  brought,  which  affected  me  more 
on  i/our  account,  tlian  on  mme. 


Thougli  adjectives  should,  in  general,  be  pla- 
ced before  their  substantives,  yet  comparatives 
and  superlatives,  nouns  of  number,  these  adjec- 
tives, omnis^  nullus^  alienum^  aliud,  alterum^ 
utrumquej  solum^  ullum^  tahj  quodvisy  quodlihety 
totitm,  singula^  costera,  reliqua,  mxilta^  are  more 
elegantly  placed  after  their  substantives. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  But  we  are  impelled  to  learn,  hy  a  fairer  Aope,  and 
greater  rewards, 

2.  He  was  invested  with  the  raoBi  honorable  offices  and  (he 
most  important  employments* 

3.  All  the  merit  of  virtue  consists  in  action ;  in  which,  how- 
ever, there  is  often  some  intermission. 

4.  He  has  comprised  in  one  book  the  history  of  sere/i  /ii/ti- 
dred  years. 

5.  He  has  already  reigned  twenty-three  years  since  that 
time. 

6.  We  often  see,  that  shame  gets  the  better  of  those,  whom 
no  reason  could  overcome. 

7.  The  management  of  other  people^s  lousiness  is  very  diffi- 
cult, and  often  thankless. 


Nouns  of  dignity,  profession,  praise,  con- 
tempt, are  generally  placed  before  the  proper 
nsunes,  to  which  they  belong. 


97 

EXAMPLES 

i .  Vou  see  beibie  your  eyes  Catiline  that  mo9t  audacioun 
man, 

2.  Lucius  Colta,  a  rdan  of  excellent  understanding  and  ex- 
emplar i^  prudence, 

S.  We  are  here  warring  against  Anthony  our  colleague^  the 
^nost  infamous  of  all  gladiators. 


Observe  that  the  proper  name  agrees  more  el- 
egantly by  a[)position  with  the  person  or  person- 
al pronoun,  than  with  the  common  name ;  a?, 
Whose  name  is  lulus,  Ciii  nomen  hdo. 


EXAMPLES. 


Ataulphiis,  after  the  birth  of  a  son,  to  whom  he  gave  the 
name  of  Theodosius,  seemed  to  feel  a  greater  regard  for  the 
Romans. 


If  there  are  several  pronouns  in  a  sentence, 
they  are  elegantly  placed  together,  if  it  can  be 
done  without  causing  any  confusion  or  ambigu- 
ty  to  the  sense ;  and,  indeed,  the  best  writers, 
in  order  to  give  more  force  and  energy,  either 
to  a  primitive  or  a  demonstrative  pronoun,  join 
several  of  them  to  the  very  same  substantive ; 
as, 

I  come  from  your  brother  ;  he  connnends  him- 
self  to  you, 

Venio  ufratre  tuo^  is  se  tibi  commcndat 


EXAMPLES. 


1 .  Yott,  that  i^ery  same  wretch,  who  have  threatened  de- 
struction to  whole  cities  and  countries. 


Voii  have  done  so  Will,  that  no  onr  tliijiks  ji;/;?«c/f  well 
comnu  nded  to  i/ou,  without  sorae  h.'tters  of  mine, 

3.  luit  if  tills  is  cflected,  not  only  by  nature  and  exercise. 
It  is  also  obtained  by  some  kind  of  artifice,  it  does  not  seem 

improper  to  examine  what  ihosc  men  say,  who  have  left  us 
fotne  rules  concerning  this  business. 

4.  But  the  first  great  rule  of  justice,  is,  that  no  onc^  witlioul 
being  attacked  by  an  unprovoked  injury,  should  commit  vio^ 
''Mice  against  «>?^  one. 


There  is  a  peculiar  elegance  in  the  structure 
of  a  sentence,  when  the  relative  of  one  clause  can 
be  immediately  followed  by  the  relative  of  the 
subsequent  clause,  if  it  is  in  a  different  case  from 
the  former:  as,  I  admire  their  folly  icAo  arrogate 
to  themselves  alone  thqse  divine  arts,  icliich 
they  ought  not  even  to  meddle  with  :  Eomm 
stultitiam  miror^  qui^  quas  ne  attingere  quidem  de- 
bebantj  has  divinas  artes  sihi  solis  arrogant. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  Some  philosophers  of  our  age  are  also  guilty  of  this  er- 
ror, who  e^^press  in  words  far  removed  from  common  usage, 
new,  and  often  inelegantly  coined  by  themselves,  and  with  an 
affectation  of  too  great  subtility,  those  things  tchich  they  might 
deliver  in  popular  and  perspicuous  languasfe. 

2.  I  have  seen  those,  who  would  exhort  their  scholars  to  the 
irsuit  <»f  learning,  in  tlie  very  same  words  \n  which  Alexander 

the  Great  would  encourage  his  men  to  fight  bravely  ;  and  I 
have  seen  those  who,  being  about  to  declaim  against  rude  des- 
pisers  of  the  gentle  Muses,  would  steal  Cicero's  invectives 
afraiii^t  Catiline. 


If  we  wish  to  add  some  circumstance  to  the 


subject  oi*  which  \ve  are  speaking,  or  to  gaii 
more  attention  to  it,  then  we  may  add  one  of  the 
demonstrative  pronouns,  is,  idem,  ^-c.  with  the 
conjunction  et  or  que,  and  thus  form  an  addi- 
tional member  of  the  sentence  ;  as, 

He  wore  a  garment  which  came  down  to  his 
ankles,  mcaii  and  dirty  : 

Veste  erat   indutus   talari,  et   ed  tetrd,  ct  sor- 
didd. 

EXAMPLES. 

1 .  I  have  a  son,  an  only  one, 

2.  Pansa,  tlie  Consul,  did  not  blush  to  declaim. 

3.  Alexander  defeated  Darius  with  his  immense  army,  and 
that  when  a  young  man. 

4.  I  have  only  received  one  letter  from  you,  and  that  a  very 
bhort  one. 

5.  This  sort  ol' discourses,  maintained  and  supj3orted  by  the 
autliority  of  old,  and  at  the  same  time  illustrious  men,  seems,  I 
know  not  how,  to  have  more  weight  and  dignity. 

6.  I  was  certainly  out  of  my  senses  to  endeavour  to  enter  jr.- 
to  a  contest  with  an  academician,  and  rhetorician  too. 


The  pronouns  ille,  iste,  ^-c.  are  also  added, 
w  ith  the  word  quidem,  when  one  quality  is  to  hv. 
granted  and  the  other  denied  on  the  same  sub- 
ject ;  as, 

Philosophers  not  bad  indeed,  but  not  ingen- 
ious enough  : 

Phdosophi  minimi'  mali  illi  quidem,  sed  non  sa- 
tis acnti. 


100 

I.  V  \r:Pi  V  V 

1.  \V  o  niu.M  iL-e  me  grcuu ;r  tMUU'avoiii>,  lucause  iiicUij  i^Miu 
books  are  said  to  be  written  alrecndy  by  men  vert/  good  and 
virtuous  indeed,  but  not  learned  enough. 

2.  I  have  also  added  Cicero's  Treatise  on  Friendship,  and 
that  on  Old  Age,  to  whic  h  I  have  subjoined  a  few  annotations, 
short  indeed,  but  if  I  mistake  not,  not  inapphcable. 

♦3.  That  commonwealth  will  always  flourish  whicli  often 
produces  noble  and  virtuous  men,  who  will  not  by  inactive  and 
ignoble  lives,  disgrace  the  fair  fame  of  their  ancestors,  but  who, 
in  the  pursuit  of  glory,  are  animated  with  the  noblest  zeal,  by 
representing  to  themselves  the  virtues  of  their  forefathers,  dead 
indeed  to  the  eyes  of  men,  but  always  living  in  the  memory  of 
the  good. 

4.  This  is  not  at  all  approved  by  your  friends,  veri/  good 
and  honest  men  indeed,  but  not  at  all  conversant  in  public  a* 
lairs. 


The  pronoun  primitive  is  elegantly  j)laced  af- 
ter the  infinitive,  even  when  nsed  as  the  aceusa- 
tive  that  should  {>o  before  it ;  and  after  adjec- 
tives and  participles,  to  which  it  serves  as  a  sub- 
stantive ;  as, 

You  think  that  you  are  slighted^  because  I 
write  not  again : 

Contcmni  te  putas^  quad  nan  rescribam. 


EXAMPLES. 


1.  They  suffer  themselves  to  be  burned  with  heat  upon  the 
mountains. 

2.  Struck  with  astonishment  at  the  ill  treatment  of  other*;, 
'hpy  suffer  themselves  to  be  bowed  down  and  quite  oppressed. 


14)1 


3.  €^to  writes  that  armies  have  oi'ten  goiiC  wdn  iuiiciiiy  te 
places  whence  tliey  never  hoped  to  return. 


When  a  verb  governs  several  nouns,  one  noun 
is  elegantly  placed  before,  and  the  other,  e^pe- 
dally  if  it  consists  of  many  syllables,  is  placed 
after  the  verb ;  as, 

Virtue  brings  praise  and  dignity : 

Virtus  laudem  offert  ac  dignitatem. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  They  can  neither  exercise  justice,  nor  Jricndship. 

2.  Though  riches  procure  many  comforts  of  life,  yet,  if  a 
man  is  too  eager  in  the  pursuit  of  his  interests,  he  cannot  bui 
bring  upon  himself  cares  and  anociciies, 

3.  He  was  so  conversant  in  the  art  of  war,  that  I)y  his 
skill  and  stratagems,  he  completely  deceived  tlie  general  and 
his  army. 


The  pronoun  ipse  is  more  elegant  in  the  nom- 
inative, though  the  primitive  pronoun,  to  uliicU 
it  is  joined,   be  the  case  of  the  verb ;  that  is. 
when  the  primitive  pronoun  may  in  its  apjilicr* 
tion,  be  referred  to  the  nominative  case:  r! 

He  injured  himself:  Sihi  ipse  nociiit. 


EX\3IPLE3. 


1 .  In  this,  I  reproacli  myself,     (I  myself  reproach  myself.) 

2.  The  wise  man,  who  neither  profits  himself  nor  others  by 
lijs  wisdom,  is  wise  to  no  purpose. 

3.  He  has  acquired  to  himself  very  great  glory. 

10 


102 

4.  They  have  been  able  of  the^naelces  to  execute  nolliing 
with  vigor  and  resolution  without  Sylla. 


Prepositions,  as  the  word  implies,  should  come 
before  their  case  ;  but  they  are  sometimes  very 
elegantly  separated  from  it  by  a  genitive  case  ; 
as, 

The  river  Hypanis  flows  into  Pontus  on  the 
side  of  Europe : 

Hypanis  fluvias  ah  Europe^  parte  in  Pontum 
infiuit. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  The  fust  object  of  moral  beauty,  which  consists  in  the 
knowledge  of  truth,  greatly  concerns  human  nature ;  for  we  are 
all  impelled  and  insensibly  led  to  the  desire  of  knowledge  and 
learning, 

2.  But  most  men  are  generally  brought  to  forget  justice, 
when  they  have  fallen  into  the  desire  of  power ^  Jionors  and 
glory. 

3.  Domitian  would  sometimes  aim  his  arrows  with  so  much 
skill  and  certainty  at  the  hand  of  a  hoy,  loho  stood  at  a  dis' 
tanre,  and  who  held  it  stretched,  out  as  a  ?narJc,  that  they  pass- 
ed through  the  intervals  of  the  fingers,  without  doing  any  injury 
to  the  child. 


Other  words  liaviiig  an  immediate  relation  to 
the  adjective  and  substantive,  especially  a  geni- 
tive case ;  and  the  prepositions  erga,  in^  adver- 
siiSj  ^c.  are  elegantly  introduced  between  them, 
the  adjective  beitig  generally  placed  first:  as, 

The  lasting  remembrance  of  your  benefits  to- 
wards your  country  w  ill  remain  :  Sempiterna  tu- 


103 

oriim  erga  pairiam  henejiciorum  memoi  ta    tigc- 
bit. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  Nature,  in  the  beginning,  gave  this  instinct  to  evcri/  kind 
of  animalsj  to  defend  themseKes,  their  lives  and  bodies,  and 
to  decline  those  things  which  might  seem  prejudicial  to  them ; 
but  to  seek  and  |)rocure  every  thins,  which  is  necessary  to 
their  subsistence,  as  food,  shelter,  and  other  things  of  the  same 
kind. 

2.  For  what  need  is  there  of  long  declamations  in  the  Sen- 
atCy  when  good  men  are  so  soon  agreed  ?  What  need  is  there 
o(  frequent  assemblies  of  the  people^  when  not  the  ignorant  and 
the  many,  but  only  one  man,  and  he  too  endued  with  consum- 
mate wisdom,  deliberates  on  the  affairs  of  the  commonwealth? 

3.  Happy  is  the  man  indeed,  whose  safety  afifords  not^ea^- 
erjoy  to  himself  than  to  all  mankind. 

4.  They  are  and  will  be  lasting  witnesses  of  your  favors  to- 
wards me,  and  of  my  affection. 


The  genitive  is  elegantly  put  before  the  noun 
that  governs  it,  with  one  or  more  words  between 
them ;  except  when  the  genitive  is  governed  by 
a  neuter  adjective,  in  which  case  it  must  be 
placed  after  it ;  as. 

Let  us  try  the  honor  of  those  friends  whom  you 
love  so  much  : 

Amicorum  qnos  adeb  diligisfidem  spedemus. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  You  will  mention  the  perfidy ,  the  ariificeSy  and  the 
treachery  of  several  persons  toicards  vs. 

2.  This  reputation  of  wisdom,  ichich  Fannius  made  men* 
tion  of  just  now  J  does  not  please  me  so  much. 

3.  Friendship  and  the  union  of  the  heart  have  much  more 
sioeetne^s. 


10^ 


Demonstrative  pronouns   are   also  elegamlv 
separated  from  their  substantives. 


EXAMPLES. 


1.  A  glorious  action  and  worthy  Hercitles  himself,  ly  whom 
I  have  ^worn. 

2.  I  possess  a  soul  unawecl  by  dangers,  and  I  think  that  hon- 
or to  ichich  you  aspire,  gloriously  purchased  with  life  itself. 


Two  verbs,  of  which  one  is  governed  by  the 
other,  ai'e  elegantly  separated. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  What  can  be  more  disgraceful,  than  for  a  wise  man  to 
/(kshion  the  conduct  of  his  life  according  to  the  language  of  the 
ignorant  ?  Now,  v/hat  is  understood  by  wise  and  honorable  ? 
Certainly  nothing  but  what  may  justly  he  commended  on  its 
oxen  account.  For  if  it  is  only  that,  which  regards  the  gratifi- 
cation of  the  senses,  what  honor  is  that  which  may  he  derived 
even  from  the  shambles  ? 

2.  But  since,  in  affording  assistance  to  men,  a  regard  is 
toont  to  he  paid  to  their  merits  or  their  fortune,  it  may  be  said, 
and  indeed  it  is  the  common  language  of  mankind,  that,  in  con- 
ferring their  kindnesses,  they  observe  the  disposition  and  man*- 
ners,  and  not  the  fortune,  of  men. 


Prepositions  are  genv?rally  i)laced  after  the 
pronoun  relative,  as  qiiam  circa,  qiicmpents,  quos 
inter,  hiinc  jaxta,  ^^c,  and  it  must  be  needless 
to  observe,  that  terns  is  alwc'iys  placed  after  its 
case,  and  cum  after  the  ablatives  vie,  te,  se,  nobis, 
vobis,  and  after  quo,  qm,  qiiibus. 

To  avoid  ambiguity,  we  often  prefix  inclc,  to 
the  proposition  a  or  ab,  when  it  is  meant  to  de- 


105 


CICJ 


note  the  beginning  of  any  period  of  time.  Tii 
we  say,  inde  ab  adolescentid  factum,  which  other- 
wise might  be  understood  to  be  ejected  by 
voiith. 


In  mentioning  the  saying  of  any  one,  the  verbs 
inquam  and  aio  are  always  placed  after  one  or 
two  words  of  the  saying  recited ;  and  sometimes 
at  the  very  end :  as, 

When  some  one  meanly  born  told  Ltclius  tliat 
he  was  unworthy  of  his  ancestors,  he  said,  but. 
you  indeed  are  worthy  of  yours  : 

LceUus,  quandb  ei  quidam  malo  genere  naius 
dicerct,  indignum  esse  suis  majorihns :  ct  hcirvJ^ 
inquit,  Ui  iuis  dignus. 

EXA3IPLES. 

1.  What  then  does  Chi-jsippiis  niecin  ?  Strength  of  mind, 
says  he  J  is  the  science  of  suffering  well. 

2.  Ennius  pleases  me,  someone  will  say  ^  because  he  never 
deviates  from  the  common  accepUUion  of  words,  and  Facuvius 
pleases  me,  another  man  will  say. 

3.  When  some  one  asked  Diogines  at  wliRt  hour  a  man 
ougiit  to  dine ;  if  he  is  rich,  he  said^  when  he  will :  if  he  is 
poor,  when  he  can. 

4.  Accins  said,  there  are  many  unjust  and  faithless  men  in 
a  kingdom,  and  icw  good  men. 


As  the  style  acquires  pecidiar  elegance  from 
the  order  and  arrangement  of  words,  so  it  must 
be  observed  that  variety  itself  gives  mjcat  beauty 
to  sentences.  Nihil  enim  tarn  vitiomm  est,  vt  ait 
Ciceio,  quam  &i  dicendi  genus  scnircr  ,:^t  idem. 

10^^ 


i'iius:  As  medicine  is  the  art  of  healthy  pilolcijcci 
i>i^  navigation^  so  prudence  is  the  art  of  living  : 

Ut  medicina  valetudinis,  navigationis  guberna- 
tio^  sic  vitrndi  ars  est  prudcntla. 

One  clause  ends  with  the  genitive,  and  th( 
next  begins  with  it,  to  give  greater  variety  to  thi 
sentence.  This  varied  orcler  should  in  general 
l)e  observed  in  the  enumeration  of  several  par- 
ticulars, 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  Friendship  is  a  real  jj7ea«wre  in  prosperity:  a  rcsourct 
ill  adversity :  quietness  in  private  Hfe,     (In  mediis.j 

2.  These  are  the  pleasing  effects  of  philosopliy :  it  pour/^ 
halm  into  our  minds,  it  removes  all  imaginary  anxieties,  it  de- 
/.'Versus  from  inordinate  desires,  and  dispels  every  alarm. 

S.  I  have  read  in  the  natural  liistory  of  Fliny,  that  there  are 
certain  families  of  men  in  Africa,  which  iiave  the  power  of  fas- 
cinating hy  the  voice;  and  if  any  should  too  immoderately 
praise  their  stately  trees,  their  5/w////7«'/ir/rre&7,v, their  beautiful 
children,  their^//e  horses,  and  their  herds  of  the  most  excellent 
breed,  all  these  would  die  immediately. 


TTlIE  arrangement  of  words  depends  also  u|X)n 
our  ideas  :  the  order  and  succession  of  wliich 
being  closely  observed,  w  ill  give  greater  perspi- 
cuity and  elegance  to  the  style :  the  neglect  of 
this  method  in  modern  languages,  and  especially 
ill  llie  Ki^sh,  is  apt  to  lead  the  scholar  into  er- 
i  or.  WB^irises  first,  or  is  supposed  upon  ma- 
uue  corisiOTTation,  to  arise  first,  in  the  natural 


107 

order  of  our  thoughts,  should  as  much  as  possi- 
ble be  placed  first  in  the  sentence ;  except  har- 
mony, or  a  climax,  which,  in  order  to  raise  the 
attention,  throws  back  the  most  cnyphatical 
words,  should  require  the  contrary.  The  natu- 
ral order  of  the  ideas  may  be  partly  understood 
from  this,  that  we  say,  men  and  women ^  (/rt^and 
nighty  rising  and  sittings  rather  than  the  reverse 
of  these.  To  illustrate  this  more  fully  :  Cicero, 
in  his  oration  against  Verres,  has  this  passage  : 
Annius,  a  Roman  Knight,  says,  that  a  Roman  cit- 
izen teas  beheaded ;  he  does  not  say,  AnninSj 
Eqnes  Romanus,  dicit  civem  Romanum  sccuri 
j)ercussum  esse  ;  but,  as  a\  hat  stamped  the  deed 
with  peculiar  indiguit}^,  was  the  idea  that  it  was 
a  Roman  citizen,  who  was  so  inhumanly  treat- 
ed, the  Orator  begins  by  these  emphatical  words  : 
Civem  Romannm,  securi  esse  percussum,  ^c. — 
Thus  the  inattention  of  the  English  to  tliese  nice 
distinctions  would  prevent  the  scholar,  if  he  ad- 
hered too  closely  to  it,  from  giving  the  passage 
all  the  force  and  elegance,  of  which  it  is  capa- 
ble. The  same  citizen,  at  the  j)lace  of  execu- 
tion, at  Messana,  exclaims,  Civis  Romanus  sum, 
not  siim  Civis  Romanus. 

In  the  Latin  language,  then,  the  arrangement 
most  commonly  observed,  is,  to  place  first  in  the 
sentence,  that  word  which  ex})resses  the  })rinci- 
pal  object  of  the  discourse,  together  with  its  cir- 
cumstances ;  and  afterwards,  the  person,  or  the 
thing  that  acts  upon  it.  This  order,  besides  the 
natural  succession  of  the  ideas,  gratifies  more 
the  rapidity  of  the  imagination,  which  naturally 


103 

runs  first  to  tliat  wliicli  is  its  chief  object ;  and 
having  once  named  it,  carries  it  in  view  through 
liic  rest  of  the  sentence.  Thus  in  these  lines  of 
Horace : 

Jifstum  et  tenacem  prGpositi  viritm, 
Non  civium  ardor  prava  jubcntiunij 
Non  vidtiis  instaiitis  tyrannic 
Mente  quatit  solidd. 
Here  the  words  are  arranged   with  a  much 
greater  regard  to  the  figure  which  tlic  several 
objects  make  in  the  fancy,  than  the  construction 
of  the   English  sentence  would   admit ;  whicli 
would  require  the  "  Justum  et  tenacem  propositi 
virum,'^  though  undoubtedly  the  capital  object  in 
the  sentence  to  be  thrown  into  the  last  place. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  We  make  most  use  of  the  direciion  of  ilie  soul,  and  of 
the  service  of  the  hody» 

2.  It  is  impossible  for  me  to  pass  over  in  silence,  sucli  re- 
jfrTcahlc  mildness,  such  singular  and  tinheard-af  clemency , 

and  such  unusual  moderation,  in  tiie  exercise  of  supreme  power. 

3.  For,  O  my  clearest  brother,  tliou  liast  lost  with  thy  life, 
not  a  ki?igdo77iy  but  banishment,  poverty,  and  nil  those  affile- 
lions  which  noto  overwhelm  me, 

4.  He  occupies  with  his  armies  your  iwry  kingdom  :  he 
keeps  me  closely  besieged  tvhoin  you  iiave  appointed  governor 
<»f  that  province  ;  and  my  dangers  prove  how  little  he  valued 
the  words  of  your  ambassadors. 


The  person,  to  which  the  nominative  refers, 

as  the  object  of  its  agency,  that  is^  as  the  case  of 

the  verb,  is  in  the  nature  of  the  thoughts,  before 

the  verb  itself,  and  therefore  should  be  so  in  the 

tructure  of  the  sentence. 


109 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  IMy  brother  promised  me,  that  he  would  send  vie  some 
books. 

*2.  But  he  iustructed  by  various  means  to  the  perpetration 
of  the  vilest  practices,  the  youth  ichom^  as  we  have  seen  be- 
Jore,  he  had  so  artfully  inveigled  into  all  his  purposes ;  from 
these  he  could  at  pleasure  command  loretchcs,  who  would  not 
i^cruple  either  to  give  false  evidence,  or  to  forge  a  will ;  in 
whose  esteem,  honour,  fortune  or  dangers,  were  cheap  and  in- 
significant. 

3.  1  know  that  the  whole  weight  of  this  difficult  and  dan- 
gerous task  will  be  imposed  on  you ;  for  the  whole  people 
have  fixed  their  eyes  on  you,  they  regard  you  as  their  protector 
and  guardian. 

The  same  may  be  said  of  a  thing,  or  word, 
which  comes  in  the  place  of  the  person  ;  as 

1.  Your  father  has  forgiven  yowr  crimes, 

*2.  You  basely  flattered  their  supine  indifference  by  which 
the  state-was  nearly  brought  to  the  brink  of  ruin  ;  and  turned 
into  ridicule  our  firmness  of  mind,  which  resolutely  stemmed 
the  opposing  dangers. 

The  reason  for  which  a  thing  is  done,  behig 
in  the  order  of  the  ideas  thouglit  of  before  the 
^erb,  should  be  placed  before  it. 

EXAMPLES. 

1 .  I  beseech  you  to  succour  my  misery,  in  consideration  of 
our  former  friendship, 

2.  But  you  had  presented  him  with  a  golden  crown,  on  ac- 
count of  his  great  virtue, 

3.  Again  and  again,  most  earnestly  do  I  entreat  you  on  the 
score  of  our  strict  intimacy ^  and  your  own  distinguished  be^ 
uevokn<e. 


ilO 


4.  or  wiiicli  friends  you  have  a  great  number,  otcing  to 
ur  very  great  and  exemplary  virtues. 


jur 


Let  it  not,  however,  be  understood  that  these 
words,  to  which  we  assign  this  jirecedence,  arc 
always  to  be  in  the  very  beginning  of  a  sentence  ; 
for  generally  either  the  nominative  or  the  case  of 
the  verb,  or  some  other  words,  are  prefixed,  and 
then  these  words,  if  there  be  more  than  one 
clause  in  the  sentence,  from  the  first  periodical 
circuit,  or  transposition  ;  as  we  shall  show  more 
fully,  when  we  come  to  give  rules  for  the 
structure  of  a  period. 

Thus;  Caesar  said  that  he  would  receive  them 

into  his  friendship,  for  the  sake  of  the  jEdui :  we 

shall  say ;    Ccesar^  jEduoriim  causd^  sese^  eos   in 

fidem  recepturum  dixit ;   with  greater  elegance 

thanJEduorum  causa,  Ccesar....^ 


In  mentioning  several  things,  from  which  one 
is  excepted  or  particularized,  the  particles  denot- 
ing tlmt  exception  with  their  cases,  as  yrceteVj 
nisif  will  be  placed  before  the  others. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  I  jrrcatly  admire  your  benevolence  and  liberality,  besides 
your  other  virtues. 

2.  For  if  we  should  exiubit  to  your  view  the  whole  tissue  of 
this  man's  vices  and  iniquities,  except  this  foul  transartiojiy 
which  delicacy  obliL'^vs  me  to  pass  over  in  silence,  we  shall  not 
find  his  life  distinguished  by  one  single  trait,  that  can  retrieve 
his  name  from  eternal  disg^racc. 


Ill 

3.  I  beg  of  you,  that  you  would  send  rue  some  books,  ij 
not  all. 


The  ablative,  in  expressions  like  these,  is  more 
elegantly  placed  before  the  comparative. 

EXA3IPLES. 

1 .  Quicker  than  hope. 

2.  Longer  than  what  was  just. 

3.  More  sad  than  usual. 

4.  He  is  a  man  miick  more  ilhistnoits  in  peace,  than  in  war. 

5.  So  much  easier  is  it  to  accuse,  than  to  defend ;  to  inflict, 
than  to  cure,  a  wound. 


Adverbs  should  be  placed  before  the  verb,  as 
the  manner  or  degree,  in  which  the  nominative 
corresponds  with  its  verb  arises  fii-st  in  the  mind. 

EXAMPLES. 

1 .  lie  came  to  me  of  his  own  accord, 

2.  Cicero  has  written  excellently  well  on  that  subject. 
".  They  succeeded  very  ill  in  that  business. 


The  vocative  is  usually  thrown  back  ;  at  least 
after  several  words  of  the  sentence,  except  some 
sudden  emotion  of  the  mind  is  to  be  expressed  ; 
but,  in  order  to  avoid  ambiguity,  it  should  come 
immediately  after  some  word,  to  which  it  prop- 
erly belongs  ;  as, 
Your  uncle,  O  Brutus,  has  removed  this  doubt : 


112 

Qiiam  dubUationem  avunculus  iuus^  Brute j 


ustulit. 


EXAMPLES, 


1 .  It  has  long  been  a  matter  of  gi-eat  doubt  witli  me,  Brutus, 
wliether  it  were  more  difficult,  or  a  matter  of  grcal(?r  import- 
ance, to  refuse  you  at  once,  when  you  repeatedly  asked  me  the 
same  thing,  or  to  grant  you  your  request  at  once. — (Here  the 
vocative  coming  with  the  verb,  to  doubt,  which  must  be  the 
last  in  the  sentence,  will  be  equally  thrown  back.) 

2.  Ft  cannot  but  be  a  matter  of  astonishment  to  youj  my 
Lords,  that,  while  there  are  so  many  men  of  the  first  dignity 
and  eminence  sitting  here,  I  should  claim  the  preference  in  ris- 
ing to  address  you. 


The  verb  sum  has  a  pecuHar  elegance  in  the 
begmning  of  a  sentence,  or  after  negative  words, 
as  nultus,  nihil,  nemo,  and  after  comparatives 
and  superlatives  ;  words  of  many  syllables  ;  af- 
ter adjectives  and  verbals  in  dus. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  For  the  mind  is  divided  into  two  parts;  one  of  which  is 
a  partaker  of  reason,  the  other  is  destitute  of  it.  When  ihei.  - 
fore  it  is  enjoined  us,  that  we  should  command  ourselves ;  the 
injunction  is,  that  reason  should  serve  as  a  check  upou  temer- 
ity. For  there  is  something  in  the  minds  of  men,  by  nature, 
low,  abject  and  humble;  in  a  manner  ennervated,  languid  and 
infirm.     If  there  was  nothing  else  in  man,  nothing  could  be 

lore  deformed  than  man.  But  reason,  the  mistress  and  cm- 
press  of  all,  is  at  hand,  which  receiving  its  whole  support 
from  itself,  and  continually  making  progressive  advances,  be- 
comes at  last  a  perfect  beauty.  Now  the  great  care  of  man 
must  be,  that  this  reason  may  connnajid  that  part  of  the  mind, 
which  ought  to  obey. 

2.  For  there  is  no  misfortune,  which  does  not  seem  to 
threaten  us  all,  from  the  general  disorder,  which  prevaijs 
through  the  whole  world. 


3.  F'or,  if  toe  must  comply  with  the  desires  oi 
tiiey  must  no  longer  be  called  friendships,  but  real  conspi- 
racies. 

4.  It  is  D.  criminal  and  impious  custom,  to  dispute  again- 
tlie  gods,  whether  from  design  or  caprice. 


When  two  words  come  closely  together,  oiie 
of  which  is  a  monosyllable,  and  the  other  a  word 
of  many  syllables,  the  monosyllable  is  always 
placed  before  the  polysillable  :  as,  vir  darisshmis ; 
ars  pulcherriina  ;  me  amat^  5^c. 


Sentences  are  very  elegantly  closed  by  com- 
paratives and  superlatives,  as  indeed  by  any 
word,  and  chiefly  verbs,  of  many  syllables  :  as, 

Pares  cum  paribus,  veteri  proverbio,  facilUme 
COiigregantur, 

The  reason  that  long  words  should,  as  much 
as  possible,  close  a  complete  sentence,  is,  that  as 
the  voice  of  the  speaker  is  apt  to  become  remiss 
and  languid,  and  might  drop  one  syllable  in  tho 
pronunciation,  still  the  word  itself,  or  the  mean- 
ing of  the  word,  and  often  of  the  sentence  itself, 
resting  upon  a  sonorous  penultima,  may  not  es- 
cape the  ear  of  the  hearer.  Libenter  claudiiur 
ditroch/Eo,  or  a  double  trochee,  -u;-u/  as  com- 
probavit.  Though  this  applies  chiefly  to  speak- 
ing, yet  it  has  been  generally  ti'ansferred  into 
the  elegance  of  writing  Latin.  Another  reason 
why  the  verb  should  as  much  as  possible  close 
the  sentence,  is,  that,  as  the  force  of  the  idea 
lies  in  it,  it  may,  in  the  pause  that  is  necessarily 

11 


114 

made  bet^^ecn  each  sentence,  become  more  for- 
cibly impressed  upon  the  mind.  But  in  the  ar- 
rangement of  words,  care  must  be  taken  to 
avoid  the  too  frequent  recurrence  of  the  same 
termination  or  cadence,  as  it  has  been  observed 
')efore,  which  much  offend  the  ear:  as,  nullo 
.  imorc  nee  dolore. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  This  God  we  shall  truly  call  happy,  yours  very  lahoriom, 
or  whether  the  world  itself  is  God,  who  can  enjoy  less  tran- 
nility  than  without  the  intermission  of  one  moment  of  time  to 
turn  with  a  wonderful  rapidity  round  the  celestial  axis  ?  Now 
nothing  is  happy  but  what  enjoys  perfect  repose.  Or  whether 
there  be  some  God  in  the  world  itself,  which  rules,  governs, 
and  preserves  in  their  due  order  the  course  of  the  stars,  the 
change  of  the  seasons ,  the  vicissitudes  and  the  succession  of 
things,  which,  as  it  contemplates  the  seas  and  the  land,  pro- 
tects the  interests  and  lives  of  men :  Surely  such  a  God  must 
be  employed  in  a  very  troublesome  and  arduous  task. 

*2.  For  as  men  oppressed  with  a  severe  fit  of  illness,  and 
laboring  under  the  raging  heat  of  a  fever,  are  often  at  first 
seemingly  relieved  by  a  draught  of  cold  water,  but  are  after- 
wards afflicted  with  redoubled  fury  and  vehemence ;  in  like 
manner,  this  distemper,  which  has  seized  the  Commonwealth, 
eased  a  little  by  the  punishment  of  this  traitor,  will  from  his 
luviving  associates  soon  assume  nexo  force. 

3.  The  nourishment  and  care   of  the  body  muM   wasx:  iu* 
s  end  the  preservation  of  its  health  and  strength,  and  not 


Sentences  are  also  elegantly  terminated  by 
om7iisj   nulluSy  nemoj  when  the  idea  of  univer- 
ality  is  conveyed  with  a  more  particular  stress : 
as. 


115 

There  is  either  no  vh-lue,  or  every  pain  must 
be  despised, 

Aut  nulla  virtus  est,  aut  contemnendus  dolor 
omnis. 

EXAMPLES. 

t.  What  great  desire  can  move  you  to  pass  a  law,  which  is 
att«3nded  with  the  greatest  disgrace,  and  has  not  one  merit  ? 

2.  If  sleep  did  not  bring  rest  to  our  bodies,  and  as  it  were  a 
medicine  for  our  labours,  we  must  think  that  it  was  unnaturaJ, 
since  it  takes  away  our  senses,  and  all  action. 

3.  We  perceive  that  in  this  age,  literature  is  patronized  by 
no  rich  men. 

4.  If  you  should  arrive  thither,  like  Ulysses,  you  will  not 
know  one  of  your  relations. 


Sentences  also  receive  peculiar  elegance  and 
force,when  terminated  by  an  accumulation  of  two 
or  three  emphatic  words,  more  generally  verbs, 
rising  in  a  regular  climax  one  above  the  other, 
sometimes  with,  but  more  frequently  without, 
any  conjunctions.  But  this  mode  of  concluding 
sentences  must  be  very  sparingly  used,  and  only 
when  the  subject  requires  a  greater  degree  of 
animation  and  energy  to  be  thrown  into  the  lan- 
guage ;  as,  For  what  did  I  ordain,  what  did  I 
undertake,  or  what  did  I  execute,  but  by  the 
advice^  authority^  and  decision  of  this  assembly  ? 
Quid  enim  constitui^  quid  gessi^  quid  egi^  nisi  ex 
hujus  ordinis  consilio,  auctoritate,  sententid  ? 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  For  in  proportion   to  any  man's  ignorance  of  antiquit}', 
and  Grecian  literature,  does  he  with  the  utmost  petulance  and 


116 

couiumwi^  aouscy  cdscard  and  deride  those  ancient  illustiioui 
.heroes. 

2.  For  is  there  a  word  m  these  letters,  that  is  not  full  of  po- 
liteness, good  manners,  and  benevolence  ? 

*3.  When  an  end  had  tiius  been  put  to  the  war,  and  rewards 
lid  punishments  had  been  bestowed  according  to  the  deserts 
of  each  man,  he  returned  to  Rome  :  but  it  is  generally  under- 
stood that  only  the  aged  went  to  meet  him  at  his  return  ;  for 

en  then,  as  during  the  remainder  of  his  whole  life,  the  Roman 
youth  expressed  tlie  greatest  detestation  and  abhorrence  of 
him. 

*4.  Will  posterity  be  so  deaf  as  not  to  hear  our  shouts  of 
applause,  called  forth  by  our  admiration  of  your  virtues  and 
good  fortune,  at  a  time  when  two  of  the  greatest  and  most  pow- 
erful kings  were  engaged  in  a  long  and  sanguinary  war ;  when 
every  one  of  the  neighboring  princes  was  either  induced  by  in- 
clination, drawn  by  motives  of  duty,  or  even  compelled  by  ne- 
cessit}",  to  espouse  the  cause  of  this  or  that  party,  when  our 
eyes  2oere  dimmed  by  the  dazzling  brightness  of  arms,  our  ears 
stunned  by  the  din  of  war,  and  our  imaginations  affrighted  by 
continual  alarms  ? 


ii: 


OF  THE  ARRANGEMENT    OF  CLAUSES,  OR   DIFFERENT   MEMBERS 
OF  A  SENTENCE. 

A-S  what  we  have  said  concerning  the  natural 
order  of  words  is  equally  applicable  to  the  ar- 
rangement of  clauses,  it  w  ill  be  only  necessary 
shortly  to  mention,  that,  as  far  as  they  follow  the 
natural  order  of  our  ideas,  so  far  In  general  they 
will  be  conducive  to  elegance  and  perspicuity. 
But  as  in  the  arrangement  of  the  several  clauses 
of  a  compound  sentence,  recourse  must  be  had 
to  a  frequent  transposition,  care  must  be  taken 
not  to  throw  the  sentence  into  disorder  and  ob- 
scurity. The  chief  thing  therefore  to  be  avoid 
ed  is  the  hyperbalon  or  synchysis,  that  is,  a  con- 
fused intermixture  of  words  belonging  to  one 
clause,  with  the  words  that  lielong  to  another, 
which  might  materially  alter  or  obscure  the 
sense.     As  we  would  not  sav,  for 

Great  teas  my  joy  tvhen  I  received  the  book  from 
you : 

Magnum  ego  librum  cum  ahs  te  accepissem  fidt 
Tiieum  gaudium ; 

Because  the  reader  would  not  know  whether 
magnum  referred  to  librum  or  gaudium.  As  it 
is  however  of  great  consequence  to  composition, 
how,  and  what  members  of  a  sentence  should 
precede  the  others,  tlie  two  following  examples 
may  serve  more  fully  to  illustrate  this.  It  is  ne- 
cessary that  those 'clauses  which  explain  and 

11  ^ 


118 

define  a  thing  should  be  placed  first,  or,  at  least 
should  immediately  alter  the  nominative  case,  or 
some  other  introductory  word,  (vid.  page  110.) 
ibrm  the  first  clause  of  the  sentence,  thus, 

/  ivomkr  that  Brutus  should  have  been  amo)ig 
ike  assassins  of  Ccesar,  as  he  had  received  so  //m- 
ny  favors  from  him  : 

VVe  shall  say, 

Miror  Brutum,  qui  a  Ccesare  tot  heneficiis  affec- 
tum erat^  inter  cjusinterfcctoresfuisse: 

For  were  we  to  say,  Miror  Brtitum^  inter  Cce- 
aiis  interfectores  fuisse^  qui  ab  co  tot  beneficii 
ffffectus  eratj  the  qui^  besides  the  inelegance  of  the 
*>entence,  might  be  referred  equally  to  Caesar  as 
to  Brutus. — And  again, 

Man  is  mortal^  as  he  is  furnished  with  a  bodtj  : 
but  immortal  inasmuch  as  he  thinks  : 

We  will  not  say,  Homo  est  mortalisj  quoad  cor- 
fore  est  instructus ;  sed  immortalis^  quoad  cogitat : 
but  wc  shall  render  it  by  this  transposition  of 
the  words  that  explain  the  idea : 

Ilomo^  quoad  coiyore  est  ? />  ^frvrtus^  rnortalis  ; 
quoad  cogitat,  immortalis  est. 

These  rules,  however,  as  we  mentioned  above, 
will  admit  of  some  exceptions;  as,  where  those 
divisions  that  should  come  first  are  longer  than 
?hose  that  follow  ;  we  should  not  say,  Cur  ilia 
es  tarn  brevi  tempore  ac  sine  negoiio  fieri potuerit, 
tescio :  but,  Nescio,  cur,  ^c.  for  in  this  case  the 
harmony  of  the  sentence  requires  that  the  louger 
clauses  should  come  last :  but  the  judgment  of 
tlu»  Tirr»nri(nf  ^rlu»!nruin  on^ily  direct  him  with 


119 


out  the  necessity  of  having  recourse  to  rules  to 
mark  each  exception. 


Clauses  denoting  the  place  where,  and  the 
time  when,  any  thing  is  done,  though  they  may 
be  last  in  English,  should  come  in  the  beginning 
of  the  sentence ;  as, 

I  shall  give  you  the  book^  as  soon  as  I  shall  have 
received  it : 

Libnmi,  cum  primum  accepero,  tibi  dabo. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  lie  had  not,  ichcre  to  turn  himself. 

2.  You  should  consider  that  you  will  be  in  the  power  of 
your  enemy,  in  whatever  place  you  may  he 

3.  Thus  the  person  of  the  King  escaped,  while  our  troops 
were  employed  in  pillaging  these  villages. 

4.  He  was  guarded  first  by  his  own  modesty,  and  then  by 
the  vigilance  and  instruction  of  his  father,  as  long  as  his  age 

xposed  him  to  such  suspicions. 

*5.  Therefore  Brutus  silently  waited  for  an  opportunity. 
For  he  himself  exhibited  an  incredible  patience,  as  long  as  he 
saw  you  tamely  bearing  the  yoke  of  slavery  5  but  when  he  saw 
you  intent  upon  the  recovery  of  your  best  rights,  he  then  pre- 
pared to  second  your  noble  efibrts. 


Clauses  expressing  a  cause  or  reason,  begin- 
ning by  (jiiia,  quoniam,  cum,  quod,  and  sometimes 
cuf^  must  also  come  first:  as, 

I  shall  always  love  you,  because  you  have  con- 
ferred numberless  favors  upon  me: 

Te,  quia  me  innumeris  benejiciis  affeceris^  prop- 
tercel  semper  amabo. 


120 

1 .  /  could  not  write  to  you,  because  I  knew  not  where  yon 
were. 

2.  But  ?y  there  could  be  no  reason  at  all,  ichy  you  should  he 
overwhelmed  with  so  great  sorrow,  it  appears  a  wonder  to  all, 
that  you  betrayed  those  signs  of  a  weak  and  degenerate  mind. 

*3.  How  much  more  wisely  did  our  ancestors  act,  who  in- 
vented an  extraordinary  pmiishment  against  parricides,  tneV 
knowing  that  there  was  nothing  so  sacred,  ichich  the  presump- 
tion or  wickedness  of  men  wnuld\  not  violate ;  in  order  that 
they,  whom  nature  herself  had  not  been  able  to  retain  within 
the  bounds  of  their  duty,  might  be  deterred  from  the  perpetra- 
tion of  so  foul  a  crime,  by  the  severity  of  the  punishment  ? 
They  ordered  that  they  should  be  sewed  alive  into  a  sack,  and 
thus  be  thrown  into  the  river. 

4.  For  no  one  imagined  that  any  man  existed,  who  could 
immediately  enjoy  the  sweets  of  undisturbed  rest,  after  having 
by  the  enormity  of  his  guilt,  violated  every  divine  and  human 
law  :  because  they,  who  have  been  guilty  of  so  foul  a  crime, 
not  only  cannot  enjoy  calm  repose,  but  not  even  breathe  with- 
out horror  and  trembling. 


Clauses  denoting  any  thing  conditional,  the 
guides  of  which  are  si^  nisi,  siquidem,  ^c.  as, 

I  beg  you  to  forgive  ine,  if  1  shall  say  any 
thing  with  too  great  freedom  : 

Ego,  si  quid  liberius  dtxero,  ignoscatis  velim. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  I  beg  of  you  to  send  me  the  booJc,  if  you  have  it. 

2,  The  atrocity  of  the  deed  would  scarcely  appear  craiible 
to  mankind,  if  the  parricide  -r^rr  not  almost  exposed  (o  the 
manifest  view  of  all. 

♦3.  Wotdd  not  that  man  demand  the  payment  of  a  debt,  if 


121 


it  ioas  justly  due,  who  could  not  only  extort  payment  of  a  sum, 
which  not  being  justly  due,  was  properly  withheld,  but  even 
the  blood  and  vitals  of  a  man  nearly  related  to  him. 


Clauses  denoting  a  concession,  beginning  by 
etsi^  etiamsi,  quamqiiam,  licet,  ut,  ^'C.  ss. 

And  though  they  are  many,  yet  they  stand  in 
need  of  a  teacher  and  experience  : 

Qui,  quanquam  plurimi  sunt,  doctorem  usum- 
que  desiderant. 

^  EXAMPLES. 

1 .  I  would  not  do  that,  though  it  icere  in  my  power. — (It 
is  better  to  make  use  of  a  transposition,  with  the  addition  of 
tamen,  and  say,  ego,  quanquam  poteram,  tamen,  8fc.) 

2.  You  will  determine  that  there  is  no  occasion  for  a  long 
speech,  though  time  enough  for  speaking  might  have  been 
granted  us,  (with  the  addition  of  tamen  in  its  proper  place.) 

*3.  That  General  is  therefore  by  no  means  fit  to  command 
in  an  Asiatic  and  a  regal  war,  even  suppose  you  should  have 
one,  who  in  a  pitched  battle  may  appear  capable  of  defeating 
the  forces  of  these  two  powerful  kings  *,  unless  he  is  also  one 
that  can  restrain  his  hands,  eyes,  and  thoughts,  from  the  riches 
of  our  allies,  from  their  wives  and  children,  from  the  ornaments 
of  their  cities  and  temples,  and  from  the  gold  and  treasures  of 
their  palaces. 

4.  And  perhaps  in  undertaking  this  cause,  impelled  by  the 
rashness  of  youth,  I  may  have  acted  imprudently.  But  since  I 
have  undertaken.  lU  I  will  give  all  the  succour  and  support  in 
my  power,  though  terrors  compass  me  on  every  side,  and  dan- 
gers threaten  me  from  every  quarter. 


Interrogative  clau.^es,  which  mark  at  the  same 
time  the  extent  and  object  of  the  thing,  known 


l>y  the  particles  (juisj  quid,  an,  tttrum^  cur,  quo- 

vt'frJo^  quemadnwdihuy  ^r.  as  insioad  of  sav  inp 

\'  ..; ,  A,?/.\  v;V  •   Quis  sit,  nescio,  is  more  elegant. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  It  is  very  evident,  ichat  is  right,  but  it  does  not  so  fully 
appear  Wi)at  is  expedient. 

2.  Vou  see  what  power  he  had ;  now  hear  what  actions  he 
perlbrmed. 

3.  Concerning  which,  O  judges,  I  neither  can  discover  how 
I  can  speak,  nor  how  I  can  be  silent. 


Clauses  expressing   likeness   or  comparison, 
beginning  by  velut,  quasi,  ut,  tanquam,  ^c. 

EXAMPLES. 

1 .  J  was  silent,  as  if  I  had  not  heard.  {Ego  tanquam .... 
is  better  than  silui,  tanquam,) 

2.  When  this  sacrilegious  wretch,  the  enemy  and  despoiler 
of  every  thing  sacred  and  religious,  had  seen  this  divine  image, 
he  was  seized  with  sucli  a  burning  desire  and  madness,  as  if  he 
himself  had  received  a  stroke  from  that  very  torch,  that  he 
ordered  the  magistrates  to  pull  it  to  pieces  and  deliver  it  to 
him. 


Relative  clauses  beginning  by  qui,  qualis, 
quantus,  quot,  quoties,  quuni,  quantopere,  ut,  ubi, 
should  in  general  be  placed  before^  their  corres- 
ponding clauses,  beginning  by  is,  talis,  tanius, 
tot^  toties,  tarn,  tantoperi,  if  a,  ibi,  expressed  or 
understood ;  suliject,  however,  to  those,  excep- 
tion^, to  which  u  e  adverted  before. 

Qui  followed  by  is : 


123 

JEXAMPLES. 

3.  God  loves  those  who  pursue  virtue.  {Qui  virtuti  stU" 
dent,  €08,  <5x.  and  not  Deus  amat  cos  qui,) 

*2.  But  let  us  embrace  and  observe  that,  iMch  has  a  most 
extensile  effect,  whose  influence  is  felt  not  merely  in  our  owa 
safety  and  preservation,  but  also  in  the  acquisition  of  wealth 
and  power;  to  banish  terror, and  retain  love  and  benevolence  ; 
thus  shall  the  utmost  of  our  ambition  be  gratified,  both  in  our 
private  concerns,  and  in  our  political  aims  and  pursuits.  For 
they,  who  wish  to  inspire  terror,  must  necessarily  fear  those, 
by  whom  they  are  feared. 

3.  In  those,  who  have  a  superior  greatness  of  soul,  the  de- 
sire of  money  is  directed  to  the  acquisition  of  power. 

4.  I  will  not  say  this  for  the  sake  of  aggi*avati ng  the  circum- 
stances, but  I  will  truly  explain  to  you  those  sensations  which  I 
myself  received. 

So  also  the  compounds  of  qui  and  quis,  as  qui- 

I'linqiie,  quidqiiid,  ^c. 

That  will  remain  all  your  own,  whatever  support  you  afford 
the  Commonwealth  in  these  most  dangerous  times. 


Qualis  followed  by  talis  :  as, 

He  is  just  such  a  man,  as  his  father  was : 

Qualis  pater  fuit,  talis  hie  est. 

1.  It  is  easy  to  perceive,  if  you  wish  to  retrace  the  annals  of 
past  ages,  that  the  state  and  the  people  have  always  been  such 
as  the  great  men  of  the  state  were  :  and  that  ichatever  changes 
have  taken  place  in  the  morals  of  the  great,  the  same  will  also 
follow  in  the  people. 

*2.  With  great  truth  did  Socrates  affirm,  that  this  was  the 
nearest,  and  as  it  were  the  compendious  way  to  glory ;  if  any 
one  would  earnestly  endeavor  to  be  such  as  he  wiahed  to  ap- 
pear. For  if  there  are  any,  who  suppose  that  they  can  acquire 
truth  and  solid  glory  by  hypocrisy,  by  vain  and  empty  ostenta- 
tion; by  dissiiuilatiou  not  only  of  the  tongue,  but  of  the  counte- 


124 

irance,  they  are  egregiously  mistaken.  True  glory  pushes  iu 
roots  deep  into  the  ground,  and  even  shoots  forth  new  stems. 
Hypocrisy  and  fiction,  like  short-lived  flowers,  quickly  fall 
away  ;  nor  can  any  dissimulation  or  disguise  be  lasting. 

3.  I  beg  of  you  that  you  would  now  prove  yourself  such  a 
matiy  as  you  have  shown  yourself  before. 


Quantus  followed  by  tantus  : 

So  much  esteem  shall  I  suppose  that  you  have  for  me,  as 
you  bestow  care  and  attention  in  the  preservation  of  your 
health. 

Quot  followed  by  tot  : 

1.  You  have  almost  read  as  many  books,  as  I  have  seen. 

*2.  We  shall  call  him  an  eloquent  orator,  whose  speeches 
in  the  senate  and  at  the  bar,  will  strike  with  conviction,  affect 
with  delight,  and  command  persuasion.  But  there  are  as  many 
kinds  of  speaking,  a.s-  there  are  duties  in  the  orator.  The  sub- 
tle and  acute  in  convincing  the  judgment,  the  soft  and  the  tem- 
perate in  excitiag  delight,  but  the  vehement  and  the  passionate 
in  bending  the  heart  to  persuasion ;  in  this  last  lies  the  whole 
force  of  the  orator. 

3.  There  are  as  many  stars  in  tlie  heavens  which  escape  the 
human  sight,  as  there  are  which  are  beheld  in  the  clearest  night. 

Quoties  followed  by  ioties. 

1.  We  cannot  hut  admire  the  divine  wisdom  as  often  as  zve 
contemplate  the  plants,  and  other  productions  of  the  earth. 

♦2.  When  we  reflect  on  the  other  illustrious  actions  of  your 
life,  though  you  will  find  reason  to  attribute  much  to  bravery, 
yet  more  must  be  attributed  to  your  good  fortune.  But  so  often 
shall  be  revived  in  your  mind  the  pleasing  remembrance  of 
your  extensive  beneficence,  so  often  shall  you  think  of  your 
amazing  generosity,  so  often  of  your  unparalleled  wisdom, 
virtues,  which  I  will  venture  to  say  not  only  constitute  tl)e  high- 
cstj  but  the  only  iiappiness  of  our  nature^  as  often  a^  you  think 


Uo 


of  us,  ichom  you  have  reserved  to  enjoy  with  yoiirsoll  the 
happiness  of  our  country. 

3.  He  always  came  off  conqueror,  as  often  as  he  engaged 
with  the  eneniv. 


Quam  followed  by  tam^  and  quamdiu  by  tain- 

dill : 

But  if  he  Iiad  been  a^  dark  and  secret  in  the  execution,  as 
he  was  daring  in  the  contrivance,  he  might  on  some  occasions 
have  even  deceived  us ;  but  there  is  this  most  fortunate  cir- 
cumstance attending  him,  that  his  unparalleled  audacity  is 
usually  joined  with  the  most  singular  stupidity. 


Quantopere  followed  by  tantopert : 

Jf  men  studied  as  much  to  adorn  the  mind  and  cultivate  the 
understanding,  as  they  labor  to  adorn  their  body,  nothing  would 
be  more  common  than  wisdom  and  virtue. 


Ut^  quemadmodum^  sicut,  followed  by  ita,  sic  : 

1.  With  the  same  fortitude  ought  we  to  bear  not  onl}^  this 
calamity,  but  even  the  total  overthrow  of  our  fortune,  as  we 
have  borne  our  former  prosperity  witij  calmness  and  modera- 
tion. 

2.  For  he  rendered  his  views  and  designs  most  evident  to 
ajl,  in  his  hope  and  expectation  of  corrupting  justice,  as  he 
was  barefaced  and  oj^en  in  seizing  all  the  money  he  could. 


But  sometimes,  as  in  the  following  instance, 
and  in  forms  of  adjuration,  itcl  will  be  more  ele- 
gantly followed  by  ut :  as, 

*1.  So  may  the  prospects  and  the  hopes  of  my  remaining 
days  be  brightened  by  your  good  will  and  the  approbation  of 

1   4w< 


126 

'•  '*\as  I  have  ji  '   '      , 

.  i  •    \i*  been  \ii[\u  ;         1  _      - 

})le,  with  the  lirm  impression  upon  my  mind,  ol  the  religions 
obligation,  with  ivhich  I  bound  myself  to  discharge  them. 

2.  So  may  you  return  safe  into  your  country,  after  having 
jaid  the  city  in  ashes,  as  you  succour  the  distress  of  an  afflicted 
lather,  and  listen  to  his  humble  petition. 


Ubi  followed  by  ibi: 

The  complexion  of  the  times  is  such,  that  every  one  thinks 
i»is  own  condition  the  most  miserable^  and  wishes  least  to  be 
"here  he  /*. 


127 


CHAPTER  III. 


OF    CONJUNCTIONS,  AND    THE    MODE  OF  CONNECT 
ING    WORDS    AND    CLAUSES. 


Conjunctions  give  a  coherence  and  force 
to  the  sentence,  and  arc  necessary  to  elucidate 
the  subject,  which  without  them  would  be  unin- 
telligible. Their  proper  disposition  is  therefore 
of  the  greatest  consequence.  Such  indeed  is 
their  utility,  that  the  best  writers  often  multiply 
them  by  the  figure  polysyndeton :  and  the  few 
cases  when  the  connexion  will  not  suffer  by  their 
absence,  are  chiefly  in  lofty  subjects  that  demand 
great  vehemence  of  expression,  and  mark  some 
sudden  affection  or  agitation  of  the  mind ; 
when  the  gesture  or  action  of  the  speaker  may 
be  supposed  to  supply  their  place ;  as  in  that 
well-known  exclamation  of  Cicero,  Excessit, 
evasit,  erupit! 

In  the  connexion  of  single  words  Avhich  have 
some  difference  in  their  meaning,  though  they 
agree  closely  with  each  other,  with  the  same 
nominative,  or  the  same  verb ;  where  the  Eng- 
lish would  be  content  witli  one  and^  the  Latins 
use  two  or  even  more.  This  double  et,  has  the 
force  of  the  double  turn,  non  modd  ^ed  etiam  ;  as, 


lie  favours,  notires  and  loves  me  beyond  ilif 
rest : 

Me  pra  ceteiis  et  colitj  et  observat  et  diligit. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  I  wish  yoM  to  demand  and  exi>ect  every  tli'mg  from  mc. 

2.  The  day  after,  in  the  morning,  the  Germans  persisting 
u  their  treachery  and  dissimulation,  came  in  great  uumbei^ 

lO  the  camp. 

3.  But  if  reason  teaches  the  learned  ;  necessity ^  the  barba- 
rian ;  common  custom,  all  nations  in  general ;  and  even  Nature 
itself  instructs  the  brutes  to  defend  their  bodies,  limbs,  and 
lives,  when  attacked,  by  all  possible  methods,  yo*i  cannot 
pronounce  this  action  criminal,  without  determining  at  the 
same  time,  that  whoever  falls  into  the  hands  of  a  highwayman 
must'of  necessity  perish  either  by  the  sword  or  your  decisions. 


Tliis  repetition  of  the  et,  is  made  for  the  sako 
of  perspicuity,  because  the  mind  of  the  hearer 
naturally  expects  somethinj^  more  to  follow, 
when  it  has  been  prepared  for  it  by  one  of  the 
conjunctions  ;  as, 

Ltber  tibi  jam  reddiius  est,  aut  brevi  reddttur  ; 
It  is  not  known  whether  the  sentence  is  to  end 
at  rcdditus  est,  or  not,  as  it  stands ;  but  when  you 
add,  liber  tibi  aut  jam  reddiius  estj  aut  brevi  red- 
detvr,  that  doubt  vanishes  from  the  beginning ; 
but  it  must  be  observed,  that  if  the  words  to  Im^ 
coiuiected  murk  no  difftMCMue  with  each  other, 
there  must  bs  but  one  conjunction  :    i  . 

Not  a  sint^le  act  of  bravery  could  pass  unob- 
served :  for  all  theadjoinim^  hills  and  eminences, 
which  afforded  a  near  prospect  of  the  sea,  were 
covered  widi  our  men* 


129 

The  connexion,  especially  in  grave  and  serious 
subjects,  is  often  made  by  the  repetition  of  tlie 
preceding  word,  instead  of  a  conjunction  :  as, 

I  think  that  nothing  is  more  sweet,  more  de- 
lightful, or  more  worthy  the  liberty  of  man,  than 
friendship : 

Ainicitid  nihil  dulcius,  nihil  siiavis,  nihil  homi- 
nis  Uhertate  dignius^  esse  puto. 

EXAMPLES. 

*1.  At  the  very  first  onset,  Numitor,  giving  it  out  tliat  the 
enemy  had  invaded  the  city  and  attacked  the  royal  palace, 
recalled  the  Alban  youth  to  guard  and  defend  the  citadel  with 
their  arms ;  but  when  he  saw  the  two  young  men  returning  to 
him  with  joy  in  their  countenance,  and  ready  to  congratulate 
him  on  their  success  in  having  put  the  tyrant  to  death,  he  im- 
mediately called  a  council,  and  laid  before  them  the  wicked 
ai)^  barbarous  conduct  of  his  brother  towards  himself,  disco- 
vered the  origin  of  his  grandsons,  hoiv  tlie\-  had  been  born, 
educated  J  and  discovered^  pointed  out  tli<  assassination  of  the 
tyrant,  and  himself  the  author  and  contriver  of  it. 

2.  Nor  is  the  sound  of  the  trumpet  the  same^wh^n  the  army 
is  marching  to  an  enpagement,  or  when  it  sounds  a  retreat. 

3.  They  have  chosen  me  as  their  refuge  against  oppression, 
an  the  avenger  of  their  wrongs,  tke  patron  of  their  rights,  and 
the  sole  manager  of  the  present  impeachinent. 

4.  If  any  king,  if  any  foreign  sCate  or  nation,  had  been 
guilty  of  the  like  inlumianity  against  a  Roman  citizen,  would 
you  not  make  them  feel  the  full  weight  of  public  vengeance  ? 
Would  you  not  pursue  thera  with  the  terror  of  your  arms  ? 
Could  we  sailer  this  injury  and  ignominy  of  the  Roman  name 
to  remain  unpunished  and  m^revenged  ? 

5.  God  has  provided  for  the  wants,  and  the  eonveuiences^ 
and  the  preservation  of  mao. 


When  the  words  denote  similitude  or  cOmparl- 

12* 


son,  instead  of  et^  we  may  connect  them  by  tit^ 
followed  by  ita ;  as, 

You  have  performed  the  greatest  and  the  most 
useful  actions : 

ReSj  tit  maximas^  ita  utilissimasy  gessisti 

KXAMPLES. 

f .  The  people  of  Tarsus,  who  are  the  very  worst  of  allies; 
and  the  people  of  Laodicea,  who  surpass  them  in  folly  and 
perverseness,  sent  of  their  own  accord,  for  Dolabella;  from 
both  which  cities  he  levied  an<J  formed  x\\e.  ima^e  of  an  army, 
having  by  their  numbers  the  appearance  of  a  Grecian  army. 

*2.  We  have  heard  of  the  Gods  being  under  the  inlluence 
of  the  same  desires,  diseases,  and  passions;  nor  were  lliey,  as 
fable  tells  us,  without  their  wars  and  battles  :  nor  did  the 
Gods,  as  m  tlie  battles  of  Homer,  some  on  one  side,  and  some 
on  the  other,  lend  each  his  assistance  to  two  contending  ar- 
mies, but  they  carried  oo  their  own  wars  with  the  Titans  and 
the  Giants » 

3.  Your  country  ^vill  for  ever  love  and  revere  your  name, 
for  you  hav€  performed  the  greatest  and  nwst  useful  exploits. 


When  it  is  necessary  to  introduce  a  circum- 
stance of  greater  weight  than  what  precedes  it, 
it  is  elegantly  connected  by  quid  ?  quod ;  as, 

A  wise  man  lives  contented,  and  indeed  the 
\viser  a  man  is,  the  more  resigned  he  is  in  his 
death* 

Sapiens  contentus  vivit :  quid  ?  quod  sapientis- 
imus  quisque  animo  cequissimo  moritun 


JLXAMPLES. 


1.  I  have  ever  been  ready  to  be  of  service  to  you  in  what- 
ever things  I  could,  with  my  assistance  and  my  advice  :  7iai/y  I 
have  not  even  denied  you  my  owd  garments  and  money. 


131 


2.  I  found  the  young  man  whom  you  extolled  witli  such  ex- 
travagant praises,  not  at  aH  advanced  in  his  learning ;  he  did 
not  even  know  how  to  decline  nouns  or  to  conjugate  verbs 
with  any  correctness. 


The  connexion  between  two  nouns  or  subjects 
conveying  nearly  the  same  idea,  is  elegantly 
made  by  the  repetition  of  turn ;  as,  odit  turn  vir- 
tutem,  turn  liberales  artes;  but  if  there  is  a  dif- 
ference between  them,  the  first  which  is  the  in- 
ferior idea  has  generally  cum  prefixed  to  it,  and 
the  more  forcible  is  connected  by  turn ;  as, 

We  ought  to  love  those  who  have  deserved 
well  of  us,  aiid  chiefly  our  preceptors. 

Ciim  omnes  de  nobis  bene  meriios^  turn  maxime 
prceceptores  nostros^  amare  dcbemus. 


EXAMPLES. 

1.  I  know  your  mother,  a  pious  and  honest  woman. 

2.  He  was  a  young  man  of  the  best  disposition,  and  of 
great  erudition. 

3.  Good  health,  and  frugahty  which  chiefly  procures  it,  is 
hoth  necessary  in  every  kind  of  pursuit,  and  chiefly  in  this 
important  study. 

4.  I  have  hoth  at  other  times  recommended  to  you  to  prac- 
tise virtue,  and  to  observe  an  unwearied  diligence  in  your 
studies,  hut  I  have  particularly  done  it  in  my  last  letters  to  you. 


Words  referring  to  the  same  subject,  but  whose 
meaning  is  so  far  opposite  that  one  of  them  may 
be  taken  away  or  denied,  are  connected  by  the 
repetition  of  ant,  ^'^  or  sue^  where  the  English 
would  be  satisfied  with  one ;  as, 


132 

To-morrow  I  shall  write  or  come  r 
Cras  aut  scribam  aut  venianu 

EXAMPLES. 

1 .  I  have  asked  my  father  that  he  icould  send  me  tliose 
books,  or  money  to  buy  them. 

2.  Had  I  the  perfidy  which  they  possess,  at  least  I  should 
not  have  had  the  folly  to  betray  either  an  open  enmity,  while 
I  cherished  a  concealed  and  obscure  Iiatred,  or  an  inclination 
to  hurt  where  I  had  not  the  power  to  do  an  injury. 

*3.  Dramatic  writers,  when  the  fabulous  hero  of  their  play, 
after  having  been  educated  under  some  poor  shepherd,  ignorant 
of  his  true  parent,  is  discovered  to  he  of  royal  Uneagey  or  the 
offspring  perhaps  of  some  celestial  divinity,  always  think  it 
necessary  to  exhibit  the  noble  youth,  as  still  retaining:  a  gmte- 
ful  affection  for  the  honest  rustic  to  whom  he  bad  so  long  suj)- 
posed  himself  indebted  for  his  birth. 


Observe  that  when  several  words  are  to  be 
joined  by  a  conjmiction  copulative,  the  second  is 
not  inelegantly  joined  by  the  enclitic  que  and 
the  third  by  et  or  ac;  as, 

I  desire  friendship,  honors,  and  general  knowl- 
edge : 

Amicitiam  honoresque^  et  rerum  scieniiam  expeto, 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  Your  elegant y  learned,  and  polite  letters  were  delivered 
to  me. 

2.  He  did  not  suffer  those  whom  he  dtd  not  think  capabk 
of  becoming  orators,  to  losi?  their  lime  with  him,  aufl  he  dis- 
missed them,  and  used  to  persuade  them  to  betake  themselves 
to  that  pursuit  for  which  he  thought  them  best  fitted. 


Wliat  we  have  said  concerning  these  conjunc 
dons  is  nearly  applicable  to  the  negative. 


133 

The  Latins  seldom  use  jion  followed  by  nee  or 
neque^  but  repeat  either  of  the  two  latter. 

examplp:s. 

J .  After  this  battle,  Ciesar  resolved  not  to  give  audience  la 
their  Ambassadors,  nor  admit  them  to  terms  of  peace,  seeing 
they  had  treacherously  applied  for  a  truce,  and  afterwards 
wantonly  broken  it. 

2.  That  part  of  your  excuse  in  which  you  say,  tliat  your 
letters  are  always  couched  in  the  same  words,  from  your  pov- 
erty of  expression,  I  do  not  understand,  and  do  not  approve. 


The  connexion  is  also  often  made  by  the  repe- 
tition of  the  preceding  negative  :  as, 
No  one  loves,  or  respects  you : 
Nemo  te  amat^  nemo  te  colit, 

EXAMPLE. 

But  in  the  glory  which  you  have  lately  acquired,  you  have 
no  associate,  how  great  soever  it  is,  and  surely  nothing  can  be 
greater;  it  is  all  your  own:  No  Commander,  Captain,  troop 
or  battalion  robs  you  here  :  nay,  even  Fortune,  the  Goddess 
who  presides  over  human  afifairs,  claims  no  share  of  this  hon- 
or ;  to  you  she  resigns  it. 


Sometimes  the  connexion  is  effected  by  ne 
qiiidem^  followed  by  nedum^  when  what  follows 
is  of  greater  force  than  what  goes  before ;  and 
sometimes  by  non  modb  noiij  and  no7i  modo,  fol- 
lowed by  sed,  ne  quidein,  when  what  follows  is 
of  less  force  than  what  precedes  :  but  these  arc 
^vell-know74  forms. 


134 

IX  AMPLE  S. 


.  lie  has  learned  neither  to  write,  nor  read. 

2.  For  indeed  we  cannot  bear  that  man  to  stand  forward 
ifs  an  accuser,  o?'  a  censuror,  who  himself  is  found  guihy  of 
that  crime  which  he  reproves  in  another. 


It  is  scarcely  necessary  to  observe,  that  tlic 
Latins  generally  use  nee  and  7ieque  for  et  non ; 
for  et  nunquam  always  nee  unqtiam ;  for  et  nemoj 
they  use  nee  ullus^  nee  quisquam  ;  for  et  7iihilj  nee 
quidquam  ;  and  for  et  nusquam^  nee  usquam. 


In  connecting  divisions  of  sentences  the  same 
rule  nearly  applies  as  in  connecting  single  words, 
by  the  repetition  of  e/,  if  they  refer  to  the  same 
subject ;  or  if  t)ne  is  negative,  by  neque^  nee,  for 
et  non  follou^ed  by  et ;  if  both  are  negative,  by  a 
double  nee  and  neque  ;  or  w^here  (here  is  an  op- 
position by  the  repetition  of  avt^  vel;  where  the 
English  w^ould  be  often  satisfied  with  one  of  the 
above  conjunctions. 

EXAMPLES. 

♦1.  Thus  the  quality  of  their  food,  their  perpetual  exercise, 
nn/i  free  unconfined  manner  of  life,  <hecausf»  being  from  ihrir 
r'nildhood  fettered  by  no  rules  of  duty  or  education,  they  a^'- 
knowl«'(J;^e  no  law  hut  will  and  pleasure)  contribute  to  maiie 
Iicm  strong,  «7ir/  to  render  them  of  a  gigantic  size. — (Here 
ili4'  repetition  may  be  observed  in  the  connexion  of  the  single- 
words,  as  in  the  two  clauses.) 

2.  You  therefore  were  not  present  at  these  transactions,  and 
i  has  always  been  my  chief  care  not  to  be  present  myself. 

3.  FiA  I  am  deprived  of  a  great  number  of  vny  most  inti- 


mate  friends,  of  whom  the  hand  of  death  has  cruelly  robbed 
me,  or  whom  the  hard  necesshy  of  flight  has  dispersed  into 
various  parts. 

4.  Certainly,  if  the  mind  had  not  a  forethought  of  a  iiere- 
after,  it  would  neither  harrass  itself  with  so  many  toils,  nor  be 
tormented  with  so  many  cares  and  watchings,  nor  contend  so 
often  for  life  itself. 


In  connecting  two  clauses  of  a  sentence,  if  the 
latter  is  the  consequence  or  the  effect  of  the  for- 
mer, they  may  be  more  closely  joined  by  iit^  in- 
stead of  quarej  igitur^  hinc,  &c.  and  by  ita  ui 
instead  of  the  simple  et :  as, 

You  have  never  loved  your  brother  :  hence  it 
is  no  wonder  that  he  does  not  love  you  : 

Tu  nu7i(fuam  fratrem  amasti^  ut  non  mirum  sit^ 
te  ab  eo  non  redamatum  esse. 

EX^VMPLES. 

1.  The  citizens  we  lost,  fell  in  battle,  not  by  the  insolence 
of  victory ;  whence  there  can  be  no  doubt  but  that  if  it  weie 
possible,  Caesar  would  recall  many  from  the  shades. 

2.  Philip  indeed,  the  King  of  Macedonia,  was  greatly  sur- 
passed by  Alexander  in  the  glory  and  magnit\ide  of  his  ex- 
ploits, but  he  was  greatly  superior  to  his  son  in  gentleness  oi 
disposition  and  in  humanity.  The  one  was  always  great,  the 
other  was  often  debased  by  the  blackest  crimes  :  the  precept 
therefore  of  those  men  is  most  wise  who  teach  us,  that  thv 
more  exalted  we  are,  the  greater  humility  we  should  show. 

3.  When  I  had  fasted  for  two  wiiole  days,  and  had  not 
even  tasted  a  drop  of  water,  overcome  as  I  was  with  lane:uor 
and  famine,  I  certainly  found  that  1  needed  your  good  offices 
more  than  I  thought  you  could  possibly  require  mine. 


Ita^  followed  by  ut^  may  also  be  used  for  qvi- 
dem,  followed  by  sed :  as, 


130 

I  love  }ou  tndeedj  but  I  cannot  indulge  your 
>  ices : 

Amo  te  itaj  ut  tamen  tiiis  vitiis  indulgere  ne- 
queam. 

EXAMPLES. 

*1.  For  what  is  there  more  omnion  than  for  those  who  ai*e 
rilive  to  enjoy  the  free  privilege  of  breathing:,  and  those  who 
are  dead  to  have  a  little  earth  to  cover  their  bones,  for  those 
who  sail  over  the  waters  to  have  the  full  scope  of  the  seas,  and 
lor  the  siiipwrecked  mariner  to  find  a  shore  to  be  cast  uj)on. 
They  live  videed^  while  they  do  live,  hut  they  cannot  draw 
their  breath  from  heaven  :  they  die  indeed,  but  the  earth  does 
not  cover  their  bones  :  they  are  indeed  tossed  upon  the  waves, 
but  no  ablution  takes  place  ;  lastly  they  are  cast  away  indeed, 
but  their  dead  bodies  cannot  even  find  rest  upon  the  rocks. 

2.  There  is  also  another  report  concerning  the  captives, 
that  the  ten  first  came ;  and  when  it  had  been  a  subject  of 
much  doubt  in  the  senate  whether  they  should  be  admitted 
into  the  city  or  not,  they  were  indeed  admitted,  but  an  audi- 
ence was  not  granted  them. 

3.  Preserve  indeed  a  grave  deportment,  but  do  not  fnll  into 
moroseness  and  melancholy.  (This  may  be  with  tlie  addition 
of  tamen,) 


Where  both  clauses  express  a  doubt,  the  con- 
nexion is  generally  made  by  utrum^  or  the  en- 
clitic nCy  with  the  first,  and^/z  before  tlic  second. 


EXAMPLE. 


Alexander  was  a  long  time  very  doubtful,  whetlicr  he  siiould 
persevere,  or  retreat. 


The  connexion  of  two  clauses  is  also  more 
elegantly  made  by  tv,  followed  by  qui ;  by  talis^ 
followed  by  qindis;  by  tantus,  followed  by  quan- 


137'- 

iiis  ;  tot,  followed  by  quoty  than  by  is,  talis,  tan- 
tusj  tot,  ^c.  followed  by  ut. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  Your  father  proved  himself  such  a  man,  that  if  you  could 
show  yourself  the  same,  you  would  pass  for  a  very  great  man. 
— Here  talem qualem  will  be  much  better  than  talem ut,) 

2.  For  what  shows  less,  I  do  not  say  of  an  orator,  but  of 
a  reasonable  being,  than  to  throw  that  kind  of  objection  to  an 
adversary,  that,  if  he  should  deny  it  but  upon  his  bare  word, 
the  objector  could  proceed  no  further. 

*3.  If  then  the  benefits  that  philosophy  has  conferred  upon 
mankind,  and  the  delights  we  receive  from  the  study  of  it  are 
so  great,  that  we  cannot  conceive  any  more  important  or  more 
lasting  to  be  derived  from  any  other  science ;  wh}^  do  we  not 
devote  our  whole  time  and  thoughts  to  the  acquisition  of  phi- 
losophical knowledge  ? 

4.  My  love  for  you  is  so  great  thai  I  should  be  the  happiest 
of  mortals,  if  your  affection  for  me  was  equal  to  it. 


The  connexion  of  clauses  may  also  be  made 
by  tantum  abest  ut,  followed  by  another  iit :  as, 

I  not  only  have  not  forgotten  you,  but  1  think 
of  you  every  day : 

Tantum  abest,  tui  ut  oblitus  sim,  ut  nullusprce- 
tereat  dies,  quin  mihi  in  menteni  tui  veniat. 

EXAMPLES. 

*1.  These  amicable  alliances  are  not  only  not  founded  on 
the  basis  of  reciprocal  wants,  hut  we  often  see  those  men  dis- 
tinguished for  their  liberality  and  beneficence,  whose  power 
and  riches,  but,  above  all,  whose  superior  virtue,  (a  much 
firmer  support)  have  raised  them  above  every  necessity  ol 
having  resource  to  the  assistance  of  others. 

13 


ISS 

*'2,  Therefore  tliose  who  do  not  pive  a  metrical  or  harmo- 
nious termination  to  their  sentences  seem  to  me  to  resemble 
iie  motion  of  those  men  whom  the  Greeks  call  ujrec><*t<rfvi, 
and  not  only  is  the  style  Jiot  enervated  by  that  careful  disposi- 
tion of  words,  as  many  will  presume  to  assert,  who  from  ig- 
norance of  their  masters,  the  dullness  of  their  own  genius,  or 
their  dread  of  labor,  have  never  been  able  to  accomplish  it, 
bitt  even  without  it,  all  the  force  and  energy  of  their  sentences 
is  lost. 

3.  My  own  privat<»  interests  indeed  I  cannot  have  prerrrrcd 
in  this,ybr  /  am  sensible  that  I  have  drawn  much  hatred  upon 
myself,  partly  secret,  partly  open,  w  hich  1  might  have  avoided, 
and  by  which  you  may  profit. 

4.  You  not  only  are  not  a  perfect  master  of  the  Greek  lan- 
guage, but  you  have  scarcely  learned  its  first  rudiments. 


In  connecting  sentences  which  contain  a  more 
complete  and  absolute  sense,  but  which  at  the 
same  time  have  a  reference  to  the  subject  men- 
tioned before,  ouij  quee,  quod,  as  we  have  al- 
ready seen,  is  often  used  instead  of  hie,  is,  et,  ve- 
rb, igittir,  and  sometimes  eniin,  which  are  re- 
jected ;  but  it  must  be  observed,  that  this  rela- 
tive must  apply  to  what  is  immediately  prece- 
ding. 

As  the  use  of  the  relative,  and  indeed  this  ap- 
plication of  it  in  connecting  sentences,  merits 
the  attention  of  those  who  study  elegance,  it 
will  not  be  superfluous  to  advert  to  it  again  in 
this  place. 


EXAMPLES. 


1 .  T  have  always  received  the  most  gentle,  and  at  the  «ame 
time  the  most  '  *  ry  advice  from  you ;  and  if  J  had  follow- 
ed your  wise  »  s,  1  should  now  be  the  happiest  of  men. 
(Here  qui  may  agret;  either  with  advice  or  with  /.) 


139 

2.  1  went  to  his  house,  hut  when  I  could  not  find  him,  I  re- 
turned home. 

3.  But  if  I  defended  my  own  safety  against  his  very  cniel  and 
violent  attack  upon  me,  you  ought  to  rest  satisfied  that  I 
did  not  complain  to  you  even  of  your  brother's  injurious  treat- 
ment of  me ;  for  tchen  1  found  that  he  was  meditating  to  di- 
rect all  the  efforts  of  his  tribunitial  power  towards  my  destruc- 
tion, I  then  availed  myself  of  the  interest  I  had  with  your  wife 
and  sister  to  prevail  upon  them  to  deter  him  from  doing  me 
that  injury. 


In  the  beginning  of  a  sentence  which  has  a 
reference  to  what  goes  before,  the  Latins  more 
frequently  make  use  of  neque  than  of  non  before 

rerb^  cnim^  iamen. 

EXAMPLE. 

1.  But  nothing,  said  he,  seems  to  me  of  superior  excellence 
than  for  a  speaker  to  have  that  irresistible  hold  upon  the  as- 
semblies of  men,  as  by  the  charms  of  his  eloquence  to  bend 
their  minds  to  his  own  purposes,  to  lead  them  lo  whatever  di- 
rection he  chooses,  or  dissuade  them  from  whatever  he  pleases. 
Mde  Chap.  I.) 

*2.  For  it  teas  not  merely  to  confer  a  mark  of  his  favor, 
that  Alexander  the  Great  preferred  the  pencil  of  Apelles,  or 
the  chissel  of  Leusippus,  to  those  of  others,  but  that  he  kne^^ 
full  well  that  their  art  would  throw  a  lustre  upon  his  own  name, 
as  well  as  upon  themselves. 

*3.  Yet  the  blind  fury  of  Catiline  not  only  received  no 
check  or  diminution,  but  he  was  now  daily  forming  and  medi- 
tating new  machinations ;  he  now  occupied  himself  in  estab- 
lishing new  depots  of  arms  in  the  most  commodious  places  of 
Italy ;  he  now  took  up  all  the  money  he  could  upon  his  own 
credit,  or  that  of  his  friends,  and  had  it  conveyed  to  Fiesulsc 
into  the  hands  of  a  certain  Manlius,  who  became  afterwards 
one  of  the  principal  conductors  of  the  war. 


140 

4.  But  the  •  -nt  of  ease  was  ?"  tod  us  to  devote 

our  time  to  th.  i  al  arts,  thougli  w  -tlv  wished  and 

desired  it. 


Thus  also  the  ancients  more  frequently  use 
neque  vera  quisquam^  for  nemo  verb :  neque  vera 
quidquam^  for  nihil  vera:  and  iieqiie  cnini  quis- 
qticiMy  neqxie  tamen  quisquam,  for  nemo  enim, 
nemo  tamen. 

Nam  cumj  etenim  cum,  at  the  beginning  of  a 
sentence  are  more  frequently  used  than  cumenim. 


EXAMPLE. 


For  irhen  he  had  left  me  no  other  alternative  than  to  swear  : 
I  then  in  a  solemn  and  elevated  voice  uttered  that  true  and 
most  gratifying  oath ;  which  the  people  with  an  unanimous 
acclamation  swore  that  I  had  most  truly  uttered. 


After  quid  aliud,  nihil  aliud,  it  is  more  elegant 
to  use  nisi  tlian  qnam  :  as, 

I  ask  nothing  else  in  my  own  right,  than  timt 
you  write  to  me  : 

Nihil  aliud  a  te  jure  meo  postulo,  nisi  ad  me  ut 
scribas. 

EXAMPL>>. 

1 .  /  '  '  ot  to  answer  the  letters  of  a  friend,  than 
loneg!  p. 

2.  Nothinir  else  is  obtained  by  so  obstinate  and  bloody  a 
war  but  defeat  uud  disgrace. 


Nisi  should  also  be  used  instead  of  prceter^ 
prdeierquam,  after  a  negation. 


141 
EXAMPLE. 

What  the  Pythian  oracle  dechired,  that  no  other  cause',  ex- 
cept avarice,  should  destroy  Sparta,  it  seems  to  have  predicted 
not  only  to  the  Lacedemonians,  but  to  all  othe^;  opulent  na- 
tions. 


Quod  siy  and  quod  nisi  are  often  put  for  si,  and 
for  si  7ion,  at  the  beginning  of  a  sentence,  when 
the  subject  of  both  sentences  lias  an  immediate 
connexion :  as,  * 

If  yon  have  to  do  with  this  man,  you  ^\  ill  soon 
perceive  that  I  complained  justly  of  him  : 

Quod  si  tibi  res  cum  isto  sit,  turn  sentias,  me 
jure  de  illo  questum. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  He  declared  that  he  would  no  longer  lend  his  assistance 
to  the  senate,  in  their  proceedings  (grassanti)  against  the 
people ;  that  he  would  interfere  if  they  persevered  in  their 
former  tyranny ;  but  if  they  thought  that  he  could  be  as  cruel 
as  the  senators,  that  he  would  go  away  with  his  soldiers,  and 
no  longer  be  present  at  their  civil  broils. 

2.  Thus  in  these  perilous  times,  he  not  only  preserved  him- 
self, but  he  was  the  chief  protection  of  his  dearest  friend.  If 
a  pilot  is  entitled  to  the  highest  praise,  who  saves  a  vessel 
from  a  storm,  and  a  dangerous  sea ;  should  he  not  be  esteem- 
ed of  an  extraordinary  prudence,  who  has  readied  a  secure 
haven  from  so  many  and  such  overwhelming  civil  tenipt^sts  ? 

*3.  How  inconsistent  would  it  bej  upon  seeing  a  statue  or 
a  painting,  to  be  convinced  that  it  was  the  production  of  art, 
and  on  the  distant  view  of  the  navi^tion  of  a  vessel,  to  enter- 
tain no  doubt  but  that  it  was  guided  b}'  the  combined  powers  of 
skill  and  wisdom,  or  on  the  contemplation  of  a  sun-dial,  or 
clock,  to  know  that  they  point  out  the  hours  by  means  of  art, 
and  not  by  mere  chance ;  but  at  the  same  time  to  think  the 
world,  which  both  displays  the  perfections  of  these  snis.  aud 

*  13 


142 

contains  in  itself  the  artists  themselves,  to  be  a  mass  destitute 
of  plan,  wisdom,  or  contrivance  ?  If  any  one  should  carry  into 
Scythia  or  Britain  that  sphere  which  our  friend  Posidonius 
lately  made,  which  describes  the  same  revolutions  in  the  sun, 
the  moon,  and  the  five  planets,  which  are  performed  each  day 
and  night  in  the  heavens,  is  there  a  man  even  amongst  those 
barbarous  people  who  would  have  a  single  doubt  but  tliat  the 
sphere  was  perfected  by  a  wonderful  effort  of  art  ? 


Instead  of  quod  atiinet  ad  id  qtiod,  and  which 
the  English  itself  renders  by  as  to  tvhat,  it  is 
more  elegaiU  simply  to  use  quod. 


EXAMPLE. 


As  to  what  some  men  have  thought  that  the  soul  itself  will 
one  day  perish,  they  are  most  egregiously  mistaken. 


And  on  the  contrary,  the  best  writers  do  not 
use  quod  (ul  with  the  accusative,  for  as  to,  in  re- 
gard to,  but  always  quod  attinet,  quod  spectat  ad: 
as,  As  to  you ;  quod  ad  cos  attinet. 

EXAMPLE. 

As  to  you,  I  never  saw  a  man  more  perniciously  prodigal. 


In  Stating  an  objection,  instead  of  saying,  at 
ohjici  possitj  objiciat  quis,  i^c.  it  will  be  sufficient 
simply  to  make  use  of  at,  and  the  answer  may 
be  made  with,  or  even  without  at. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  In  this  I  have  often  been  struck  with  admiration  at  the 
dignity,  the  justice,  and  the  wisdom  manifested  by  Caesar. — 


143 

He  always  uses  the  most  honorable  names  towards  Pompe}', 
But  some  one  mil  say,  that  he  showed  the  most  persecuting^ 
and  vindictive  spirit  towards  his  person.  But  these  were  thr 
deeds  of  arms,  and  the  insolence  of  victory,  and  not  of  Csesar. 

2.  Yet  you  will  say,  that  it  was  I  who  advised  him  to  it ; 
as  if  he  could  not  have  done  a  service  to  his  country,  without 
an  adviser.  But  again  you  will  object  that  I  rejoiced  at  it. 
What,  amidst  such  universal  joy,  was  there  any  reason  why  I 
should  be  the  only  rejected  person  in  Rome  ? 


In  the  connexion  of  several  arguments,  the 
Latins  do  not  enumerate  them  by  pmnd,  secun- 
(Id,  tertib,  ^c.  but  by  pimum,  deinde,  turn,  de- 
nique,  postremo ;  and  instead  of  those  words  of 
enumeration,  as  tum^prcetereci,  insuper,  ^c.  other 
forms  of  connexion  may  be  used,  as,  accedit 
quod ;  ut  taceam,  omittam,  ^c. 


EXAMPLE. 


We  must  first  consider,  that  oiur  kindness  should  hurt  no- 
body ;  secondly,  that  it  should  not  be  above  our  faculties ; 
.thirdly,  that  it  may  be  exercised  with  dignity  i  and  lastly,  at- 
tended with  the  greatest  honesty. 


144 


CHAPTER  IV. 

OF    THE    SIMPLE    VARIATION    OF    WORDS. 


As  nothing  contributes  more  to  elegance  of 
style  than  a  clmnge  or  variation  of  words,  to 
which  the  scholar  should  be  early  introduced, 
we  shall  briefly  show  how  it  may  be  effected. 
This  variation  is  either  simple,  and  consists  in 
the  mere  change  of  one  word  into  another  sy- 
nonimous  word  or  phrase,  or  it  is  rhetorical  or 
ornamental,  as  by  the  accession  of  another  ex- 
pression, more  full,  dignified,  or  smooth,  the 
simple  idea  receives  greater  ornament,  and  by 
this  metaphorical  and  circuitous  manner,  as- 
sumes the  form  of  a  period.  But  %ve  shall  not 
treat  so  fully  of  this  last,  till  we  come  to  speak 
of  perspicuity  and  copiousness.  Thus,  to  give 
an  example  of  a  simple  variation  by  means  of 
a  synonimous  phrase  : 

Ingenium  est  omnium  hominum  a  labore  pro- 
dive  ad  libid'nitm. — Ter. 

May  be  >  aried  thus  : 

Ea  est  omnium  mortaliiim  idoles  ut  a  labore 
ad  vohiptatnn  rnant. 

Tlius  again,  to  show  the  ease  with  whirh  a 
§ent(*nce  may  be  Jllmost  infinitely  varied : 


145 

In  hoc  natitra  efficere  quid  possit  videtur  ex- 
perta. 

Try  the  word  natura  in  other  cases : 

In  the  genitive : 

In  hoc  naturce  quanta  vis  sit,  satis  perspectum 
est. 

In  the  dative : 

Naturce  quid  efficere  liceat,  in  hoc  compertuni 
est. 

In  the  accusative : 

Naturam,  quid  efficere  possit,  experiri  voluis- 
se  arbitror. 

In  the  ablative : 

In  hoc  quid  a  natura  effici  possit,  compertuni 
est. 


An  adjective  may  be  changed  into  a  substan- 
tive :  as, 

He  reproaches  his  legs  for  being  too  slender  : 
Crnrum  nimiam  tenuitatem  vituperat. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  He  was  sufficiently  eloquent,  liberal j  versed  in  civil  law, 
as  well  as  the  military  art. — (Say  hahebat  cnim ) 

2.  How  senseless  must  you  think  yourselves,  who,  while  you 
possess  the  real  comforts  and  blessings  in  life,  harrass  your 
minds  with  phantoms  of  imaginary  evils,  and  instead  of  enjoy- 
ing the  substantial  gifts  of  fortune,  torture  yourselves  with  the 
apprehension  of  future  calamities,  which  are  never  likely  to 
happen  ? 

3.  If  I  had  not  opposed  this  rash  man  with  all  the  energy  of 
virtue  and  fortitude,  where  is  the  man  who  woidd  not  have 
thought  that  all  the  firmness  I  displayed  during  my  Consulship, 
had  been  more  the  effect  of  chance  than  of  wisdom. 


146 

4.  In  the  complaint  I  then  made,  mournful  and  wretched  as, 
it  was,  though  unavoidable  by  me,  in  that  station  to  which  I 
had  l)een  raised,  what  was  there  in  the  least  abusive  ?  Did 
T  not  speak  with  moderation  ?  Yet  how  temperate  must  that 
man  be,  who,  complaining  of  him,  could  abstain  from  abuse  ? 


And  in  the  same  manner  an  adjective  may  be 
elegantly  put  in  the  neuter  gender,  and  its  sub- 
stantive in  the  genitive  case  :  as,  instead  of  hanc 
laudem  conseciitus  es,  say  hoc  laadis 

2:XAMPLES. 

1.  The  sun  imparts  the  same  light  and  heat  to  all  these  na- 
tions. 

2.  You  have  this  nobility y  and  I  shall  always  pay  you  that 
deference. 

3.  Our  friendship  has  so  much  weight  with  me  that  there  is 
nothing  which  I  would  not  willingly  undertake  for  its  sake. 

4.  I  shall  chiefly  devote  to  writing  whatever  time  the  in- 
trigues of  my  enemies,  the  causes  of  my  friends,  or  the  inter- 
f?sts  of  the  public  shall  allow  me. 


Two  substantives  are  often  put  for  one  ;  each 
however  having  its  proper  force  and  meaning ; 
for  they  are  not  redundant^  but  are  intended  to 
give  greater  perspicuity  or  harmony  to  the  sen- 
tence :  as  instead  of  offendere  homineni,  we  shall 
say  offendere  animxim  hominis^  because  it  is  his 
mind  which  is  offended  ;  and  offendere  hominem 
might  be  mistaken  for,  to  find  a  man.  We  shall 
be  more  accurate  in  saying  gladi  mucrone  ictus^ 
£  than  gladio.  Thus  Cicero  uses  vis  Deorum,  ra- 
^  tiojiducicej  veritatis  necessitas  riaturce^  res  ratio- 


147 

mim.  But  though  Dii^  fiducia^  Veritas^  natura^ 
rationes^  might  have  been  sufficient,  still  we  must 
suppose  that  the  other  substantives  convey  a  pe- 
culiar meaning  to  give  more  force  to  the  others. 

EXAiMPLES. 

1 .  How  wise  and  fortunate  are  they,  who  by  a  happy  al- 
chymy  of  mind  can  turn  even  the  most  disas^reeable  circum- 
stances of  life  to  pleasure  and  advantage.  Thus  even  sores 
and  diseases  may  benefit  a  man^  though  they  are  attended  ev- 
en with  excruciating  pains. 

2.  Say  now  that  you  were  over-reached  by  him  who  refus- 
ed such  an  immense  sum  of  money  not  on  account  of  his  ijido- 
lence,  but  on  account  of  his  magnificence* — (Here  inertiam  la* 
boHs  may  be  used,  and  followed  by  magnificent iam  Uberalita" 
lis,  for  the  sake  of  that  concinnitas,  or  equality  of  the  clauses, 
which  we  shall  mention  afterwards.) 

3.  The  whole  senate  (the  state  or  condition  of)  the  judi- 
ciary proceedings,  the  whole  commonwealth  itself  has  under-* 
gone  a  revolution. 

*4.  Nor  can  any  thing  so  ruinous  or  destnictive  befal  the 
destinies  of  mankind,  as  for  tnith,  integrity,  honor,  and  reli- 
gion, to  be  banished  or  rejected  by  this  honorable  body. 

5.  The  other  maintains,  that  death  was  not  designed  by  the 
immortal  Gods  as  a  punishment,  but  is  either  imposed  upon 
us  by  nature,  or  intended  as  a  cessation  of  our  toils  and  mise- 
ries, so  that  the  wise  never  suffer  it  unwillingly ;  that  bonds 
and  imprisonment,  especially  if  perpetual,  are  contrived  for 
the  punishment  of  detestable  crimes. 


The  pronoun  personal  may  be   rendered  by 
the  pronoun  substantive. 

EXAMPLE. 

Though  Caesar  had  never  been  mi/  friend,  but  had  always 
shown  a  disinclination  to  me,  though  he  had  slighted  my  friend- 


148 

ship,  and  acted  the  part  of  an  implicable  enemy  Iu\».im.>  im», 
yet  after  the  erreat  things  he  has  done,  and  still  continues  to  do, 
1  could  not  help  loving  him. 


It  may  be  observed  that  the  dativ^e  acquisitive 
is  often  elegantly  used  instead  of  the  genitive. 


EXAMPLE. 


When  they  heard  that  he  had  been  condemned  unheard,  they 
threw  themselves  at  the  judge's  feet,  and  prayed  that  he  might 
be  saved  from  the  gallows. 


The  English  adjective  may  be  sometimes  ren- 
dered by  a  substantive,  and  the  word  with 
which  it  agrees  be  put  in  the  genitive  case  :  as, 

You  will  easily  judge  hoxc  few  orators  there 
are  and  have  been : 

Facillimt  quanta  oratorum  sit,  semperqxie  fuerit 
paucitas,  phdicabis : 

Instead  oi\Qti(impauci .... 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  Ancient  friendship,  the  dignity  of  the  man,  and  my  con- 
stant practice  througli  life,  jointly  called  upon  me  to  defend 
him. 

2.  A  good  voice,  though  it  is  very  desirable,  is  not  in  our 
power  to  acquire,  but  to  exercise  and  iinj»rov*»  it,  is  certaiidy 
in  the  power  of  every  man. 

3.  No  one  could  resist  the  brave  Hercules. 


This   variation  generally  takes   place  when 


149 


the  chief  stress  lies  upon  the  adjectives,  as  im- 
plying a  cause,  reason,  or  something  like  it ;  we 
would  not  say,  coximiis  bonitatem  panis  .  • . .  or 
locutus  Slim  cum  doctrind  viri. 


A  substantive  may  be  changed  into  a  verb  by 
a  periphrasis :  as, 

Nor  could  I  foresee  that  accident : 

Neque  quod  accidit,  prcevidere  poteram* 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  Nor  did  I  prognosticate  those  events^  when  I  said  tliey 
would  happen  ;  but  I  was  only  urged  by  my  fears,  lest  they 
should  happen  5  when  I  considered  the  possibility  of  them, 
and  at  the  same  time  foresaw  thtJir  pernicious  tendency,  if 
they  should  happen. 

*2.  For  when  by  reason  of  the  adjournment  of  the  Comitia, 
I  found  myself  thrice  cliosen  first  Praetor  by  all  the  centuries, 
it  was  easy  for  me  from  thence  to  collect  both  what  your  senti- 
ments of  me  were,  and  what  qualifications  you  required  in  oth- 
ers. 

*3.  W^hen  we  consider  the  benefits  we  have  received  from 
our  parents,  who  in  our  helpless  infancy  watched  over  us  with 
the  tenderest  afiection,  and  whose  cares  and  anxieties  attended 
us  in  our  entrance  into  the  world,  should  they  not  command 
€very  return  of  filial  duty  and  affectionate  regard. 

4.  But  I  make  this  concession  to  you,  :hat  3'ou  may  pass 
over  those  things  which,  from  your  silence,  you  allow  not  to 
exist. 


But  above  all  a  SUPERLATIVE  will  admit 
of  many  different  modes  of  variation. 

A  superlative  is  elegantly  changed  into  a 

14 


150 

coni])arativc,  with  a  negative,  especially  with 
the  pronoun  relative,  qui^  quce^  quod ;  as, 
A  most  courteous  and  learned  man  : 
Vir  quo  non  alius  humcmior,  quo  nan  doctior 
alter. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  He  was  most  eminent^  and  indeed  unparalleled  in  his 
virtues  and  vices. — (Say,  nihil fuii.) 

2.  Plato,  who  teas  the  most  ingenious  ami  learned  of  men, 
laid  it  down  as  a  maxim,  that  those  republics  would  enjoy  a 
lasting  happiness,  whose  government  was  in  the  hands  of  the 
wise  and  the  learned. 

3.  The  mind  of  that  man,  whom  we  call  the  most  fortunate  ^ 
is  sometimes  corroded  by  secret  cares  and  troubles,  which  are 
concealed  from  the  observation  of  other  men  ;  thus  the  can- 
ker-worm, though  invisible  to  the  eye,  often  destroys  the  bud 
of  the  rose,  which  is  the  fairest  of  flowers. 


Observe  that  quo  is  more  elegantly  used  with 
a  compeuative  than  ut^  to  express  the  purpose. 


EXAMPLES. 


1.  He  paid  his  debts,  that  he  might  lead  a  happier  life. 

2.  We  broke  open  the  seal,  that  we  might  detect  the  con- 
spirators the  more  easily. 


Or  it  may  be  rendered  comparatively,  with 
an  affirmative,  either  by  an  interrogative  or  a 
repetition  of  the  words  :  as, 

A  most  courteous  man  : 

Vir  humanuSy  si  quisquam  omninb  humanus. 

Or :  Quis^  or,  quid  hoc  viro  humamor^  or  /m- 
manius  ? 


151 

EXAMPLES. 


1 .  Believe  me,  your  brother  is  a  most  studious  maw. 

2.  Croesus  was  the  richest  man  in  the  world ;  and  yet  nei- 
ther his  numerous  forces,  nor  his  riches,  could  avail  any  thing, 
against  the  attack  of  a  small  but  disciplined  army,  inured  to 
poverty  and  hardships. 


A  superlative  receives  an  additional  force,  if 
its  comparative  is  introduced  with  it,  as  having 
more  power  than  the  superlative ;  in  this  man- 
ner, 

Plato  a  inost  learned  man : 

Plato  quovis  doctissiino  doctior. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  In  this,  indeed,  I  am  more  miserable  than  you^  because 
my  calamity  is  accompanied  with  yours,  and  common  to  both. 

2.  Farewell  then,  my  friend,  and  be  persuaded  that  you  are 
most  dear  to  my  heart,  but  much  dearer  if  you  can  receive  any 
pleasure  from  these  precepts  and  admonitions. 

3.  Be  persuaded  that  those  ju-e  the  fairest  talents,  whicli 
are  employed  for  the  good  of  others. 


Cicero  and  the  t>est  writers  often  increase 
the  force  of  the  superlative  by  the  addition  of 
such  expressions  as  these,  unus  omnium^  tmiiSy 
sine  controversidj  apprimt^  insigniter^  egregie :  as, 

You  seem  to  me  a  juost  choice  and  excellent 
speaker : 

Unus  omnium  in  dicendo  milii  videris  Icctlssi- 
mtis, 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  I  dare  pronounce  him  to  be  the  7nost  eminent  in  the  stale 
for  genius  and  iudnstry. 


152 


J.  I  cannot  even  promise  it  to  that  most  learned  and  religious 
nan.  and  who  enjoys  your  greatest  favor  and  friendship. 

3.  Horace  derived  his  delightful  urbanity  from  tlie  society 
o(  Macenas,  that  niost  polite  of  all  men.  and  from  the  court 
of  Augustus,  that  best  school  of  vW  true  elegance. 


The  variation  of  the  superlative  may  be  ele- 
gantly made  by  these  verbs,  contenderej  certare, 
superare^  or  by  cedere ;  as, 

Cicero  was  the  most  eloquent  of  orators : 
Nemo  oratorum  cum  Cicerone  contendere  audet 
eloqttentid. 

EXAMPLES. 

1 .  Your  brother  is  the  greatest  lover  of  literatiure  that  ever 
\ras. 

2.  Those  who  love  and  cultivate  the  liberal  arts,  are  always 
the  most  humane  and  courteous  of  men. 

3.  Alexander  the  Great  was  the  most  ambitious  of  heroes, 
vvho  is  even  said  to  have  wept,  because  he  had  no  other  world 
ro  conquer. 


riic  superlative  may  also  be  elegantly  varied 
by  these  forms,  tarn  followed  by  qucim^  qui^  or 
tam^  qmni  qui  maximi ;  by  adeb^  ita  ut ;  tantus^ 
quanius  ;  ceque  or  perinde,  atque :  as, 

This  man  possesses  the  greatest  humanity  : 

Huraanitas  in  hoc  tiro  tarn  magnay  quam  qucc 
inaxima  :  or. 

Hand  est  quisquam  omnium  iequ^e  hiimanus,  at- 
que  hie  vir,  ^c. 


EXAMPLES. 


1.  Nero  VfdLS  the  most  cruel  tyrant  that  ever  lived. 


15:^ 

2.  He  fought  with  unparalleled  bravery,  and  overcame  the 
« iieuiy. 

3.  The  letters,  which  he  sent  to  the  senate,  were  the  most 
elegant  that  can  be  conceived. 

4.  The  study  of  physic  is  ve?y,  or  the  most,  useful. 

In  these  different  forms  something  must  be 
added,  which  the  judgment  of  the  scholar  will 
easily  suggest :  as,  Tantus^  quantiis,  nunquam 
antecl :  aded^  ut  nihil  supra ;  ut  nulla  fieri  possit 
accession  nihil  addi  possit ;  ut  nulli  sint  conferen- 
diy  ^c. 


Instead  of  qwo,  eo,  or  quanio  before  a  com- 
parative, a  sentence  may  be  elegantly  varied  by 
using  ut  quisque  in  the  first  part,  and  ita  in  the 
latter,  with  superlatives  :  as. 

The  more  a  man  excels  in  greatness  of  soul, 
the  more  he  wishes  to  be  the  first  of  men  : 

Ut  quisque  animi  magnitudine  maxime  excellitj 
ita  maxime  vult  omnium  princeps  esse. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  Thus  for  the  future,  the  more  opulent  any  man  may  be, 
the  greater  enemy  he  will  appear  to  the  Romans. 

2.  The  more  abandoned  any  man  has  been,  the  safer  wiil 
he  be. 

3.  The  more  eloquent  any  one  is,  the  more  he  dreads  \\\< 
difficuhies  of  speaking,  the  various  tunis  and  chances  of  his 
oration,  and  the  expectation  of  men. 

4.  The  more  diligently  a  boy  attends  to  his  stutlies,  the  more 
learned  he  will  be  :  the  better  a  husbandman  manures  liis  land. 
Sindwith  the  greater  Vdbor  and  care  he  ploughs  his  fields,  tht 
more  plentiful  crops  they  will  yield. 


Quot  may  be  changed  into  quantum,  and  tot  intc 

14* 


154 


iantnm^  when  they  are   meant   to   express   not 
merely  numbers,  but  magnitude. 


EXAMFLE. 


How  many  books  you  have  !  If  we  were  to  estimate  your 
knowledge  by  the  size  of  your  librarvj  you  must  be  thouglit  the 
!uo!>t  learned  man  in  the  universe. 


Quot  may  also  be  changed  into  cjuolus  quis- 
(juej  with  a  kind  of  exclamation  indirectly  ex- 
pressive of  paucity  of  numbers  :  as^ 

Ho2V  many  will  believe  this  ? 

Quotiis  quisque  hoc  credet  ? 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  Well  may  you  commend  their  patriotism  ;  ior  how  tttmty 
ure  there,  who  will  voluntarily  lay  down  their  lives  fv^r  their 
country  ? 

*2.  How  mamj  are  there,  who  can  escape   reports  in  a  city 

- '  v^'"^'  '"'dieted  to  scandal  ? 


Observe  that  the  particle  enim  is  elegantly  in- 
vrtf'iX  between  quotus  and  quisque. 


EXAMPLE. 


t'or  how  Jew  are  there,  who  understand  the  art  of  numbers 

nd  ii;f;isiir(»  ? 


i'or  octodcaiti  and  novcmdccini  it  is  more  cic- 
Lfant  to  use  duodevigiiUi,  and  undcviginti,  and 
also,  duodevicesimusj  undevlccsimus^  duodetri' 
Lsinia^  ^-c.  and  to    express   a  large   uncertain 


number,  the  Latins  generally  v^^r^^^BsMi^^ 
tum^  mille  and  sexccnties^  millies^  ceiUies. 

An  adjective  and  a  participle  are  sometimes 
used  for  a  substantive  :  as* 

I  saw  him  at  his  departure  : 

Vidi  eum  projiciscentem, 

EX\3IPLFS. 

1 .  Xenophon  represents  the  elder  Cyrus  at  his  death,  as 
expressing  his  belief  of  the  soul's  immortality. 

2.  Cato  learnt  the  Greek  language  in  his  old  age, 

3.  This  he  affirmed  in  his  life'time ;  and  the  wisdom, 
which  distilled  from  his  lips  was  so  pleasing  to  my  soul,  that  I 
shall  retain  and  cherish  his  wholesome  precepts  as  long  as  I 
live. 


A  substantive  joined  with  the  preposition  jt^/oji- 
ter^  ob,  ^c.  will  be  elegantly  put  in  the  case, 
which  was  to  have  been  governed  by  the  verb, 
the  preposition  left  out,  and  the  other  substan- 
tive, which  was  to  have  been  the  case  of  the 
verb,  will  be  put  in  the  genitive  ;  as,  instead  of 
saying  invidere  alicui  oh  divitias,  we  shall  say  in- 
videre  divitiis  alicujus. 

EXAMPLES'. 

1.  If  you  had  succeeded  in  this  business,  f  should  have  con- 
gratulated you  on  your  good  fortune. 

2.  If  I  speak  with  too  much  freedom,  I  may  he  forgiven  on 
account  of  my  youth. 

3.  And  therefore  this  is  the  answer  which  I  return  to  yoiu* 
letter,  in  which  you  would  fain  throw  out  some  threats  and  in- 
vectives against  me  :  I  freely ybr^/r^  you  for  the  concern  you 
express,  and  even  commend  you  for  it,  for  I  have  been  taught 
by  my  own  fjjelings  the  full  force  of  fraternal  afTection. 


And  in  the  same  manner  a  substantive  joined 
witli  these  prepositions  06,  propter^  per^  ^c.  may 
by  a  kind  of  prosopopoeia  become  the  nomina- 
tive case  to  the  verb,' the  prepositions  being  left 
out :  as  for,  You  are  become  famous  on  account 
of  your  learning:  say,  your  learning  has  render- 
ed you  famous. 

EXAMPLES. 

1 .  t  shall  attach  myself  to  his  most  particular  friends,  and 
thus  I  shall  insinuate  myself  into  an  intimacy  with  him,  from 
which  I  have  hitherto  been  excluded  on  account  of  my  great 
diffidence, 

2.  I  am  now  deprived  of  those  comforts,  to  which  /  hadac- 
(customed  myself  by  nature^  by  inclination^  and  by  habit. 


The  pronoun  qui^  cjuce,  quod^  is  often  elegantly 
used  for  a  preposition  ;  as, 

For  the  love  that  you  bear  me  : 
Qui  tuns  estergame  amor. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  There  is  no  sorrow  which  the  hand  of  time  will  not  les- 
sen and  alleviate.  But  it  would  be  beneath  you  to  lay  your 
whole  hope  and  expectation  on  time,  and  not  to  exert  yourself 
and  make  nse  of  your  own  wisdom  to  apply  the  remedy  to  the 
wound  you  have  received  ;  and  if  departed  spirits  are  endowed 
with  any  sense  of  perception,  from  your  daughter's  love  to 
you,  and  her  affection  for  all  her  friends  and  relatives,  she 
must  be  highly  displeased  to  see  you  so  disconsolate. 

2.  From  his  great  learning,  it  was  expected  that  he  would 
have  written  much  better. 


A  verb,  but  chiefly  an  infinitive,  is  frequently 


157 

used  for  a  substantive,  and  is  often  necessarily 
so,  where  the  Latin  noun  either  does  not  exist, 
or  would  be  very  inelegant :  as, 

Your  desertion  of  the  unhappy  was  most  shame- 
ful: 

Miseros  deseruisse  tibi  turpissimum  erat. 

EXAMPLES. 

*1.  Instead  of  prying  curiously  into  the  lives  of  others,  and 
censuring  their  conduct,  we  should  judge  ourselves  with  the 
greatest  severity,  and  that  will  induce  us  to  pardon  venial  of- 
fences, and  to  consider  that  error  is  the  lot  of  human  nature. 
(Begin  by  "  we  should  judge  ourselves,"  with  potius,  accord- 
ing to  rule,  p.  18.) 

2.  Though  fortune  should  frown  upon  a  man,  yet  his  great 
esteem  of  virtue  and  the  preservation  of  equanimity  in  the  most 
arduous  circumstances,  will  always  render  him  cheerful,  and 
even  happy. 

3.  Thus  you  see  wJiat  small  value  those  men  have  for  their 
body  who  regard  their  honor. 

4.  An  accurate  knowledge  of  the  arts  softens  our  manners. 


It  is  often  necessary  to  make  use  of  a  verb  in- 
stead of  adjectives,  as  in  these  instances :  Vix 
credi  potest^  It  is  incredible.  Vix  fieri  potest^  It 
is  impossible,  &c. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  Though  the  Deity  is  invisible  to  man,  yet  when  we  con- 
sider the  wonderful  rapidity,  with  which  the  earth  moves  round 
its  axis,  and  how  constantly  it  performs  its  annual  revolutions, 
when  we  see  the  fruits  of  the  earth,  the  variety  and  the  regu- 
lar changes  of  the  seasons,  by  which  they  are  brought  to  matu- 
rity, and  every  thing  provided  for  the  use  and  conveniency  of 
man,  who  will  say  that  he  does  not  perceive  a  divine  being, 


158 

which  rules,  protects,  and  governs  all  things  with  infinite  power 
and  wisdom  ? 

2.  It  is  indeed  impossible  that  I  should  be  deceived  in  this 
business. 


The  word  toius,  to  render  it  still  more  forci- 
ble, may  be  varied  by  quclm  longum  est ;  quan- 
tus  quanius  est ;  quam  late  patet ;  as, 

The  ichole  sea. 

I  passed  the  whole  night  without  sleep. 

This  is  all  your  own. 


A  verb  is  also,  with  great  propriety,  used  for 
an  advt^rb. 

EXAMJPLKS. 

1.  You  write  much  oftener  than  usual, 

2.  I  was  seized  with  such  a  dizziness,  when  I  stood  upon 
the  brow  of  that  edifice,  that  I  almost  or  nearly  fell — (parum 
abfuerit.) 

3.  I  beg  you  not  to  suppose  that  I  write  to  you  less  frequent- 
ly i\idii\  formerly  from  having  forgotten  you  ;  but  it  arises  from 
the  very  ill  state  of  my  health,  from  which,  liowevcr,!  am  now 
recovering,  or  it  is  owing  to  my  absence  from  Rome,  so  that  I 
knew  no  one,  who  was  going  to  you. 

4.  I  cannot  possibly  read  this  book  in  the  time  dlowed. 


No7i  modo^  followed  by  sed  etiam  may  be  va- 
ried by  tantxim  abest  tity  tit ;  or  sometimes  now 
dicam. 

EXA3irL£J^. 

1.  Not  only  do  1  not  look  upon  pliilosophy  as  able  to  dis- 


159 

cover  and  point  out  the  true  method  of  living,  and  to  be  pro- 
ductive of  perfect  happiness,  but  I  also  think  that  no  set  of 
men  stand  so  much  in  need  of  others  to  direct  them  how  to 
live,  as  these  pretenders  to  philosophy. 

2.  No  flow  of  genius,  no  force  of  eloquence,  no  power  of 
description  are  sufficient  not  only  to  embellish,  hut  even  to  re- 
count your  exploits. 


The  verb  oportet  may  be  varied  by  non  pos- 
sum non. 


EXAMPLES. 


1 .  They  must  indeed  live  in  the  greatest  prodigality,  who 
while  they  are  squandering  their  property,  entertain  the  hopes 
of  possessing  ours. 

2.  I  was  obliged  to  give  you  this  advice.- 


Verbs,  and  particularly  participles,  are  often 
used  for  preposition*,  as  privatus,  instructiiSy 
prceditus^  ornatus^  ^c.  as, 

A  soldier  will  scarcely  fight  without  armour : 

Miles  carens,  or,  non  instructus  armis  vix  pug- 
nabit. 

For  sine. 
Though  a  man  should  possess  all  the  advantages  of  power 
and  fortune,  though  whole  nations  should   obey  his  nod,  and 
thousands  should  offer  him  the  incense  of  adulation,  yet  how 
could  he  lead  a  happy  and  a  pleasant  life  without  friends  ? 

For  cum. 

1 .  When  his  fair  promises  had  lulled  us  into  security,  and 
we  were  enjoying  the  slumbers  of  quiet  repose,  after  the  fa- 
tigues of  the  day,  he  came  suddenly  upon  us  with  a  great  troop 
of  soldiers,  and  surprised  us  in  our  tents. 


160 

2.  He  has  retired  into  the  country,  and  now  lives  (luitt  ana 
content,  having  married  a  woman  with  a  great  deal  of  money. 

For  06,  propter. 

Here  these  participles  duduSj  impulsus,  motusy 
permotusj  impeditusj  perterritus,  coactus,  ^c.  are 
elegantly  introduced :  as, 

He  betook  himself  to  another  quarter  throughj 
or  on  account  of^  his  poverty : 

Egestate  coactus  alio  se  contulit. 

*1.  They,  who  from  mere  patriotic  motives,  drag  forth  any 
man  before  the  tribunal  of  public  justice,  neither  through  pri- 
vate injury,  nor  private  pique,  nor  through  any  hope  of  reward, 
should  seriously  consider  beforehand  not  merely  what  cares 
and  difficulties  they  must  undergo  for  the  present,  but  also  the 
troubles  and  anxieties  they  reserve  to  themselves  for  tlie  re- 
mainder of  their  lives. 

2.  Thus  this  great  and  illustrious  man  was  put  to  the  most 
cruel  death  by  a  ruffian,  stained  with  crimes  of  the  blackest 
die,  and  he,  whom  his  enemies  had  spared  on  account  of  his 
worth  and  dignity,  met  with  his  death  from  the  hands  of  a  pre- 
tended friend  :  however,  I  proceeded  directly  to  his  tent, 
where  I  found  two  of  his  freedmen  and  a  few  of  his  slaves  : 
they  said  the  rest  had  fled  through  fear,  when  they  saw  their 
master  murdered  just  before  his  tent. 

3.  On  account  of  these  considerations,  and  the  authority 
and  persuasions  of  Orgetorix,  they  resolved  to  prepare  every 
thing  necessary  for  an  expedition. 

For  post. 

1 .  j4ft€r  supper  he  went  to  bed.     (^Ccenatus.) 

2.  Truth  after  long  oppression,  will  at  length  emerge,  and 
shine  forth  the  brighter. 

3.  My  gratitude  will  be  due  to  you  even  after  your  death. 

To  this  also  belong  ablatives  absolute. 

1.  This  happened  after  the  death  of  your  father. 

2.  After  this  battle,  he  resolved  not  to  admit  them  to  any 


terms  of  peace,  since  they  had  behaved  with  so  much  dupHcity 
and  treachery. 

For  in,  ex. 

1.  In  his  way  through  the  maritime  states,  he  visited  the 
Veneti,  and  after  having  passed  the  river  Ligeris,  he  came 
among  the  Gauls,  with  whom  he  staid  some  time,  and  then  re- 
turned to  the  Roman  province. 

2.  The  old  man  was  sitting  in  his  gown^  when  having  ap- 
proached him  respectfully  we  saluted  him. 

3.  From  experience  of  the  same  misfortune,  I  have  learned 
to  commisserate  your  fate,  and  will  do  my  best  endeavours  to 
relieve  your  distress. 


A  substantive  is  often  used  instead  of  a  con- 
junction or  a  preposition. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  Some  were  of  opinion  that  they  were  forthwith  to  be  re» 
ceived  and  assisted ;  others  that  they  were  to  be  esteemed  as 
rebels,  and  unworthy  of  help.     (Say,  loco,) 

2.  Such  an  eagerness  to  repair  their  dishonor  seized  the 
whole  army,  that  nobody  needed  the  command  of  either  tri- 
bune or  centurion  ;  and  every  one,  even  as  a  punishment,  im- 
posed upon  himself  labors  extraordinary. 

3.  Because  there  had  been  an  alarm  in  the  night  before  Cae- 
sar's camp,  they  took  it  for  an  argument,  that  there  could  be 
no  stealing  out  without  discovery. 


An  adverb  is  often  used  for  a  substantive :  as, 
To  speak  ivith  subtility  and  evasion  : 
Subtiliter  et  versute  dicere. 

EXAMPLES. 

I.   With  what  prudence  and  dispatch  did  he   transact  this 
business ! 

15 


162 

2.  He  read  that  book  with  so  much  earnestness  that  he 
secmetl  to  devour  its  contents. 

3.  With  truthj  I  can  say,  that  il  you  consider  the  (Hfiicult 
service  he  had  to  perform,  the  obstinate  resistance  of  the  ene- 
my, and  the  disadvantages  of  an  intricate  country,  he  conduct- 
ed the  army  with  great  consideration  and  circumspection. 

And  especially  ito,  followed  by  si  or  nt,  is  of- 
ten used  for  on  that  conditio)^  with  such  an  effect, 
restriction. 

EXAMPLES. 

1 .  It  is  very  expedient  that  there  should  be  many  accusers 
m  a  state,  that  terror  may  restrain  insolence  and  audacity ;  with 
this  restriction,  however,  it  is  expedient,  that  we  do  not  be- 
come the  sport  and  victims  of  wanton  accusations. 

*2.  This  difference  of  opinion  in  our  discussions  being  car- 
ried on  till  night,  the  sitting  was  adjourned,  and  I  happened 
that  evening  to  sup  with  Pompey ;  I  was  pleased  with  this 
seasonable  opportunity,  more  than  any  one  I  had  ever  enjoy- 
ed, because  since  your  departure,  this  had  been  to  us  the  most 
favorable  and  honorable  day  in  the  senate ;  I  therefore  spoke 
to  him  icith  such  an  effect,  that  I  seemed  to  turn  the  mind  of 
my  man  from  every  other  consideration  to  promoting  and 
defending  your  dignity. 

3.  I  know  that  you  will  use  every  means  in  your  power  to 
be  with  us  as  soon  as  possible  ;  I  desire  it,  however,  on  this 
condition,  that  you  do  not  make  too  much  liaste. 


Undt  is  very  frequently  used  for  a  quo,  a  qud, 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  The  m^n,  from  whom  you  came,  i.>  .i  \try  honest  man. 

2.  The  circumstance,  from  which  you  set   out,  is  so   well 
kno\vn  to  all,  that  it  needs  no  further  consideration. 


Prepositions  are  often  changed  one  for  an- 
other. 


1 63 

EXAMPLES. 

Ob,  for  ante,  is  often  used. 

To  place  before  one's  eyes. 

Prre  for  ante. 
Driving  a  herd  before  him,  he  had  passed  the  river  in  swim- 

iiiing. 

Pro  for  ante. 

1.  Had  he  not  in  the  hearing  of  the  people,  sitting  before 
the  temple  of  Castor,  said  that  no  one  could  conquer,  but  he 
who  had  conquered  ? 

2.  Caesar  stationed  the  legions  before  the  entrenchment. 

Per  for  iii. 

1 .  The  war  from  the  Sabines  was  by  far  the  greatest,  for 
they  did  nothing  in  heat  or  anger,  nor  did  they  make  sliow  of 
war  before  they  were  seen  in  the  field. 

2.  He  said  so  in  joke. 

Per  for  propter. 
I  cannot  do  that  on  account  of  my  ill-health. 

E  or  ex  for  in. 

The  Celtae  assailed  the  town  Titurium  with  great  violence 
in  their  way. 

Pro  for  in. 
Whether  a  greater  injury  can  be  offered  to  a  prince,  you  in 
your  prudence  judge. 

Apud  for  in. 

He  was  a  wise  son  in  rlutarch  who,  being  told  by  a  friend 
that  his  father  would  disinherit  him,  answered,  he  will  do  no- 
thing but  what  he  should  do. 

Observe  that  Cicero  never  uses  the  phrases  / 
laudem ;  in  honorem  :  the  best  writers  will  sa\ 
honoris  gratia  ;  laudis  gratia. 

A  or  ab  for  the  English  particle  of. 

1.  Let  us  go  under  that  shade,  to  avoid  the  heat  q/'the  sun. 

2.  Cares  are  conversant  in  palaces ;  they  fear  not  the  ght- 
tering  o/'gold. 


1(^4 

3.  He  was  of  the  bed-chamber  to  three  kings  succe^i\<as. 

4.  She  is  not  afraid  of  the  snow. 

Ad  for  circiter^  speaking  of  uncertain  num- 
bers :  but  chiefly  as  an  adverb  without  any  casr. 

1.  When  he  was  about  fifteen  years  old. 
?.  ^6oM^  four  thousand  men  were  slain. 

A  or  ab  for  post. 
After  these  injunctions  he  dismissed  the  assembly. 

Secundum  ior  post. 

After  wliich  games  only  a  few  days  elapsetf. 

Pro  for  secundum. 

He  lives  according  to  his  dignity. 

De  for  secundum. 

According  to  my  opinion. 

Ex  for  secundum. 

He  has  done  every  thing  according  to  law. 

^rf  for  secundum. 
Triflei*s  and  deceivers  who  speak  every  thing  according  to 
Uieir  inclination,  but  nothing  accorrfm^  to  truth. 

^Modern  writers  very  commonly  use  juxta  in- 

lead  oi secundum  ;  but  very  improperly  :  as,  ac- 

ording  to  Livy  ;  according  to  Sallust :   Juxta 

':iallustium,  ^^c.     It  should  be,  Secundum  Sallus- 

Iu7n,  or  teste  Sallustio^  ^^c. 

Pro  for  ob  or  propter. 
Do  this  on  account  of  the  friendship  that  has  long  subsisted 
between  us. 

Prie  for  ob. 
1  cannot  speak  ybr,  or  on  account  of  my  tears. 

Ad  for  ob. 

The  senate  had  voted  new  levies  on  account  of  the  report 
of  the  impending  war. 


A  preposition  may  be  used  for  a  substantive. 


[Go 

EXAMPLES. 

A  for  (l  parte. 

1 .  He  stood  on  my  side. 

2.  The  army  stood  firm  on  the  side  of  the  inlaniry. 

Ad  for  in  regard  to ;  hy  reason  of  \  in  companson 

of' 

1 .  I  will  follow  another  course  less  severe  indeed  in  regard 
to  the  criminal,  but  more  useful  with  regard  to  the  publir 
safety. 

2.  We  know  him  to  be  a  good  man,  and  not  illiterate,  but 
nothing  in  comparison  of  Persius. 

Prce  and|;rd  for  in  comparison  of;  in  respect  of: 
in  proportion  to. 

1.  Our  littleness,  in  companson  of  the  bigness  of  their  bod- 
ies, is  matter  of  contempt  with  most  of  the  Gauls. 

2.  The  King,  in  consideration  of  his  royal  dignity,  and  in 
respect  of  his  services,  was  most  unworthily  treated. 

3.  Education  is  generally  the  worse,  in  proportion  to  liic 
wealth  and  grandeur  of  the  parents. 

Conjunctions  are  often  changed  one  fur  an 
other. 

EXAMPLES. 

Cum  for  postquam. 
It  is  not  yet  110  years  ago,  since  Lucius  Pi.so  got  a  law  to 
i)e  enacted  against  the  corruption  of  magistrates.— (This  mighl 
also  be  rendered  by  ex  quo-) 

Observe  that  instead  of  saying  die  anteqxuun 
venit,  on  the  day  before  he  came ;  or  die  post- 
quam  venit^  on  the  day  after  he  came  ;  we  elegant- 
ly say,  pridie  quarn  venit^  and  posiridie  ipuun 
venit. 

Usque  eo  for  adeo. 

Dionysius  the  tyrant,  being  banished  S>Tacase,  kept  a  school 
at  Corinth.  So  impossible  weis  it  for  him  to  live  without  em- 
pire. 

Usque  adeo  and  usque  for  adeo. 
^  15 


166 

Some  men  are  so  possessed  with  ambition,  tliat  they  are  not 
content  to  have  lived  magnificently,  unless  they  also  are  bm'ied 
so. 

Ut  for  7iamy  ct,  when  preceded  by  tarn,  ita, 
tantus,  ^'C. :  this  is  done  in  order  to  draw  sen- 
tences closer  together,  when  the  one  clause  jis 
the  effect  or  the  consequence  of  the  other,  as  we 
have  seen  before. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  I  am  in  the  greatest  perplexity  and  terror,  and  1  know 
neither  what  to  do,  nor  which  way  to  turn  myself. 

2    How  could  I  be  so  inhuman,  and  refuse  you  your  request. 

3.  On  the  arrival  of  this  detachment,  a  great  change  was 
produced  in  our  favor,  for  many  of  the  soldiers,  who  before 
lay  oppressed  with  wounds,  now  resuming  courage,  and  sujv 
porting  themselves  with  their  shields,  renewed  the  engage* 
jiient. 


Instead  of  quidcm  followed  by  sed  or  tamen^ 
the  Latins  more  frequentlj*  use  ctsi,  quanquamj 
HceU  ^'C*  as, 

We  cannot  indeed  do  everj^  thing,  but  wc 
jnust  use  every  exertion : 

Etsi  omnia  non  cfficerc  possimu^,  fnmcn  omnes 
iitrcos  inlcndere  debcmus, 

EXAMPLES. 

*  J .  I  indeed  am  least  of  all  fitted  to  offer  you  any  consolation, 
jncelhave  been  so  much  affected  by  your  distresses,  as  my- 
tlfto  stand  in  need  of  comfort:    however^  as  there  is  still 

mic  difference  between  my  own  sorrow  and  that  bitterness  ol 
.,  oe,  with  which  your  heart  is  wrung,  I  felt  that  it  would  show 
a  want  of  friendship,  and  of  that  regard,  which  I  have  always 
expressed  for  you,  to  obiicrv*^ ;«  ;i':'}''«'  nf  !iu|i(r<Tence  in  your 
,reat  afflictions. 

2.  I  myself,  indtcd,  who  aiu  desirous  (>1  administering  com- 
fort to  you,  stand  in-the  greatest  need  of  consolation,  because 
nothing  of  late  has  affected  me  more  than  your  misfortune  : 


167 

liowever,  I  not  only  most  earnestly  exhort  you,  but  outreatarHi 
conjure  you  by  the  ties  of  our  mutual  friendship  that  you 
would  be  collected,  show  yourself  a  man,  and  consider  on  w!iat 
conditions  life  was  given  us,  and  in  what  times  we  were  born. 

There  are  other  kinds  of  variation,  which  we 
shall  just  slightly  mention,  but  which  are  chief- 
ly by  figures  of  rhetoric. 

EXAMPLES. 

An  affirmative  speech  into  a  negative. — Pru- 
dentia  est  vara,  non  vulgaris. 

An  affirmative  word  into  a  double  negative. 
Noil  indoctus  for  doctus  ;  nc7no  non  for  omnis  ; 
non  nihil  for  aliquid;  non  temnendus  for  prcecla- 
rus. 

But  these  negatives  have  sometimes  more 
force  than  the  affirmatives,  and  are  used  by  the 
figure  Litotes ;  as  Livy  calls  Polybius  no  con- 
temptihle  author.  As  we  say,  I  have  not  brought 
you  the  most  welcome  news  :  that  is,  very  melan- 
choly news.  But  the  use  of  these  will  depend 
upon  the  subject  and  the  judgment  of  the  schol- 
ar ;  for  sometimes  we  are  obliged  to  make  use 
of  a  negative,  because  either  the  affirmative  does 
not  exist,  is  inelegant,  or  obsolete  :  as. 

We  must  say,  non  facile^  because  dijficulter 
seldom  exists ;  non  sine  causdj  because  more  el- 
egant than  cum  causd. 

The  antecedent  for  the  consequent : — as,  vixit 
for  mortuus  est ;  fuit  Ilium  for  ruit ;  conferre  sig- 
na  for  pugnare. 

The  consequent  for  the  antecedent. — Hie  me 
nunquam  irridehit  for  non  me  decipiet ;    spealdng 


168 

of  a  great  man,  ornat  nosirmn  xrrbem  Ibr  habiutf 
in  urbe ;  for  mori^  caremus  ejus  consuetudine^  ^r. 

Cause  for  the  effect. — Mars  for  helium ;  vis 
Martis  for  belli ;  fcrrum  for  gladius ;  mens  for 
cogitationes ;  anima  for  vha,,  ^\ 

Effect  for  the  cause. — Cadere  for  interjici  in 
prcelioj  ^c. 

By  the  same  Metonyuiia,  the  containing  for 
the  contained. — Urbs  Icetatitr  for  homines;  do- 
mus  for  familia  ;  liters  for  omnis  doetrina^  k,c. 

A  synecdoche  of  the  member,  or  of  the  wliole  : 
as,  />a^er  est  sepultus^  or  imtris  corjms  est  sepuU 
turn. 

The  g^nus  for  the  species :  as,  niortalis  for 
homo:  orator  eloquentissimus  for  Cicero. 

The  species  for  the  fi;enus. — This  is  chiefly  us- 
ed in  proverbial  expressions :  as,  Punica  fides  for 
perfidia  ;  Romano  more  loqui  for  liberty  aperte,  ^c. 

This  variation,  if  not  carried  to  too  great  a 
length,  is  very  elegant,  and  tends  very  nmch  to 
exercise  the  genius,  and  improve  the  judgment. 

Thus,  this  simple  idea,  ''  from  ease  men  fall 
into  luxury,"  maybe  varied  by  means  of  figures 
of  rhetoric : 

By  Asyndeton: — Omnes  homines  ab  otio  ad 
luxuriam,  libidinem,  lasciviam  prcecipiti  cursu  ru- 
unt. 

By  Anaphora : — Nihil  est  hominibus  otiosis  ad 
luxuriam,  nihil  ad  lasciviam^  nihil  ad  libidinem  ac 
voluptatem  proclivius. 

By  a  Climax : — Ea  hominum  pent  omnium  est 
indoles^  nt  ab  otio  in  luxuriam^  ab  hnc  in  lascivi- 
am^ atque  ab  ed  denique  in  fccdissimas  libidines 
non  gradu,  sed  prcecipiti  cursiiferantur. 


169 

The  chief,  and  the  most  useful  of  these  figures' 
is  Metaphor,  which  indeed  often  creeps  imper- 
ceptibly into  the  style,  without  the  difficulty  of 
searching  for  it.  By  its  means  there  is  nothing 
for  which  a  suitable  name  or  description  may  not 
be  discovered.  Metaphor  is  shorter  than  a  com- 
parison, because,  instead  of  comparing,  it  is 
transformed  into  the  thing  itself  Comparison 
is,  when  a  man  has  done  any  thing  like  a  Lion  ; 
Metaphor,  when  it  is  said  of  the  man,  he  is  a  Li- 
on. So  that  Metaphor  may  be  defined,  the 
omission  of  the  particle  of  comparison,  as  tan- 
quam^  velut,  quasi  This  ti'ope  or  change  of  a 
word  or  idea  from  its  proper  and  simple  mean- 
ing into  another  corresponding  to  it,  must  be 
such  that  it  may  be  easily  understood  that  the 
subject  is  merely  varied  without  losing  its  origi- 
nal force.  Thus,  the  literal  idea: — Intempe- 
rance causes  death  :  Metaphorically,  Intempe- 
rantia  est  mater  mortis ;  instead  of  saying,  quasi 
mater. 

Sapientia  estfons  bene  dicendi. 

In  vere  cetatis  periit 


CHAPTER  V. 


COPIOUSNESS    OF    STYLE 


W  E  do  not  mean  here  that  copiousness  of 
style,  which  constituted  the  greatest  part  of  Ci- 
cero's  eloquence,   as   applied  to   oratory :  but 


170 

limiting  it  wholly  to  our  present  piu^pose,  we 
shall  here  include  in  its  meaning  scarcely  any 
thing  more  than  the  mere  substitution,  or  the 
addition  of  one  or  more  words  and  expressions 
to  the  sentence,  in  order  to  render  it  more  per- 
spicuous and  fuller,  but  not  too  verbose :  For 
instance,  if  it  was  necessary  to  give  more  strength 
to  the  style  idstead  of  simply  saying  minari^  we 
might  make  use  of  this  metaphor,  spirare  minas ; 
instead  of  amare^we  might  say  amore  Jlagiare^ 
^c.  In  aid  of  it,  however,  arguments,  compar- 
isons, testimonies,  and  examples,  may  some- 
times be  introduced ;  but  this  copiousness  would 
become  ridiculous,  if  it  did  not  tend  to  render 
the  ideas  and  the  whole  subject  more  forcible 
and  perspicuous.  In  this  case,  when  properly 
applied,  it  becomes  a  most  necessaiy  pait  of  el- 
egance. 

Where  one  word  is  added  to  another,  which 
might  have  been  sufficient  of  itself,  care  must  bo 
taken  that  the  latter  differs  in  some  degree  from 
the  former,  that  it  gives  weight  to  it,  and  tends 
to  explain  and  confirm  it,  as  it  would  be  wrong 
to  join  two  words  of  the  same  meaning,  or  per- 
Ibctly  synonimous,  as  edere  and  vesci. 

Cause  and  effect  are  often  joined  together, 
where  either  miglit  be  sufficient ;  as, 

I  saw  him  in  a  passion  : 

Iratum  vidiy  pallidumj  rubicundtim. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  For  may  I  never  enjoy,  in  conjunction  with  you,  tlie  hcn- 
efit  of  my  country's  safely,  if  tlie  eagerness  which  1  show  ii. 


171 

this  case,  proceeds  from  any  severity  of  temper,  (for  no  man 
has  less  of  it)  but  from  pure  humanity  and  demeiwy. — (Here 
clemency  is  the  effect  of  humanity,  and  therefore  not  synoni- 
mous,  though  either  of  the  two  might  have  been  snfficient.) 

*2.  If  indeed,  my  lords,  the  commonwealth,  which  owes  its 
preservation  to  my  labors,  and  the  dangers  I  have  encountered 
in  its  behalf,  had  not  the  power  by  its  own  dignity  to  revive  my 
own  Jirmness  of  mind  and  constancy  ;  yet  nature  has  im- 
planted that  principle  within  us,  that  we  cannot  but  hate  most 
cordially  the  man,who  has  always  been  the  object  of  our  fears, 
with  whom  we  have  often  struggled  for  the  preservation  of 
our  lives  and  fortunes,  and  whose  dark  intrigues  we  have  with 
difficulty  avoided. — (Here  constancy  and  firmness  of  mind  are 
properly  joined  together,  as  the  one  is  the  effect  of  the  other.) 


The  antecedent  and  the  consequent. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  See  you  not  how  those  men,  who,  according  to  the  tradi- 
tion of  poets,  have  inflicted  a  most  awful  punishment  upon  their 
mothers,  from  the  pious  wish  of  avenging  the  deaths  of  their 
fathers,  even  though  they  are  said  to  have  acted  in  obedience 
to  the  express  commands  and  oracles  of  the  Gods,  are  never- 
theless continually  harrassed  and  agitated  by  the  furies,  nor 
suffered  to  remain  in  one  place,  since  it  was  impossible  for 
them  to  listen  to  the  voice  of  nature  in  one  case,  without  an  act 
of  the  greatest  impiety  in  the  other. — (Here,  suffered  to  re- 
main  in  one  place,  is  added  as  the  consequent  of  agitated,  to 
give  greater  force,  though  the  sense  and  the  idea  might  have 
been  complete  without  it.) 

2.  For  nature,  niethinks,  has  begotten  and  formed  us  for 
greater  purposes  5  I  may  be  possibly  mistaken,  but  this  is  my 
firm  conviction  :  nor  can  I  think  that  Torquatus,  who  first  was 
distinguished  by  that  honorable  name,  either  tore  off  the  collar 
from  the  enemy  with  a  view  to  the  pleasure  and  gratification  he 
would  receive  from  it,  or  engaged  with  the  Latins  at  Veseris 
in  his  third  consulship,  merely  from  motives  of  pleasure. 

*3.  But  we  chiefly  arraign  and  think  those  persons  entitled 
to  our  just  abhorrence,  who  being  allured  and  corrupted  by 
the  blandishments  of  present  pleasures,  and  entirely  blinded  by 
their  passions,  take  no  precautions  whatever  against  the  mis- 


172 

fortunes  and  troubles  which  await  them  ;  and  equally  blanica- 
ble  are  they,  who,  from  weakness  of  mhid,  and  in  order  to  es- 
cape some  (ew  pains  and  troubles,  neglect  and  forsake  the  du- 
ties of  their  station. 


The  parts  are  often  joined  with  the  whole, 
the  species  with  the  genus,  if  they  tend  to  give 
weight  to  the  idea :  as,  when  Cicero,  wishing 
merely  to  say  that  he  had  bid  adieu  to  public 
business,  says,  Nam  omnem  nostram  de  repuhlicd 
curmn,  cogitationem  de  dicendd  in  senatu  scnten- 
tidy  commentationem  causarunij  abjecimus. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  All  foreign  wars  of  kings,  nations,  and  countries,  are 
now  extinguished,  so  that  we  are  now  at  liberty,  without 
wounding  our  national  honor,  to  treat  with  those,  whom  we 
sufter  to  enjoy  repose. 

2.  The  whole  senate,  the  fathers  and  the  equestrian  order, 
fixed  their  eyes  and  their  whole  attention  upon  thee,  thy  coun- 
tenance, and  thy  whole  demeanor. 

*3.  The  oration  of  C.  Gracchus,  who  possessed  the  finest 
genius,  and  had  the  greatest  powers  of  eloquence  of  any  man, 
is  still  extant,  and  is  replete  with  charges  of  the  most  flagitious 
nature  against  L.  Piso,  a  man  of  that  virtue  and  integrity,  that 
even  in  those  times,  when  it  was  difficult  to  find  an  unprinci- 
pled man,  he  had  singly  the  appellation  of  ^  the  Virtuous'  be- 
stowed upon  him. 


Two  words  joined  together,  the  latter  of  which 
is  stronger  than  the  former  ;  aSjpiUo  et  mihiper- 
suadeo,  velim  credas  tibique  persuadeas  :  this  con- 
tributes greatly  to  give  dignity  to  the  sentence ; 
ns, 

This  must  greatly  rouse  and  exasperate  your 
ininds  : 


1?3 

Quod  maximt  vestros  animos  exciiare  atque 
injlammare  debet. 

EXAMPLES. 

1 .  And  because  you  have  always  felt  a  greater  thirst  for 
glory,  and  passion  for  fame  than  other  nations,  you  must  wipe 
out  that  stain  contracted  in  the  last  war,  v/hich  has  fixed  a  bloty 
an  indelible  blot  on  the  reputation  of  the  Roman  people  ;  that 
the  man,  who  in  one  day,  by  the  contents  of  a  single  letter, 
marked  out  the  Roman  citizens  to  slaughter  and  to  butchery^ 
has  yet  received  no  punishment  adequate  to  the  atrocity  of  the 
deed. 

2.  The  praises  of  our  fleets  shall  ever  be  recorded  and  cele< 
brated  for  the  wonders  performed  at  Tenedos  ;  where  the  ene- 
my^s  ships  were  sunk,  and  their  commanders  slain ;  sucfi  arc 
our  trophies^  such  are  our  monuments^  such  are  our  tiiumjjhs. 


It  is  scarcely  credible  how  fond  the  ancients 
were  of  joining  words  almost  synonimous,  and 
whose  difference  is  scarcely  perceptible.  This 
copious  accumulation  of  words  is  scarcely  par- 
donable, except  in  a  diffuse  subject,  as  in  orato- 
ry, where  the  speaker,  being  carried  away  by 
his  emotions,  often  heaps  together  more  words 
than  are  necessary. 

When  this  takes  place,  it  will  contribute  to 
the  force  of  the  sentence,  not  to  admit  any  con- 
junctions between  those  words  :  as, 

From  our  desires  are  hati^ed,  dissensions,  dif- 
ferences, seditions,  and  fightings : 

Ex  cupiditaiibus  odia^  dissidia,  discordice,  sedi- 
tionesj  bella  nascuntur. 

EXAlsrPLES. 

1 .  You  attempt  J  you  contrive  y  you  set  on  foot  nothing,  of 
which  I  have  not  timely  information ;  yet  you  cease  not  to 
concert  and  enterprize!     How  often  has  that  dagger  been 

16 


174 

wrested  out  of  thy  hands  ?  How  often,  by  some  accident,  Iku 
it  fallen y  Iiwi  it  dropped  before  tlie  moment  of  execution  ? 

i.  This  countenance,  which  is  the  tacit  hmguacre  of  the 
juind,  drove  men  info  this  error :  It  was  this  countenance, 
which  deceived,  which  led  into  mistake,  which  betrayed  those, 
who  did  not  know  him. 

3.  To  all  who  have /jre^eri'ce/,  assisted,  benefitted,  a7id  ex- 
alted their  country,  there  is  a  certain  place  set  apart  in  th< 
heavens. 


It  will  sometimes  give  elegance  and  co|)ious- 
iiess  to  the  style,  to  make  two  substantives  of 
one  :  when  the  substantive  is  put  in  the  genitive, 
and  another  is  added,  which  communicates  an- 
other idea  to  it,  tending  at  the  same  time  to 
explain  and  illustrate  the  former,  and  indicates 
the  part,  attribute,  or  the  cause  of  it ;  as  for,  tu 
me  reddidisti  sapientcm,  may  be  said,  tuaprcecep- 
ta,  consilia  reddidcrunt. 

He  deceived  his  keepers : 

Custodum  curam  fefelUt. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  I  owe  my  present  good  fortune  to  mij  jmm  r :  when  I 
was  reduced  to  the  greatest  indigence,  I  relied  upon  him,  and 
he  relieved  me.  (Here  additional  substantives  illustrative  of 
the  subject  may  be  given,  as  liberality,  affection,  Sfc.) 

2.  If  a  young  man  wishes  to  be  distinguished  in  life,  to  be 
loved  and  respected,  he  ought  to  be  early  accustomed  and  ini- 
tiated into  the  precepts  and  instructions  of  wisdom  and  virtue. 
(animus,) 

3.  Such  was  Q.  Caiuhi<,  wiioui  ncithor  danger  nor  honors 
could  move  from  his  riuht  course,  uninllucnced  by  motives  of 
hope  or  fear.  (Here  say  the  hour  of  danger,  and  breath  of 
honors.) 


A  participle  is  often  added  to  an  ablative,  to 
indicate  the  cause  or  motive  why  a  tiling  is  done, 


175 

though  it  is  not  expressed  in  English ;  care  being 
at  the  saiHC  time  taken,  that  the  true  significa- 
tion of  the  participle  be  apphcable  to  the  sub- 
ject ;  such  as,  ductus^  adductus^  motus^  impulsuSj 
instructiis,  captus^  delinitiis,  actus,  vicius,  fretiis, 
confisus;  or  speaking  negatively,  impeditus^prO' 
hibitus,  deterrikis ;  as, 

He  fled  through  fear  of  the  enemy  : 
Metu  iricltatus,  or  with  greater  force,  iuetu  ic- 
tus ahlatuSjfugit. 

(This  use  of  the  participle  is  the  same  as  the 
change  of  prepositions  into  participles,  which 
we  have  seen  above.) 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  This  nobleman,  from  an  aspiring  ambition ,  formed  a 
conspiracy  of  tlie  principal  men  of  the  state,  and  persuaded  the 
people  to  quit  the  country  in  a  body,  representing  that  as  they 
surpassed  all  the  nations  around  them  in  valor,  it  would  be  easy 
for  them  to  gain  the  entire  sovereignty  of  Gaul. 

2.  Here  when  he  had  fallen  into  a  deej)  slumber,  from  the 
excess  of  eating  and  drinking,  a  shepherd,  who  inhabited  this 
part  of  the  country,  of  the  name  of  Cacus,  a  man  of  a  fierce 
and  gigantic  stature,  wishing  to  carry  oft'this  booty,  on  account 
of  the  beauty  of  the  oxen,  but  knowing  at  the  same  time,  that 
if  he  drove  the  herd  into  his  cave',  the  very  footsteps  of  the 
beaits  would  direct  their  keeper  to  the  place  of  tlieir  conceal- 
ment, ih'agged  ^he  most  beautiful  of  them  backwards  by  the 
tail  into  his  den. 


It  will  often  render  the  style  more  copious  and 
i  legant  to  change  the  verb  into  a  participle,  and 
to  add  another  verb  bearing  a  stronger  signifi- 
cation, especially  where  it  expresses  any  event ; 
as,  tor  miles  gladio  confossus  est,  say,  gladio  con- 
fossvs  cecidU :'  as,  Captvm  ten  ere  for  cepisse  ;  Ra- 


17a 

na  rupto  jacuit  corpore :  But  as  this  mode  is 
more  peculiar  to  tiic  poets,  great  caution  is  ne- 
cessary in  tiie  use  of  it,  that  neither  more  nor 
less  be  said  than  is  necessary  :  thus, 

Our  stoics  would  entangle  thee  in  the  toils  ol^' 
their  disputations  and  questions  : 

Nostn  stoici  dispxitatiomtm  suarum  atqne  inter- 
rogationum  laqueis  te  irretittim  tenerent :  instead 
of  irretirent. 

EXAMPLES. 

1 .  Could  then  those  powers  of  genius,  which  acquired  so 
much  power  in  the  discovery  of  the  liberal  arts,  ever  be  blunt- 
ed? (Introduce  another  verb  expressive  of  the  consequences  of 
being  blunted,  and  put  it  in  the  tense  in  which  could  be  blunt- 
ed would  have  been.) 

2.  I  am  fully  aware  that  men  of  the  first  celebrity  for  learn- 
ing and  wisdom  have  said  and  written  much  concerning  the 
nature  and  power  of  the  immortal  Gods :  (scripta  reliquisse) 
and  though  what  they  have  left  us  is  most  divinely  written,  yet 
it  is  of  that  nature  that  their  knowledge  must  be  derived  from 
the  information  of  our  ancestors,  and  not  what  they  could  have 
taught  them  ;  for  who  is  there  so  lost  to  reason,  wlio,  when  he 
views  the  heavens,  will  not  be  convinced  of  the  existence  of  a 
Deity  ?  Or  who  w  rll  imagine  that  those  things  are  the  effect  of 
chance,  which  were  made  with  so  much  wisdom  and  design, 
as  to  defy  the  ingenuity  of  any  man  to  comprehend  their  order 
and  connexion  ? 

3.  For  an  innumerable  multitude  of  slaves,  which  had  been 
l>reviously  s(?nt  from  all  the  adjacent  towns,  having  been  col- 
lected by  this  religious  /Edile,  on  a  sudden,  upon  a  signal  being 
given,  ica6  let  loose  upon  tlie  stage,  from  all  the  adjoining  por- 
''*os  and  passages. — [Here  irntjiit  may  be  added.) 

1.  The  rominon  report  is,  that  the  king,  while  lie  was  turn- 
ing over  tlie  Comnunlaries  of  Numa,  discovered  that  certain 
mysterious  and  solemn  sacrifices  had  been  offered  to  Jupiter; 
and  that  he  shut  himself  up  to  perform  the  same  mysteries ; 
but  not  ha\  ♦  rved  the  proper  care  and  due  ceremonies, 

he  w«is  so  i  '  ii  witnessing  the  apf>earanceof  any  heavenly 
objects,  that  he  loas  ttruck  with  liirhtning  by  Jupiter,  who  wa^^ 


177 

liisrhly  provoked  by  this  impious  and  superstitious  rite. — (Her< 
another  verb  expressive  of  the  efiects  of  being  struck  with 
lightning  may  be  added,  as,  was  cntirehj  consumed,  c^c.) 

It  is  usual  with  Cicero,  and  other  elegant  wri- 
ters, to  change  the  finite  verb  into  an  infinite, 
with  the  addition  of  another  fit  and  appropriate 
verb :  as,  pnto^  arbitroi\,  constat^  cerium  est,  vide- 
tur,fatendiimest,^*c.  especially  wdth  the  relativ( 
qui,  quce,  quod:  as,  for  nihil pulchrms  est  virtute, 
may  be  said,  nihil  pulchrius  virtute  esse  constat. 
The  same  finite  verb,  as  we  have  already  men- 
tioned, may  be  changed  into  a  gerund  ;  or  if 
there  is  a  substantive,  into  a  participle  futuin 
passive,  with  or  without  esse,  with  the  addition 
of  the  same  verbs,  puto,  existimo,  arbitror,  statiio. 
video,  ^  c.  but  let  it  be  observed,  that  the  proper 
signification  of  these  verbs  must  be  applical)le 
to  the  subject :  as, 

I  have  lost  a  father,  w  ho  was  a  most  learned 
man  : 

Patrem  amisi,  quern  dociissimum  fuisse,  faten- 
dum  est. 

EXAMPLES. 

*1.  Though  you  hcive  used  so  much  prudence  in  this  busi- 
ness, that  I  cannot  presume  to  find  fauU  with  it ;  not  tliat  I 
perfectly  agree  with  you,  but  because  i/ou  evince  so  mucli  true 
wisdom,  that  I  cannot  prefer  my  judgment  to  your  own  ;  yet  I 
have  been  induced,  by  an  intimacy  of  such  long  standing,  and 
by  that  benevolence,  which  I  have  experienced  from  your  youth, 
to  write  to  you  what  must  be  conducive  to  your  welfare,  and 
was  not  derogatory  to  your  dignity. — (Here  the  verbs  intcUigo, 
judico,  arbitror^  and  duco  may  be  added.) 

2.  I  have  not  that  prejudice  common  to  many,  to  deem  it 
a  crime  to  allow  some  small  share  of  praise  to  the  Gracchi; 

^  16 


i?S 

by'  Tsiirrs,  wisdom,  and  laws,  many  usellit  eslabiisli- 

nn  nJormuL 

3.  In  our  lii^putations  upon  this  subject  you  generally  diiTtr 
from  me,  because,  accordiiig  to  me,  elocjuence  is  comprised  in 
the  science  and  virtues  of  men  of  the  first  eminence  in  wisdom, 
whilst  you  separate  it  from  the  elegancies  of  learning,  and 
place  it  in  tlie  mere  acquirements  of  genius  and  application. — 
{putOy  with  part,  pass.) 

4.  /  have  dedicated  my  whole  time  to  tlie  concerns  of  my 
friends. 

5.  Lucullus  followed  him  \\Ith  his  army  into  this  prince's 
territories,  where  he  found  many  nations  ready  to  oppose  him, 
from  the  dread  they  entertaineti  of  the  Roman  forces,  though 
they  were  very  far  from  either  provoking  or  attacking  them. 


The  repetition  of  the  same  word,  when  inchi- 
ding  the  idea  of  a  cause  or  argument,  or  oppo- 
sition,  will  give  greater  force  and  copiousness 
to  the  sentence  :  as, 

I  beg  you  to  forgive  your  bi  other : 

Rogo  te,  nt  frater  fratri  ignoscas. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  How  could  you  deceive  your  companion  and  friend  ? 

2.  I  am  a  Roman  citizen;  my  name  is  C.  Mucins;  my  de- 
sign was  to  kill  an  enemy,     (Of  the  two  words  repeated,  one 

ill  be  the  nominative,  and  the  other  the  case  of  the  verb.) 


Repetition  of  a  word  of  opposite  relation  :  as, 
Canst  thou  hate  thy  wife  ? 
An  maritiis  uxorcm  odio  habes  f 

rx  AMPLE. 

llurt    ^.M.:.i    ,j<*u    r>i»i     >^t\\T  son?      flow  r'^"!'^     "  "'    !  ,,..      .    ' 

barbarity  to  abuw;  y(tur  father  ? 


Repetition  c)l  oiiinis^  multiis ;  as, 
He  dissipates  the  fears  of  (til: 
(hnnes  omnium  meius  pell  it 


no 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  The  providence  of  God  extends  over  tli^  w  Ik'1'  world,  \ir 
^ro\'\des  for  the  advantages  of  all.  ^""^^  "" 

2.  No  one  can  doubt,  but  that  the  property  of  all  must  be 
in  the  power  of  those,  who  pass  sentence,  and  of  those,  who 
judge. 

3.  Cicero's  eloquence  was  admired,  at  the  same  time  that  it 
excited  the  envy  of  his  adversaries ;  he  freely  undertook  the 
causes  of  many  Romans. 


There  is  nothing  more  frequent  among  the 
ancients,  es|3ecially  Cicero,  than  circumlocution 
or  periphrasis.  It  is  of  great  use  in  the  struc- 
ture of  a  period,  as  it  tends  to  vary,  and  to  give 
it  greater  perspicuity  and  force.  It  will  indeed 
require  some  thought  and  judgment  to  find  out 
those  variations,  which  are  best  adapted  to  the 
subject ;  for  as  they  are  singularly  pleasing,  and 
tend  to  illustrate  and  give  greater  animation  to 
the  style  when  properly  used,  so  too  great  a  di- 
latation, or  too  extended  a  circumlocution,  where 
the  occasion  does  not  require  it,  must  appear 
cold  and  puerile. 

This  circumlocution  may  be  effected  three 
diflerent  ways ;  by  means  of  a  definition,  that 
Is,  either  a  shorter  or  larger  description  or  ex- 
planation, by  partition,  and  by  comparison. 

hy  definition,  or  explanation,  especially  by 
^za*,  quce^  quod,  ^f .  as, 

We  ought  to  love  our  relatives : 

Amare  eos  debemiiSj  qui  nobis  vinculo  cognatio- 
nis  €onjnft€ti  sunt. 

'  EXAMPLES. 

'*ii  ;The  fifth  mode  of  exciting  compassion  is  to  represent  to 
th'^  eyes  each  particular  of  distress,  so  that  the  atiditor  raav 


180 

fancy  that  he  views  each  object,  and  thus  may  be  drawn  in  re- 
ality, as  if  he  were  present,  and  not  merely  by  the  Torre  of 
language,  to  commisserate  tlie  distressed. 

2.  If  you  have  any  regard  for  me,  continue  in  the  enjoy- 
ment of  this  tranquility,  and  be  persuaded  that  except  ofl'enccs 
and  wickedness,  from  which  you  have  always  been,  and  al- 
ways will  be,  exempt,  nothing  horrible  or  formidable ,  can  hap- 
pen to  man. 

3.  We  have  had  the  superiority  over  you  in  one  circuni- 
>iance,  that  we  were  acquainted  with  the  deliverance  of  Mar- 
cellus  before  you,  and  I  may  add  too,  that  we  were  witne^>se^ 
to  the  mode  of  the  tchole  transaction, — (jquemadmodum.) 

By  a  more  extended  definition  :  as, 

We  do  not  bear  ariin  as»;ainst  children,  but  a- 
jz;ainst  armed  men : 

Children  here  may  be  defined,  that  age  wliicli 
is  usually  spared,  in  taking  of  town^ 

Aima  habemiis  non  adccrsus  earn  aiaicm,  mi 
etiara  in  captis  urbibus  parcilur,  sed  adversus  ar- 
matos. 

1.  Oh  the  unparalleled  instance  of  wisdom  !  do  they  not 
seem  to  have  dispatched  and  removed  that  man  from  the  faro 
of  nature,  whom  they  suddenly  deprived  of  the  light  of  the 
heavens,  of  the  sun,  of  earth  and  water;  that  since  Jic  had 
murdered  his  own  father,  he  might  be  cut  off  from  the  enjoy- 
ment of  those  things,  from  which  all  comforts  are  derived. — 
(Hi«  own  father  here  will  admit  of  a  larger  periphrasis,  him  to 
whom  he  owed  his  life, — ) 

2.  No  one  could  snpi)ose  that  a  parricide  could  enjoy  any 
sleep. — (Here  parricide  may  be  very  fully  d<»fnied,  as,  the  man 
who  had  violated  all  divine  and  human  laws,  by,  d'c.) 


To  this  may  be  referred  several  English  ex- 
pressions, adverbs  and  adjectives,  which  must 
necessarily  be  rendered  by  a  short  periphrasis : 
as,  his  sj)eech  was  irresistible  for  its  eloquence, 

say,  his  speech  was  so  eloquent   that YourW 

language  is  inexplicable,  ^c. 


181 

Circumlocution  secondly  may  be  effected  b) 
partition,  or  division  of  a  whole  into  parts,  of  a 
genus  into  species  :  as, 

No  where  shall  we  have  any  just  subject  of  a- 
larm  :  . 

Non  in  campoynonin  foro^nonin  curid^  non 
denique  intra  domesticos  parietes^  pertimescemus. 

EXAMPLES. 

1 .  He  promised  me  that  he  Wv)uld  afford  me  assistance  at 
nil  times — (May  be  said  whether  in  the  morning  or  in  the 
evening.) 

2.  The  Romans,  eager  to  revenge  the  massacre  at  Gena- 
bum,  and  exasperated  by  the  obstinate  defence  of  the  place, 
spared  none  of  the  inhabitants :  insomuch  that  of  all  that  mul- 
titude, amounting  to  about  forty  thousand,  scarce  eight  hun- 
dred, who  had  quitted  the  town  upon  the  first  alarm,  escaped 
in  safety  to  the  camp. — (Say  neither  naen,  &c.) 

Thus  Cicero  divides  eloquence  into  genius, 
exercise  in  speaking,  and  knowledge  of  the  lib- 
eral arts  ;  as, 

If  I  have  any  abilities,  and  I  am  sensible  they  are  but  small? 
if,  by  speaking  often,  I  have  acquired  any  merit  as  a  speaker ; 
if  T  have  derived  any  knowledge  from  the  study  of  the  liberal 
arts,  which  have  ever  been  my  delight,  Licinius  may  justly 
claim  the  fruit  of  all. 

Circumlocution  is  also  very  elegant  where  an 
idea  is  conveyed  of  multitude,  magnitude,  and 
excellence  in  general,  when  instead  of  the  words 
muhus^  valde^  ^c  we  make  use  of  a  compari- 
son, as  for,  vdldc  te  amo,  saj^  7ion  minOs  te  amo 
quam  filius  patremy  or  ita  ut  vix  unquam  fuerint 
qui  simili  amove  cujusquam  flagrarent ;  for,  doc- 
tissimus^  say,  e^^  tarn  docius  ut  nihil  non  inteUi' 
gat,  ^c. 


•i8;i 


EXAMPLES. 


1.  For  in  the  senate  I  liave  always  contended  with  hira  with 
\\\Q  greatest  jirinness  mul perseverance,  concerning  the  inter- 
ests of  the  comraonweakh. — (Cicero  says,  so  that  he  rni^ht  be 
convinced  that  he  had  to  do  with  a  man  of  firmness  and  perse- 
verance.) 

2.  The  study  of  literature  has  produced  injinite  advantages 
to  mankind.  (Say  greater  than  can  be  derived  from  any  thing 
else.) 

3.  Rome  possessed  many  brave  citizens.  (As  no  other  na- 
tion could  ever  boast  of,  &c.) 

4.  God  confers  daily  and  great  benefits  upon  us. 


In  the  selection  of  these  additional  words  and 
expressions,  which  constitute  copiousness  ol' 
^tyle,  great  care  must  be  taken  that  they  be  ap- 
propriate and  suited  to  the  subject,  not  labored, 
trifling,  nor  without  a  correspondent  meaning  : 
otherwise  a  short  and  nervous  diction  would  be 
preferable  to  a  multitude  of  languid  and  un- 
meaning words.  But  as  elegance  of  style,  esj>e- 
cially  Ciceronian,  consists,  for  the  most  part,  in 
this  copiousness  of  diction,  which,  as  we  have 
observed  before,  contributes  so  greatly  to  the 
structure  of  finished  periods ;  I  shall  here  give  a 
few  more  rules  to  show  how,  by  means  of  this 
copiousness,  additional  clauses,  and  even  new 
ideas  may  be  introduced  to  illustrate  and  adorn 
the  style. 

Speaking  on  a  sulyect,  which  conveys  the  idea 
of  any  thing  great,  excellent,  or  manifest,  anew 
idea  may  be  introduced  by  either  prefixiug  the 
cause,  or  subjoining  the  effect,  with  ita^  acled,  vt, 
tantus^  iantuMj  ^c.  Thus  to  give  an  instance 
of  cEich  :   The  young  man  devotes  whole  days  and 


183 

nights  to  literature ;  by  introducing  the  cause 
why  he  does  it,  an  additional  clause,  and  at  the 
same  time  greater  force  may  be  given  to  the 
sentence  ;  adolesceiis  tanto  liter  arum  studio  tene- 
tur,  ut  dies  noctesque  det  iis  operam.  Or  on  the 
contrary,  by  introducing  what  on  the  first  view 
appears  the  effect :  -as,  What  you  relate  is  noto- 
riously false  ;  Res^  quam  narraSy  tarn  ahhorret  ab 
ortiniy  veritatis  specie^  ut  nemo  non  Jidem  tibi  de- 
neget. 

EXAMPLES. 

Cause : 

1.  Travellers,  who  have  visited  distant  countries,  are  very 
fond  of  magnifying  and  extolling  the  curiosities  they  have  seen, 
above  those  of  their  own  country ;  nay,  they  are  sometinnes 
very  fond  of  relating  wonders,  and  then'  talcs  and  wonders  can 
scarcely  be  bclietwd. — ( They  are  so  remote  from  the  truth 
that. . . .  might  easily  be  inserted.) 

*2.  Who  is  there  among  us,  whojjas  not  the  liberty  of  walk- 
ing over  his  own  farm,  and  visiting  his  agricultural  arrange- 
ments, either  for  the  sake  of  its  improvement,  or  his  own  plea- 
sure ?  No  one  indeed  can  be  ignorant  of  the  nature  of  sowing 
and  of  harvest,  what  the  pruning  of  trees  and  vines  is,  what 
time  of  the  year  and  in  what  manner  these  several  occupations 
ought  to  take  place.  If  any  one  therefore  has  his  farm  to  in- 
spect, some  direction  to  give  his  steward,  or  orders  to  his  bailiff, 
concerning  agriculture,  must  he  study  and  thoroughly  under- 
stand the  books  of  Mago  the  Carthaginian  ?  Cannot  we  be 
satisfied  with  our  own  common  sense  and  understanding  }  (No 
one  can  be  without  eyes,  &c.)  , 

3.  Which  of  us  lately  was  not  affected  with  the  death  of 
that  excellent  man  ?  For  though  he  died  in  an  advanced  age, 
yet  such  was  the  excellence  and  inimitable  beauty  of  his  art, 
that  we  thought  him  worthy  of  living  for  ever.  (Give  the 
cause,  and  say,  which  of  us  was  so  void  of  taste,  and  of  so  un- 
feeling a  temper,  <X:c,) 

4.  Can  we  who  are  <  ^  in  the  affairs  of  the  state,  and 
ia  so  many  toils  and  da  ^    - .  imagine  that,  after  a  life  of  unin- 


rS4 

lernipted  care  and  trouble,  nothinr/  sliall  remain  ol   u>   una 
♦leath  ?     (Add,  be  so  narrow-mind td  as  to  imagine,  &c.) 

Eflbct : 

J.  Jle  was  a  most  cruel  tyrant.  (So  cruel  that  he  spared 
no ) 

2.  Nothing  now-a-days  is  sacred,  and  therefore  the  most 
exemplary  punishments  should  be  inflicted  upon  those,  who 
are  so  lost  to  every  principle  of  virtue  and  religion,  as  to  rob 
and  spoil  the  holy  recesses  of  temples.  (Is  so  sacred 
which ) 

3.  Pindar  excels  other  poets  in  the  boldness  of  his  thoughts 
and  the  sublimity  of  his  poetry,  but  his  odes  are  veri/  difficult 
to  he  understood.  (So  difl^cult  that  whoever  wishes  to  under- 
stand them  must ) 

*4.  For  many  have  wasted  whole  estates  by  inconsiderate 
prodigality  ;  but  what  can  be  a  mark  of  greater  folly,  than  in  a 
mode  of  life,  which  depends  upon  your  own  will,  to  create  an 
inability  of  continuing  it  ?  Robbery  and  injustice  are  often  the 
consequence  of  these  profuse  expenses ;  for  when  bountiful 
lareresses  are  at  last  followed  by  want,  these  men  are  at  length 
obliged  to  lay  hands  on  the  property  of  others.  Thus  wlieii 
they  are  desirous  of  practicing  this  beneficence  for  the  sake  of 
fining  the  good  will  of  others,  they  do  not  so  much  attach 
those  men  to  themselves,  who  have  been  the  objects  of  tlii 
pi.digality,  as  they  excite  the  resentment  of  those,  who  ha. 
been  the  victims  of  their  depredations.  Therefore  our  purse 
"hfsuld  neither  be  too  closely  shut,  nor  too  open,  (So  shut 
.  I  liberality  niay  not  open  it,  nor  so  open  that  it  may  be  at  the 
*i  j»osalofall.) 


In  the  enumeration  of  several  things  or  per- 
sons, w  hich  all  refer  to  the  same  verb,  it  will  give 
trreat  elegance  to  add  a  corresjmnding  verb  to 
'  uch  partirular  mentioned,  and  consequently  to 
L^ixe  an  additional  clause  to  the  sentence.  It 
will  be  proper,  if  possible,  to  preserve  the  con- 
cinnitas  or  ecjualiry  of  parts,  and  that  such  verbs 
be  chosen  that  govern  the  same  cases ;  as,  for 


amant  te  cives  et  peregnni^  say  ammit  te  cives^  di- 
ligiint  peregrini.  Thus  ;  I  did  this,  not  being  ac- 
tuated by  self-interest,  but  by  the  desire  of  serv.- 
ing  you :  Non  amore  met  ductus^  sed  cupiditate^ 
ntilitatis  tuce  incensus  hoc  feci  In  this  example, 
beside  the  addition  of  incensus,  it  is  easy  to  ob- 
serve the  exact  equality  of  the  parts,  the  abla- 
tive corresponding  to  the  ablative,  and  the  par- 
ticiple to  the  participle. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  Verres  depopulated  his  province,  Sicily,  for  three  years. 
He  is  said  to  have  pillaged  cities,  houses^  and  temples. 

2.  I  am  fond  of  these  studies,  I  own.  Let  those  be  asham- 
ed, who  have  buried  themselves  in  learning,  so  as  to  be  of  no 
use  to  society,  nor  able  to  produce  any  thing  to  public  view  : 
but  why  should  I  be  ashamed,  who  for  so  many  years  have 
never  been  prevented  by  indolence^  by  pleasure^  nor  sleep^ 
from  doing  good  to  others.  (Here  a  different  appropriate  verb 
may  be  used  with  each  particular.) 

3.  Rocks  and  deserts  re-echo  sounds :  savage  beasts  are  often 
soothed  by  music,  and  listen  to  its  charms  ;  and  shall  we,  with 
all  the  advantages  of  the  best  education,  be  unaffected  with  the 
voice  of  poetry  ?  The  Colophonians,  the  Chians,  the  Salamin- 
iatis,  the  Smyrnians^  give  out  that  Homer  is  their  countryman. 
(Here  a  peculiar  verb  expressive  of  the  claim  of  each  may  be 
applied  to  these  different  people.) 

*4.  Great  is  the  force  of  humanity,  of  kindred^  of  bloody 
and  of  nature  herself  against  suspicions  of  this  kind.  It  is  a 
most  certain  prodigy,  a  monstrous  and  unnatural  thing,  that 
any  one  should  be  found  clothed  in  a  human  shape,  who  could 
so  far  surpass  the  most  savage  animals  in  their  ferocity  of  na- 
ture, as  basely  and  inhumanly  to  cut  off  the  light  from  those  to 
whom  he  owes  the  sweet  enjoyment  of  the  precious  light  of 
Heaven  :  when  even  the  most  ferocious  beasts  that  have  receiv- 
ed a  kindred  birth,  and  have  been  bred  up  together,  are  taught 
by  nature  herself  to  feel  and  acknowledge  the  full  force  of  these 
common  ties.  (\'erbs  may  be  found  to  apply  to  each  particu- 
4ar,  as^  valeo  reclamito.) 

17 


186 

.  Cicero  lias  a  fine  example  of  this,  when  he 
says  ironically,  that  all  regret  the  death  o(  Clo- 
dius,  where  each  separate  expression  rises  grad- 
ually in  a  climax. 

•5.  But  it  is  weak  in  one  to  presume  to  connpnre  Drusns, 
Africanus,  Pompe}-,  or  myself,  with  Clodius.  Their  livei  could 
be  dispensed  with,  but  as  to  the  death  of  Clodius,  no  one  can 
bear  it  with  any  degree  of  patience.  The  Senate  mourns,  the 
Equestrian  Order  is  Jilled  with  distress,  the  whole  ritfj  is  in 
the  deepest  affliction,  the  corporate  towns  are  all  in  mourninsr^ 
the  colonics  are  overwhelmed  mth  sorrow  ;  in  a  word,  even 
the  fields  themselves  lament  the  loss  of  so  generous,  so  useful, 
and  so  humane  a  citizen.     . 


Instead  of  one  expression  which  was  sufficient 
to  convey  the  necessary  idea,  two  will  be  joined 
together,  one  in  a  negative,  the  other  in  an  affir- 
mative form,  sometimes  by  non,  sed — non  modo^ 
sed  etiam — tantum  abest  ut,  lit :  this  is  done  to 
give  greater  force  to  the  subject ;  as,  for  semper 
memor  erotuorum  b'enejicwrum  :  say  nvnqnam  tua 
heneficia  obUviscar,  semper  animo  meo  infixa  erii 
illorum  memoria  ;  or  to  join  both  by  tantum  abest 
ut^  ut-;  as  tantum  abest  at  beneficia  tua  oblivisci 
possiniy  ut  potius  eorum  memoria  meo  animo  infixa 
perpetuo  mansura  sit. 

EXAMPLES, 

I.  An  '  *  '  *  "  '  liis  man  n  '  il- 
ly of  a^'i«  J  .  !  he  has  1  «d 
himself  the  enemy  ol  all  good  men,  is  there  a  single  person  who 
V  "  *  ^  '  '*-*':  his  advocate  ?  There  is  now  f  ''■  rr  no  more 
ry,  the  case  itself  ref/uircs  .s' 

1.  There  are  few  men  that  do  not  acknowiedgf  and  admire 
the  charms  of  virtue,  though  we  see  every  one  hurried  by  pas- 
sion into  vices  and  pleasures.     A'o  man  despises  virtue,  but  all 


187 

*S.  I  cannot  boast  a  long  iiiie  of  ancestors,  whose  nooit, 
blood  may  have  flowed  pure  and  uncontaminated,  through  the 
veins  of  their  remote  descendants.  I  cannot  boast  of  their  he- 
roic deeds  and  glorious  exploits,  the  memory  of  which  might 
have  reflected  lustre  on  my  humble  name ;  I  must  therefore 
rest  the  justice  of  my  cause,  on  your  own  judgment,  and  its 
true  merits  ;  but  though  I  do  not  advance  the  merits  of  my  an 
cestors  in  favor  of  my  cause,  /  am  not  ashamed  of  them  as  if 
they  had  been  different  from  me,  but  I  boast  of  and  remem- 
ber with  pleasure y  their  virtue  and  probity. 

4.  Your  soul  has  never  been  satisfied  with  the  narrow  limits 

of  life,  which  nature  has  prescribed  us,  but nor  can  this 

be  called  your  life,  which  consists  in  the  union  of  the  soul  and 

body ;  that  alone,  that  I  say  is  your  life,  which (It  will 

be  easy  to  supply  this  with  the  insertion  of  some  afl'irmativc  ap- 
propriate expressions,  the  first  about  immortality^  the  other 
about  the  memory  of  suceeeding  ages,  to  complete  the  sen- 
tence.) 


Instead  of  one  expression,  two  or  more  are 
often  joined  together  to  define  and  explain  the 
same  idea ;  but  each  should  be  more  forcible, 
and  tend  to  confirm  and  illustrate  the  former : 
as,  Cicero  wishing  to  say  that,  every  man's  own 
fraud  and  iniquities  are  his  chief  tormentoi's, 
thus  forcibly  illustrates  the  idea :  Sua  (jucmque 
fraus,  €t  smis  tenor  maxinie  vexat ;  suwn  quern- 
que  scelus  agitata  amentidque  nfficit ;  suce  malee 
cogitationes  conscienticequc  aiiimi  terrcnt. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  Never  shall  his  measures  disconcert,  never  his  arts  baf- 
fle me  ;  nor  will  he  even  attempt  to  weaken  and  undermine  me 
by  his  abilities.  I  know  all  his  method  of  attack,  alt  the  ar- 
tifice of  his  pleading. 

2.  In  this  flight,  and  under  the  influence  of  these  terrors,  he 
took  refuge  with  Tigranes,  King  of  Armenia,  who  received  him 
kindly,  roused  him  from  his  diffidence^  cheered  him  in  his  rfiV 
tress,  and  restored  him  to  some  degree  of  hope. 


188 

3.  You  see,  my  Lords,  how  he  is  continually  flying  up  nuu 
down  the  streets  and  public  places  with  his  hair  nicely  trim- 
med and  loaded  w  ith  perfumes,  followed  by  a  crowd  of  lackies 
and  attendants  ;  you  see,  my  lords,  I  say,  how  he  dcjipiscs  all 
others,  ttith  what  contempt  he  looks  dotim  upon  them,  and  how 
mean  and  worthless  he  regards  them,  in  comj)arison  with  him- 
self; how  he  looks  upon  himself  as  the  only  great  man,  the  on- 
ly happy  and  pow^erful  man. 

Though  there  is  no  great  diflfcrencc  between 
these  several  expressions,  yet  the  main  idea  is 
thus  strengthened  and  ilhistrated. 


Sometimes  an  expression  is  prefixed  to  anoth- 
er, to  denote  the  mode  or  manner  of  it,  though 
it  is  implied  in  the  sense,  and  therefore  might 
have  been  omitted  ;  such  expressions  as  these : 
Non  Jieri  potest  J  accidit^  factum  est  ^  jit  ^faciendum 
putavi,  evenit,  contigitj  insitum,  datunij  estj  ^c. 
Most  of  these  imply  chance,  event,  &c.  as,  for 
/'rater  ab  omnibus  laudatus  est,  say,  conti^it  fra- 
tri  ut  ab  omnibus  laudaretur. 

EXAMPLES. 

♦l.  In  the  late  irruptions  of  the  Teutones  and  Cimbri,  when 
iH  the  other  provincQik  of  Gaul  were  over-run,  they  alone  had 
.cntured  to  stand  upon  their  defence,  nor  suffered  the  barbari- 
ins  to  set  foot  on  their  territories;  whence  presuming  on  so 
vvell  known  an  instance  of  their  bravery,  they  laid  claim  to 

rreat  authority,  and  challenged  high  military  renown. 

qua  ex  re  factum  est  ut,) 

2.  These  things  being  very  uncprtain,  7  sent  my  Lictorsto 
vou.—-( Facienirftim  putavi  ut . 

'  3.  'I  thought  I  ought  to  answer  your  icikts  as  soon  as  pos 
sible. 

4.  Therefore  it  will  not  be  easy  to  fuul  a  man  who  will  re- 
fuse to  impart  to  others  what  he  knows  himself:  so  that  we 
ff el  a  i)ropensity  not  menly  to  learn,  but  even  to  teach  :  and 
as  bulU  will  naturally  contend  for  the  calves  against  lions,  with 


1S9 

the  greatest  violence,  and  the  utmost  exertion  of  their  strength, 
so  those,  who  Iifive  tJie  means,  as  well  as  the  power,  feel  a  nat- 
ural inclination  to  do  their  utmost  towards  the  preservation  of 


the  human  kind. 


Other  expressions  of  the  same  kind  are  also 
often  used,'  as  agere^  hoc  ago^  id  egi,  ^c.  when 
the  verb  implies  some  design  :  as, 

I  always  consulted  the  welfare  of  others,  maybe 
rendered  by  semper  id  egi  ut  aliorum  saluti  con- 
siikrenu 

EXAMPLES. 

1 .  But  if  you  argue  that  any  one  has  murdered  his  fatlier, 
and  cannot  even  say  why  or  how  he  did  it,  and  can  only  bark 
without  fixing  the  least  suspicion,  you  shall  not  indeed  have 
3^our  legs  broken  ;  but  if  I  have  any  knowledge  of  these  men, 
they  will  take  such  care  to  have  your  foreheads  branded  with 
that  letter,*  for  which  you  have  so  great  a  detestation,  that  for 
its  sake  you  abominate  all  the  rest ;  so  that  for  the  future,  you 
will  tliink  your  ill  fortune  alone  deserves  your  accusations. 

*2.  But  to  return  to  the  point,  I  wish  you  to  look  upon  me 
not  merely  as  your  liiend,  but  as  most  sincerely  and  affection- 
ately attached  to  you  :  and  indeed  it  shall  bo  my  b  siness  to 
prove,  by  all  the  olTices  in  my  power,  that  this  opinion  of  me 
may  be  founded  in  truth.  But  if  i/ou  should  appear  to  owe 
me  this  return,  less  on  my  own  account  than  1  labored  to  do  on 
yours,  I  freely  exhonerate  you  from  that  trouble. 


To  an  expression,  on  which  the  force  of  the 
subject  chieliy  rests,  another,  though  not  very 
necessary  to  it,  is  often  added,  containing  a  kind 
of  self-evident  explanation  or  illustration  of  the 
former :  as, 

Let  young  men,  above  all,  avoid  idleness : — 

"  The  letter  A*,  as  the  ancients  used  to  write  the  word  cahnnvin 

17* 


190 

Here  the  scir-evidciit  illustration,   that  it  is  the 
parent  of  every  flagitiousness,  may  be  added : 

Otium  pntcesertim^  quod  omnc  Jlagitlonun  ge- 
a  us  alit^  cvitcnt  juvenes. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  How  ignorant  of  the  real  interests  of  the  people  are  those 
rulers,  wl*),  neglecting  the  blessings  of  peace,  bi/  which  alone 
nations  flourish^  will,  upon  the  slightest  causes,  plunge  their 
country  into  all  the  horrors  of  war. 

2.  When  we  hear  or  read  of  a  compassionate,  a  generous,  a 
humane,  a  just,  a  moderate,  a  prudent  act,  performed  while  in 
anger,  that  foe  to  deliberation,  and  in  the  triumph  of  victory, 
when  men  are  gene  rail  tj  proud  and  insolent  ;  with  such  an  ar- 
dent affection  are  we  inflamed,  that  we  are  frequently  in  love 
with  persons  whom  we  never  saw. 


To  these  rules  of  copiousness  of  style  may  be 
ubjoined  Pleonasm  ;  not  that  rhetorical  figure 
which  is  used  to  express  a  sti'ong  emotion  of  the 
mind,,  as  his  oculls  vidi,  but  a  granmiatical  pleo- 
jiasm,  wliich  is  sometimes  a  mere  redundancy 
of  words,  and  sometimes  is  necessary  to  connect 
or  give  greater  force  to  sentences. 

Jta,  sicj  hoc  id^  illud^  are  often  redundant,  fol- 
lowed by  an  accusative  with  the  infinitive;  as, 

It  is  my  real  opinion,  that  the  good  arc  hap. 
py,  and  the  ^^'icked  miserable : 

ltd  prorsiis  cxistimo^  bonos  esse  beatos,  impro- 
bos  miseros. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  But  having  pcrsvadcd  hiinnvlf  that  the  letters,  which  I 
have  written  cojiccrning  him,  with  so  much  accuracy,  will  have 


191 

the  greatest  weight  with  you,  he  insisted  upon  my  writing  agaiu 
to  you. 

2.  Therefore  I  jcish  yon  to  be  convinced  that  I  sliall  always 
most  fondly  cherish  the  remembrance  of  your  virtues,  and  that 
I  sliall  take  the  same  care  of  all  your  affairs  as  if  they  were  my 
own. 

3.  But  yet  I  wish  you  to  think  that  you  cannot  do  me  a 
greater  favor,  than  to  convince  me  that  it  is  to  your  good  offi- 
ces that  I  shall  owe  the  happy  termination  of  this  business  ;  I 
therefore  entreat  you  to  complete  it  as  soon  as  you  possibly 
can. 

Id: 

Ccesar  having  notice  of  these  proceedings,  and  that  it  was 
the  design  of  the  Helvetians  to  attempt  a  passage  through  the 
province,  hastened  his  departure  from  Rome. 

lllud: 

There  are  many  things,  which  I  dare  not  write ;  hut  I  am 
most  truly  concerned^  that  I  have  not  received  a  single  iin« 
from  you  on  this  subject. 


Nisi  ^^  is  very  often  used  for  nm,  wlien  it  ma}l 
be  explained  by  except  that ;  but  never  at  the 
))eginning  of  a  sentence. 

EXAMPLE. 

I  have  at  last  gained  that,  for  which  I  have  hitherto  been 
waiting,  to  make  you  all  sensible  that  a  conspiracy  is  openly 
formed  against  the  state,  unless  there  he  any  one,  who  imag- 
ines that  such  as  resemble  Catiline  may  yet  refuse  to  enter  into 
his  designs.  There  is  now  therefore  no  more  room  for  clem- 
ency ;  the  case  itself  requires  severity. 


In  some  cases  the  repetition  of  some  particles 
Is  very  elegant  : 

However  this  is,  take  care  of  your  health  : 
Sed  lit  ut  est,  indulge  valetudini — chiefly  in- 
stead of  cunque. 


EXAMPLES. 
Ut  Ut. 

1.  But  however  those  things  are,  y<'t  Twill  do  what  T  prom- 
ised. 

2.  But  however  other  circumstances  were,  you  should  cer- 
tnlnU  cnnsnlt  the  welfare  of  her,  who  is  at  your  house. 

Ubi  ubi. 

1.  Now  toheresoever  the  soul  is  lodged,  it  is  certainly  in 
you. 

2.  Wheresoever  he  is,  yet  I  will  search  him  out ;  and  bring 
him  with  me. 

Quantus  qxutntns. 

Great  as  he  is,  he  is  all  labor,  he  is  all  industry* 

Qucmti  qiianti. 
But  at  whatever  price  it  is  bought,  that  is  well  bought  which 
is  necessary. 


Interea  temporis,  and  sccpenumcrb  arc  often  us- 
ed lor  interea  and  scepe  ;  but  ubi  locorum,  quo  lo- 
coriim,  minime  gentium^  are  not  merely  redun- 
dant, but  tend  to  give  greater  weight  to  the  sen- 
tence. 

EXAMPLE. 

Many  times  have  I  been  cruelly  deceived  by  the  perfidy  oi 
wiy  pretended  friends,  when  I  reposed  the  highest  confidence 
on  their  fidelity ;  and  the  insidious  desiirns  or  open  attacks  of 
jninC  eui'mies  have  undermined  my  happiness,  and  battered 
down  all  my  fortunes  :  In  the  mean  while  so  shattered  are  all 
my  hopes,  so  forlorn  and  miserable  is  my  condition  become, 
that  1  no  longer  know  ichcre  I  shall  betake  myself. 


Mihi^  tibi,  nobis^  vobisy  though  evidently  redun- 
dant, are  very  fre(iuently  used  by  the  ancient- 
but  generally  in  a  familiar  discourse,  and  when 


193 

the  subject  has  a  certain  reference  to  the  person 
which  is  used  as  the  dative ;  as, 

Who  art  thou  ? 

Quis  7ni/ii  es  ? 

EXAMPLES. 

Mihi. 

And  does  any  one  now  name  lenity  and  mercy  ?  We  have 
indeed  for  a  long  time  lost  the  true  names  of  things. 

Tibi. 

1.  But  on  a  sudden,  a  few  days  after,  when  I  had  not  the 
least  expectation  of  him,  came  Caninius  to  me,  who  tokl  me 
that  he  was  immediatelygoing  to  you. 

2.  I  have  been  to  blame.  JFell,  tchat  says  Sanio  ?  He  is 
pacified  at  last. 


Vera  is  often  added  to  imo,  though  imo  would 
have  been  sufficient  of  itself. 


EXAMPLE. 


Why  should  T  mention  the  cahimnies  that  were  afterwards 
heaped  upon  him  ?  And  though  they  were  such  as  would 
have  filled  any  breast  with  terror,  that  had  the  least  conscious- 
ness of  guiU,  yet  how  he  bore  them!  Immortal  Gods!  bore 
them    did  I  say  ?    Nay^  how   he  despised  and  set   them   at 


nought ! 


This  pleonasm  of  a  conjunction  gives  some- 
times great  elegance  to  a  sentence :  as, 

But  this  justice  of  yours,  flourishes  every  day 
more  and  more  : 

At  vera  hcec  tua  jusiitia  jiorcscit  in  dies  tnagis. 


EXAMPLES. 


1.  And  sitall  I  aha  call  her  motlicr,  if  she  calls  me  by  the 


name  of  daughter  ? 


194 

2.  But  DariuSy  being  religious,  and  of  a  mild  dispositioDj 
says  that  lie  cannot  commit  so  foul  an  act. 
o.  But  why  do  you  hesitate  ? 


lUe  quidemj  followed  by  sed,  tanien  verdy  is 
\  ery  frequently  and  elegantly  used  by  Cicero,  in 
such  a  manner,  that  the  pronoun  ille  is  evident- 
ly redundant :  as, 

The  book  that  you  sent  me.  is  well  written 
indeed,  but  dear : 

Liber  quern  mihi  misisti,  esi  ille  ouidem  optiim 
scripttiSj  sed  pretio  haud  exiguo  venit. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  I  was  necessarily  grieved  at  this  ;  but  how  much  inor^ 
when  I  saw  these  men  attach  themselves  so  closely,  so  caress, 
cherish,  and  even  in  my  presence,  embrace  my  enemy  :  mine 
did  I  say  ?  Nay,  the  enemy  of  all  laws,  of  justice,  of  his  coun- 
try, and  of  all  order,  not  indeed  that  they  could  raise  my  chol- 
er  and  indignation,  which  are  utterly  extinct,  but  certainly  with 
the  hope  ofdoingit. 

2.  Your  military  praises  shall  be  celebrated,  not  only  a- 
mongst  us,  but  in  every  language,  in  the  annals  of  every  na- 
tion, and  the  latest  posterity  shall  proclaim  them ;  the  famr 
of  these  exploits,  however,  while  we  read  them,  seems,  I  know 
not  how,  to  be  drowned  amidst  the  shouts  of  armies,  and  tho 
din  of  war. 

*3.     Indeed   this    peevishness,    and    those    imperfections 
which  I  have  mentioned,  have  sometliin*:  like  an  • 
justly  indeed^  hut  wiiich  may  be  admitted,  from  tli  , 

which  old  men  are  top  apt  to  entertain,  of  their  l>eing  general- 
ly marked  by  the  younger  part  of  the  world  as  objects  of  their 
scorn  and  derision. 


Quod  sij  quod  ubiy   quod  uiinam,  as  we  have 
seen  before,  are  often  put  not  inelegantly  at  the 


lf)5 

beginning  of  a  sentence,  where  quod  tiiough 
seemingly  redundant,  must  refer  to  the  subject 
of  the  preceding  sentence. 

EXAMPLES. 

*1.  He  had  but  too  much  reason  to  suspect  that  the  con- 
tinuance of  the  Roman  army  could  be  with  no  other  design, 
than  that  of  oppressing  him.  If  he  did  not  therefore  depart 
and  witlidraw  his  troops  out  of  those  parts,  he  would  no  long- 
er look  upon  him  as  a  friend,  but  an  enemy.  Should  he  even 
slay  him  in  battle,  he  v/as  well  assured  that  he  would  do  a  plea- 
sure to  many  of  the  nobles  and  great  men  at  Rome.  But  if 
he  would  retire  and  leave  him  inthe  undisturbed  possession  of 
his  country,  he  would  amply  reward  him. 

2.  I  do  not  write  to  you  as  often  as  I  could,  because  though 
misfortune  has  embittered  every  moment  of  my  life,  yet  I  feel 
myself  more  particularly  overwhelmed  with  an  insupportable 
weight  of  sorrow,  whenever  I  am  obliged  to  write  to  you,  or 
when  I  receive  letters  from  you.  And  oh  !  that  we  had  not 
been  actuated  by  t!iat  ardent  love  of  life  5  for  we  should  then 
have  escaped,  if  not  all,  at  least  the  greatest  part  of  the  evils 
of  life.  If  indeed  we  are  reserved  by  fortune  to  experience 
some  amehoration  of  our  destiny,  om*  errors  cannot  be  said 
to  have  been  irretrievable.  But  if  these  distresses  are  fixed 
and  unalterable,  no  other  wish  remains  but  to  see  you  once 
more,  the  only  comfort  and  soother  of  my  life,  and  to  breath 
my  last  in  your  arms. 


Fac  easjfac  facias^  scribas,  ^c.  are  often  used 
in  a  familiar  discourse  or  epistle;  though  fac 
seems  redundant,  it  is  meant  to  give  greater 
force  to  the  sense  :  as, 

Bdievc  me  your  obliged  friend. 

Sic  fete  existirnes,  me  tibi  devinctum. 


EXxVMPLES. 


I.  Sends,  confidential  person  to  him,  with  whom  he  may 
freely  confer  on  the  subject  which  we  mentioned. 


196 

2.  First  oi' all,  therefore,  be  resolute  and  linn. 

Non  is  sum  (/ui^  ^-c.  with  the  verb  in  the  sub- 
jimctive,  has  more  force  than  the  simple  verb : 
in  this  and  similar  expressions : 

Nor  do  I  deny : 

Non  is  sum  qui  ntgem. 

EXABIPLES. 

1 .  Kor  are  you  ignorant  who  you  are ;  nor  do  you  less  es- 
teem those  persons,  your  flatterers,  who  commend  you,  than 
suppose  them  to  be  envious,  who  do  not  admire  you. 

2.  Nor  do  I. deny  that  you  have  conducted  your  cause  with 
that  masterly  eloquence  which  every  one  knows  you  possess. 


Quid  est  quod  is  used  with  greater  elegance 
and  force  than  cur, 

EXAMPLES. 

1 .  Why  should  you  accuse  others  ?  IVhy  should  you  lay 
your  own  fault  to  the  charge  of  another  ? 

2.  Of  these  two  things  the  wise  man  makes  his  choice, 
either  that  in  rejecting  some  pleasures  he  obtains  others  far 
more  substantial ;  or  in  suffering  some  calamities,  he  wards  off 
others  much  more  afllictive.  This  being  my  firm  persuasion, 
why  sliould  I  dread  to  bring  my  friends  to  the  same  way  ot 
thinking? 

But  it  would  be  useless  to  study  copiousness, 
if  no  regard  was  paid  at  the  same  time  to  the 
dignity  of  style. 


Dignity  or  strength  of  style,  which  is  used  to 
excite  the  more  forcibly  the  attention  of  the 
reader,  is  that  virtue  by  which,  in  treating  of 
grave  subjects,  we  use  that  dignified  api)ropri- 
ate  language  which  w  ill  best  correspond  to  the 


197 

iiteas.  Though  this  dignity  of  style  consists  in 
the  ideas  only ;  for  high  sounding  words  only 
tend  the  more  to  expose  mean  and  trilling 
thoughts ;  yet  the  right  arrangement  and  selec- 
tion of  words  will  more  or  less  contribute,  not 
only  to  elucidate  the  idea,  but  to  give  it  a  great- 
er force  and  persuasion,  since  they  are  the  echo 
of  the  thoughts  that  arise  in  the  mind.  Thus 
Cicero,  in  describing  the  indignity  of  taking 
away  a  ring  from  a  Roman  citizen,  says,  civi 
Romano  annulus  de  digito  detract  us  est :  which 
is  more  dignified  tlian  if  he  had  said  ademtiis^  or 
ablatiis^  as  expressing  more  forcibly  the  act  of 
violence,  and  the  addition  of  de  digito  encreases 
the  dignity  of  the  picture. 

Thus  one  simple  idea  in  itself  will  not  affect 
the  mind  of  the  reader  so  much  as  when  it  is 
joined  with  others,  and  illustrated  by  several 
collateral  thoughts.  The  poverty  of  any  one, 
for  instance,  has  nothing  affecting  in  itself,  till  I 
improve  the  idea  by  representing  that  he  is  a 
man  ;  that  he  was  not  tnade  poor  by  his  own 
fault ;  that  he  is  worthy  of  a  better  fate,  and 
that  he  may  perhaps  perish  through  hunger. — 
The  death  of  a  father  does  not  excite  any  emo- 
tions, till  I  describe  the  forlornness  of  my  pre- 
sent situation,  that  I  have  lost  my  only  friend, 
my  best  defender ;  and  that  my  future  destiny 
is  uncertain. 


To  introduce  a  sentiment,  or  a  short  saying, 
which  conveys  some  general  trutli,  and  tends, 
lit  the  same  time,  to  illusuate  the  subject,  con- 

18 


1^8 

tributes  very  much  to  dignity  of  style.  Thus, 
in  praising  the  wisdom  of  Socrates,  and  his  tem- 
perance, ue  might  introduce  this  short  senti- 
ment :  Now  temperance  is  contented  with  a  little. 
Cicero  often  makes  use  of  these  instead  of  an 
argument, 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  Though  I  had  always  that  love  for  you,  of  which  you 

ourself  had  formed  a  just  estimate,  yet  this    late  action  of 

yours  has  kindled  in  me  that  ardor  of  airoction,  which  nothing 

can  exceed  :  for  believe  ;we,  there  is  nothing  more  engaging, 

nothing  more  beautiful,  nothing  more  amiable  than  virtue. 

*2.  Learn  from  me  now,  that  an  opportunity  of  informing 
yourself  first  falls  in  your  way,  how  many  qualifications  are  re- 
quired in  the  man  who  undertakes  a  puhlic  accusation  !  and  if 
you  can  with  justice  lay  claim  to  any  of  them,  I  shall  frankly 
give  up  the  point  in  debate;  first,  an  unblemished  innoceiut 
and  intei^rity  :  for  nothing  can  be  more  absurd,  than  for  a  man 
to  call  in  question  the  life  of  another,  who  is  unable  to  give 
an  account  of  his  oicn. 


It  contributes  also  to  dignity  of  style,  to  in- 
troduce a  fact  or  a  thought,  which  is  certain  and 
manifest,  with  certiim  cst^  (juis  nan  videtj  non  in- 
telligit  ?  Quern  fugit  ?  Quis  est  qui  nesciat  ?  and 
these  expressions,  Sole  clarius  est,  nemo  negat, 
quis  est  qui  dubitat  ?  Constat  inter  omnes,  ^-c. 

EXAMPLES. 

1 .  Who  knows  not  that  Hannibal  was  at  last  conquered  by 
Scipio  ? 

2.  Who  knows  not  that  the  qualities  of  the  mind  are  much 
more  noble  ll'        '    -<•  of  the  Iwdy  ? 

3.  It  is  rr>  ^  c.  that  nothing  can  be  more  prejudicial  to 
the  mind  and  body,  than  indolence. 


It  sometimes  adds  vcrv  much  to  the  force  of 


199 

style  to  represent  a  thing  which  is  future  as  pre- 
sent, because  it  places  it  as  it  were  before  our 
eyes  :  as, 

And  thus  a  very  great  tax  will  be  laid  upon 
the  land  : 

Sicque  cigro,  pergrande  vectigal  imponiiur. 

EXAiMPLES. 

1.  If  you  continue  this  way  of  life,  you  will  he  miserable. 

2.  Will  ye  hesitate,  Romans,  to  employ  so  favorable  an  op- 
portunity, presented  and  put  into  your  hands  by  the  immortal 
Gods,  for  the  preservation  and  enlargement  of  your  empire  ? 
Why  do  we  not,  when  the  Gods  so  clearly  discover  their  plea- 
sure, entrust  likewise  this  royal  war  to  the  care  of  the  man 
who  has  already  terminated  so  many  others  with  the  highest 
advantage  to  the  state  ? 


The  use  of  interrogations  and  exclamations 
tends  also  to  give  greater  strength  and  vehe- 
mence to  the  subject,  when  the  thing  of  which 
we  speak  is  very  certain,  though  it  miaht  have 
l)een  rendered  by  a  simple  assertion  ;  as, 

Nothing  is  sweeter  than  literary  ease  : 

Quid  est  dulcius  otio  literato  ? 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  What  can  be  sweeter  in  tlielife  of  man  than  friendship? 
What  shall  yon  find  pleasanter  than  the  study  of  literature  ? 
O  happy  they,  in  whom  a  happy  disposition  from  nature  is  ac- 
companied by  the  kindness  and  bounty  of  nature. 

2.  But  ichere  is  the  man  that  possesses  or  intleed  can  be 
required  to  possess  greater  abilities  in  war  ? 

3.  Who  is  so  dull  of  comprehension  as  not  to  see  ?  Who 
is  so  ignorant  as  not  to  perceive  ? 

4.  Oh  !  the  excellence  and  beauty  of  virtue  ! 

5.  Oh  !  wretched  man,  if  thou  perceivest !  more  wretched 
if  thou  dost  not  perceive,  that  this  is  committed  to  History; 
that  this  stands  upon  record  x  that  no  future  age  will  ever  for- 
pet  this  fact. 


^inj 


Where  the  idea  conveys  somotliing  great,  Ci- 
cero freqiuiitly  corrects  himself  in  order  to  in- 
troduce something  still  greater ;  as, 

Such  an  infatuation,  or  to  speak  more  prop- 
rly,  such  a  madness  possessed  thee .... 

Tantus  igitur  te  stupor  oppressit^  vely  ut  venus 
dicam^  furor. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  You  Iiave  brought  to  Judgment  not  a  thief ^  but  a  crmi" 
won  (J  "  ;  not  an  aduherer^  but  the  idolater  of  chastity  ; 
not  a  \:ionH  person  J  huiihe  inveterate  enemy  of  all  sa- 
cred and  religious  rites ;  not  a  ruffian^  but  a  most  savage 
^  utcherer^oi  citizens  and  allies. 

2.  AVhat  Charybdis  so  voracious  !  Charyhdis  did  I  say  ? 
If  there  ever  was  such  a  monster^  she  was  only  a  single  one  ' 
The  Oceanitsclf  by  Heavens,  seems  scarce  capable  of  swal- 
lowing up  so  much  wealth,  so  widely  scattered,  and  situated  in 

•>  many  distant  places,  in  so  short  a  space  of  time. 


It  dignifies  the  subject  sometimes  to  make 
some  concessions,  in  such  a  manner  that  nothing 
can  follow  from  them  against  our  argument;  as. 

Let  us  suppose  that  it  is  so,  yet 

Fingamus,  ita  esse,  non  tamen .... 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  Let  US  grant  that  it  is  so,  yet  li  does  not  follow  from 
this,  that  virtue  does  not  aflbrd  some  consolation  in  misery. 

2.  Let  them  have  been  avaricious,  let  theui  have  been  pas- 
sionate and  pertinacious,  yet  they  must  be  allowed  to  have 
been  innocent  of  this  crime ;  of  this  mad  and  parricidal  deed^ 
and  of  many  other  charges  brought  against  them. 


It  gives  also  dignity  to  a  subject  purposely  to 
pass  over  some  arguments  ;  which  is  done  ei- 
ther by  merely  referring  to  them  in  a  general 
way,  or  by  pretending  that  we  shall  pass  them 


201 

over,  as  unnecessary,  though  we  lay  much  stress 
upon  them :  as, 

Therefore  I  shall  pass  over  that  first  act  of  his 
life,  the  most  scandalous  and  the  most  flagitious : 

Itaque  primtim  ilium  actum  istius  vitce  turpissi- 
mum  etfiagitiosissimum  prcetermittam. 

EXAMPLES. 

1 .  Suffer  me,  in  this  place,  to  suppress  the  mention  of  your 
calamity  :  I  designedly  pass  over  many  things,  leaving  it  to 
your  own  conjectures  to  inform  you  liow  important  the  war  is 
like  to  prove. 

2.  I  shall  not  therefore  expatiate  here  on  his  great  actions 
at  home  and  abroad,  by  sea  and  by  land,  with  the  unusual  suc- 
cess that  has  attended  them  ;  a  success  so  great,  that  not  only 
did  his  countrymen  always  concur  with,  his  allies  perform,  and 
his  enemies  submit  to  whatever  he  desired  ;  but  even  the  winds 
and  waves  seem  to  have  been  obsequious  to  his  will. 

3.  Why  should  I  publish  his  decrees,  his  rapaciousness,  the 
estates  he  bestowed,  and  these,  which  he  violently  seized  ? 


Words  that  convey  some  impressive  or  lofty 
idea  may  sometimes  be  repeated ;  as, 

When  a  lav^  is  proposed  in  behalf  of  our  al- 
lies, not  to  hear  their  complaints ! 

Cum  lex  sociorum  causa  rogata  sit,  sociorum 
causas  non  audire  ! 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  \( tears  avail  nothing,  why  dost  thou  indulge  them?  say 
tears, 

2.  If  we  profess  the  name  of  Christ,  ought  we  not  to  imitate 
his  life  ? 

3.  If  the  freedom  of  voting  is  given  to  the  Roman  people,  in 
bestowing  the  Consulship  on  whom  they  plejise,  and  even  the 
plebian  is  not  deprived  of  the  hope  of  arriving  at  the  highest 
honors,  provided  he  is  worthy  of  those  honors,  this  common- 
wealth cannot  long  exist. 

*  18 


1'02 

To  tiiis  may  be  rcrorred  Ant'inptathesis,  or  an 
iiivrrtod  rcprtilion  of  the  same  words. 

EXAMPLES. 

1 .  Those  who  wisli  to  appear  learned  to  the  ignorant,  ap- 
rant  lo  the  IrarnefL 

^.  A  v.u  do  not  seem  to  have  conquered^  in  order  that  you 
might  obtain  a  triumph^  but  to  have  obtained  a  triuntjjh,  be- 
cause  j/ou  conquered. 

:3.  The  rich  province,  which  he  had  entered  a  beggar,  he 
left  poor  and  deaolate^  himself  being  loaded  toith  riches  ami 
ffjjoils. 


But  what  will  chiefly  contribute  to  give  dig- 
nity to  the  style,  will  be,  not  merely  the  use  oi 
phrases,  but  the  change  of  languid  into  niort 
forcible  and  dignified  words,  and  sometimes, 
w  here  the  nature  of  the  subject  will  admit  of  it, 
the  adoption  of  a  word  which  has  the  force  of 
an  hyperbole. 

Thus,  where  haste  i«  implied,  volare  may  be 
used  for  ircj  and  advolare  for  venire. 

To  expose  any  one  to   danger,  will  be  more 
forcibly  rendered  by  prodere. 

To  remove  the  terrors  of  the  mind  :  depellere 
terrores^  is  more  forcible  than  removere. 

A  man  full  of  crimes :  sceleribus  coopertusy  h 
better  than  plcmis. 

Obvcdlaius  is  stronger  thani  munitus,  i-c. 


As  to  the  right  disposition  of  words,  in  order 
lo  give  greater  force  to  the  style,  no  certain  rules 
'*an  be  given,  as  it  must  depend  oji  the  feeling? 


20S 

and  the  ideas  of  the  writer ;  and  sometimes  the 
word,  on  which  tlie  chief  strength  lies,  must 
precede,  and  sometimes  must  be  thrown  back ; 
as,  the  Roman  citizen,  whom  we  have  men- 
tioned before,  does  not  exclaim.  Sum  civis  Ro- 
manus^  but  Civis  Roinanus  sum. — Gratce  mihi 
luce,  literce  faere.  If  there  is  an  idea  to  which 
we  wish  the  attention  of  the  hearer  or  reader  to 
be  immediately  directed,  that  ought  to  precede: 
if  on  the  contrary  it  is  necessary  to  surprize  ex- 
pectation, tlien  the  most  forcible  Avord  will  be 
thrown  back  to  the  last  part  of  the  sentence  ;  as 
indeed  it  is  most  agreeable  to  nature  to  promise 
little  at  the  beginning,  and  to  finish  with  tiie 
greater  force  ;  as,  / 

The  cruel  punishments,  which  he  has  inflict- 
ed on  Roman  citizens,  drive  him  headlong  to 
his  fate ;  some  of  whom  he  has  unmercifully  be- 
headed, some  he  has  murdered  in  their  prisons, 
and  others,  at  the  very  moment  that  they  pub- 
licly appealed  to  their  rights  of  liberty  and  citi- 
zenship, he  ignominiously  suspended  on  the  cross. 


CPAPTER  VI. 

OF    THE   STRUCTURE   OF   A   PERIOD. 


Constat  enim  ille  ambitus  et  plena  comprehensjo  e  quatuor 
fere  partibus,  quae  membra  dicimus,  ut  et  aures  impleat,  et 
ne  brevior  sit,  quam  satis  sit,  neque  longior. 

As  in  the  course  of  these  exercises  several  al- 
lusions have  been  made  to  the  structure  of  a  pe- 
riod, in  the  rules  for  the  arrangement  and  distri- 
bution of  the  clauses  of  a  sentence,  and  notice  has 
been  taken  of  that  Concinnitas,  or  Harmony, 
which  is  so  conducive  to  elegant  composition,  it 
t^  ill  now  be  necessary  to  introduce  the  scholar  to 
the  knowledge  of  a  finished  period.  Modern 
languages  indeed  do  not  admit  of  that  circuitous 
circumscription  (if  we  may  be  allowed  the  word) 
which  the  Greek  and  Latin  writers  were  at  lib- 
erty to  use,  and  which  constitutes  in  a  great  de- 
gree the  peculiar  beauty  and  elegance  of  their 
style.  Though,  at  the  same  time,  it  must  be  ad- 
mitted, that  if  every  sentence  \vas  so  studiously 
labored,  that  each  would  form  a  perfect  period, 
the  style  would  become  little  different  from  Me- 
tre :  for  though  Aristotle  praises  it  as  being  \Ssioi 
euwidrq  X'Xi  euupy:uovEi^o^,  pleasing  and  ea- 
sy to  be  learned  and  remembered,  yet  it  should 
also  be  mixed  and  diffused,  and  as  Cicero  says, 
though  it  should  be  conformed  to  the  rules  of 


203r 

liarmony,  yet  it  will  then  please  most,  when  art 
is  most  disguised  and  least  visible. 

I  shall  therefore  give  as  correct  a  definition  a!$ 
I  can  of  a  period,  that  by  observing  the  care  the 
ancients  bestowed  upon  it,  the  scholar  may  see 
the  necessity  of  giving  as  much  attention  as  pos- 
sible to  the  rules,  which  they  have  left  us,  in  or- 
<ier  to  acquire  a  good  Latin  style.  It  will  be  of 
great  consequence  to  understand  the  nature  of 
it,  in  order  that  he  may  be  enabled  to  connect 
and  vary  the  different  parts  of  a  period,  and  may 
at  pleasure  bestow  upon  his  style  the  perspicuity, 
copiousness,  and  dignity,  of  which  his  subject 
will  admit.  For  according  to  Quintilian's  idea, 
you  may  have  a  very  ingenious  plan,  and  good 
materials  for  raising  the  edifice,  yet  if  the  skill 
of  the  architect  is  not  displayed  in  the  use  and 
disposition  of  them,  the  building  will  only  ex- 
hibit a  confused  and  irregular  mass. 

Cicero  says,  Qtiinam  igititr  dicendi  est  modus 
melior^  quam  tit  Latine^  ut  plane^  ut  ornate^  ut  ad 
id,  quodcmique  agetur,  apte  congruenterqxie  dica- 
mus.  These  rules  which  he  gives  for  the  direc- 
tion of  the  orator,  may  with  equal  propriety  be 
applied  to  the  Latin  writer.  Tlie  first  requisite 
for  elegant  composition  is  good  Latinity,  or  a 
choice  of  such  words*  and  expressions  as  were  in 
genergil  use  among  the  best  Latin  writers.  The 
next  tiling  necessary  to  be  considered,  is  such  an 
arrangement  and  position  of  words  as  may  ren- 
der the  sense  intelligible,  and  produce  perspi- 
cuity, the  true  parent  of  elegance,  without  which. 
ihe  most  studied  selection  of  phrases  will  only 


206 

create  a  confused  chaos  of  unintelligible  words* 
But  in  order  to  effect  this,  the  arrangement  must 
assume  the  form  of  a  period,  with  its  proper 
members  and  proportions:  not,  however,  that 
the  sentence  is  to  be  extended  or  overcharged 
with  unnecessary  matter,  merely  for  the  sake  of 
completing  the  exact  parts  and  dimensions  of  a 
just  period.  What  is  observed  by  the  apte  and 
congruenter  is  such  an  agreement  of  the  words 
and  ideas  to  the  subject,  that  a  proper  connexion 
and  correspondence  may  be  maintained  between 
the  parts  and  the  body,  so  as  to  form  a  perfect 
whole.  Since  a  period  is  effected  by  a  dissec- 
tion of  a  primary  sentence  or  proposition,  by 
means  of  clauses  that  tend  to  explain,  to  define, 
to  denote  the  cause,  time  or  place  of  the  subject, 
it  is  necessary  that  they  should  be  inserted  apte^ 
that  is  after  that  w  ord,  to  which  they  properly 
belong  :  as  we  should  say,  ego  librum^  quia  pul- 
cker  est^  non  vendam ;  and  not  ego^  quia  pulcher 
est^  non  vendam  librum:  which  proves  also 
what  we  have  already  observed,  that  those  clau- 
ses, beginning  by  quia,  licet,  quiim,  quamvis,  ubiy 
qui,  ^^c.  when  introduced  for  the  sake  of  a  peri- 
od, are  not  to  begin  the  sentence,  otherwise  they 
could  not  be  said  to  form  a  circuit,  or  period, 
but  they  must  come  after  the  nominative  or  some 
other  word.  And  when  some  practice  and  exer- 
cise have  been  bestowed  upon  the  composition 
of  a  period,  with  the  observance  of  its  most  prom- 
inent and  distinguishing  rules,  it  will  spontane- 
ously acquire  a  coherrence  of  the  parts,  and  will 
as  it  were,  perform  its  stated  revolutions,  with 
perfect  regularity,  at  the  same  time  without  that 


207 

strict  and  labored  minuteness,  which  would  only 
render  the  style  stiff  and  puerile. 

Aristotle  defines  a  period  thus :  Xfj/o  &  TtepioSoi^ 
?J^iv  "exovaav  a^x^  '^^  t^'k^vrtr^v  avTrymff  avrr^ 
xoLL  (.leycdog  evcvvonrov.  It  is  a  sentence,  which 
runs  on  circuitously  through  several  parts 
or  members,  till  it  arrives  at  its  perfect  conclu- 
sion. The  beginning  and  the  end,  or  the  nom- 
inative and  the  verb,  are  divided  by  the  inser- 
tion of  other  clauses,  tending  to  explain  and  de- 
fine the  subject,  but  at  the  same  time  so  con- 
nected by  the  grammatical  structure,  that  tliiB 
reader  sees  plainly  that  he  is  not  yet  arrived  at 
the  conclusion  till  he  has  found  those  things  in- 
troduced and  expressed,  which  the  first  words 
gave  him  reason  to  expect. 

EXAMPLE. 

The  Roman  youth,  havinc:  at  length  recovered  from  their 
eonsternatioii,  when  the  light  re-appeared  cahii  and  serene  af- 
ter so  violent  a  hurricane,  yet  observing  the  royal  seat  empty, 
though  they  gave  some  credit  to  the  assertion  of  the  Patricians, 
who  had  stood  near  it,  that  he  had  been  caught^jp,  and  carried 
aloft  by  the  storm,  maintained  for  a  time  a  sorroirful  silence^ 
Struck  as  it  were  with  a  dread  of  their  forlorn  situation. 


The  first  feature  or  character  of  a  period  then 
is  a  circuit,  since  without  these  secondary  or  in- 
tervening parts,  it  would  remain  a  simple  pri- 
mary idea  or  proposition.  For  instance :  When 
Sallust  says,  Concordia  parvce  res  crescnnt ;  Dis- 
cordid  maximce  dilabuniur^  that  is  not  a  period, 
because  each  member  is  separately  understood. 
But  if  we  WQiv  to  say,  Quemadmodum  concordid 
parvce  res  crescunty  ila  discordWi  etiam  maximce  di- 


208 

lahuntur^  it  would  then  nearly  form  a  period, 
since  die  sense  would  not  be  discovered  before 
the  completion  q(  the  sentence.  Still  however 
this  example,  strictly  speaking  does  not  give  a 
precise  illustration  of  a  period,  as  diere  is  no 
intervening  member;  but  it  server  merely  to 
show  the  suspension  of  the  sense  till  the  sentence 
is  complete.  In  order  to  constitute  a  complete 
period,  or  circuit,  the  sentence  must  as  it  were 
be  intersected  by  the  insertion  of  one  or  more 
intervening  clauses  or  members  ;  as  in  this  ex- 
ample ; 

But  T.  Veturius  and  Sp.  Postumius,  in  their 
second  consulship,  because,  after  their  ill  suc- 
cess at  Caudium,  our  legions  having  passed  un- 
der the  yoke,  they  had  agreed  to  make  peace 
with  the  Samnites,  were  surrendered  up  to  them. 
At  verb  T.  Veturius  et  Sp.  Postumius,  cum  ite- 
rum  consules  esscnt,  quia,  cum  male  pus^natum 
apud  Caudium  essct,  legionibus  nostrissub  jugum 
missis,  pacemcum  Samnitibus  fecerant,  deditisunt 
his.  In  this  sentence  the  primary  idea  is,  T. 
Veturius  et  Sp.  Postumius  dediti  smit  his,  w  hich 
is  divided  by  the  clause  or  circuit  expressing  the 
cause,  quia  pacem  cum  Samnitibusfecerant ;  and 
this  again  is  intersected  by  two  other  clauses  in- 
dicating the  time,  cum  malt  pugnatum  apud  Cau- 
dium esset,  and  legio7iibus  nosiris  sub  jugum  mis- 
sis. 

The  least  attention  will  easily  discover   the 
beauty  of  such  a  period,  and  how  essentially  n( 
cessary  the  insertion  of  these  circuitous  or  inter- 
mediate clauses  is  to  elegance  of  style. 


209 

1  shall  here  subjoin  a  few  examples,  to  show 
how  from  a  simple,  a  compound  sentence  may 
be  formed,  consisting  of  two,  three  or  four  mem- 
bers, each  member  corresponding  and  contribu- 
ting to  the  whole. 

Let  the  simple  proposition  be, 

That  Alexander  by  living  temperately,  would 
have  acquired  the  veneration  of  posterity. 

If  you  wish  to  extend  this  sentence  by  mak- 
ing it  to  consist  of  two  members,  say, 

Alexander,  if  he  had  lived  temperately. 
Would  have  acquired  the  veneration  of  posterity. 
Three  members : 

If  Alexander,  as  much  as  he  excelled  other 
commanders  in  warlike  bravery. 

Had  also  surpassed  them  in  the  virtue  of  tem- 
perance. 

He  w  ould  have  acquired  the  highest  venera- 
lion  of  posterity. 

Four  members : 

If  as  much  as  Alexander  excelled  other  com- 
manders in  warlike  bravery, 

He  had  surpassed  them  also  in  the  virtue  of 
temperance. 

He  would  not  less  have  commanded  the  ven- 
eration of  posterity. 

Than  he  did  the  love,  the  admiration,   and 
the  absolute  subjection  of  his  own  people. 
Four  members : 

If  unfortunately  impudence  had  the  same  in- 
fluence in  the  senate  and  at  the  bar, 

As  open  and  daring  violence  prevails  in  the 
fields  and  solitary  places  ; 


210 


My  client  would  not  less  be  obliged  to  sub- 
niit  to  the  cflrontery  of  his  adversary  in  defend- 
ing his  cause, 

Than  in  the  commission  of  that  injury  he 
found    himself  inferior  to  him  in  bold  and  dar- 


ing courage. 


T\v  o  members : 

I  felt  the  most  earnest  desire  to  be  at  Rome, 
for  many  reasons : 

Chiefly  that  when  candidate  for  the  Consu- 
late, and  during  my  administration,  I  might  give 
you  proofs  of  that  good  will,  which  I  owe  you. 
Three  members : 

For  myself,  at  least,  the  considerations  I  now 
lay  before  you  have  had  so  happy  an  effect  on 
my  own  mind, 

As  not  only  to  reconcile  me  to  all  the  incon- 
veniences of  old  age, 

But  to  render  it  even  an  agreeable  state  to  me. 


The  distribution  of  a  period  into  its  parts  will 
become  very  easy  to  the  scholar,  where  the  sub- 
ject itself  supplies  him  with  the  particles^ieces- 
sary  to  form  the  connexion,  as  those  that  denote 
Ji  cause,  condition,  relation,  opposition  and  com- 
parison, or  that  tend  to  explain  or  define  it :  as, 
Qsium^  quia^  si,  (juodsi,  fjuamvisj  ut,  qui^  and  its 
compounds,  aut^  velj  ubi,  ^c. 

EXAMPLES.  ^ 

The  simple  proposition  is, 
I  have  sent  you  the  promised  book. 
By  adding  the  cause,  the  period  becomes  bi- 
mcmbris. 

Because  you  have  postponed  your  coming, — I 
end  you  the  book  I  promised. 


211 

Comj)arison : 

For  as  storms  and  liiiri  icanes  recommend  and 
enhance  the  calm  and  temperature  of  the  seas 
and  of  the  skies, 

So  we  may  be  allowed  to  suppose,  that  your 
former  tumults  and  troubles  arose  merely  to  give 
a  greater  zest  and  favor  to  your  present  tran- 
quility. 

Condition : 

If  WQ  had  not  on  our  private  account  many 
and  just  motives  for  the  friendship  subsisting  be- 
tween us, 

I  would  retrace  the  first  origin  of  our  intima- 
cy from  the  happy  intercourse  existing  between 
our  parents. 

This  last  might  easily  be  extended  to  three 
members : 

If  we  had  not  on  our  private  account  many 
and  just  motives  for  the  friendship  subsisting  be- 
tween us. 

Which  a  mutvial  exchange  of  good  oflicesfrom 
our  earliest  years  has  so  happily  confirmed ; 

I  would  retrace  the  first  origin  of  our  intima- 
cy from  the  friendly  intercourse  existing  bct\veen 
our  parents. 

Concession : 

Though  I  could  not  but  receive  the  highest 
satisfaction  from  the  glory  of  my  dear  friend  Do- 
labella, 

And  it  filled  me  with  the  most  lively  joy  and 
pleasure  on  his  account. 

Yet  I  cannot  but  confess  that  I  feel  my  heart 
most  sensiblv  afifected. 


212 

That  in  the  opinion  of  the  people  I  am  asso- 
ciated with  you  in  the  participation  of  your 
praises. 

Interrogation  : 
And  now,  among  the  different  sentiments  of 
the  philosophers  concerning  the  consequence  of 
our  final  dissolution, 
May  I  not  venture  to  declare  what  are  my  own  : 

The  relative  qiii^  quce^  quod^  Avith  its  com- 
pounds, followed  by  is,  talis,  iantiis,  ^. 

It  is  not  fit  that  any  credit  should  be  given  to 
those  men, 

Who  appear  to  speak  with  too  much  vehe- 
mence for  their  own  emolument. 

But  it  must  be  most  attentively  considered 
by  those,  who  have  the  care  of  education. 

What  is  the  particular  bent  and  disposition  of 
those,  whom  they  instruct. — (Three  members 
may  easily  be  effected  here  by  beginning  widi 
the  relative  who.) 

Who  then  can  censure,  or  injustice  be  angr} 
with  me. 

If  those  hours,  which  others  employ  in  busi- 
jiess,  in  pleasures,  in  celebrating  public  solemni- 
ties, in  refreshing  the  body  and  unbending  the 
mind ; 

If  the  time,  which  is  spent  by  some  in  mid- 
night banquctings,  in  diversions  and  in  gaminp 

I  myself  employ  in  reviewing  and  reti'acin;^ 
diosc  studies  ? 

Ut,  qncmadmodum,  sicut,  ^c.  followed  by  sir 
qiianqitam,  followed  by  tamcn,  ^c. 


21S         //f 


/\^ 


Beware,  citizens,  beware  16^1,  as  it  was  glori- 
ous for  them  to  transmit  so  extensive  an  empire 
to  posterity, 

Your  inability  to  preserve  and  defend  it  prove 
not  infamous  for  you. 

Though  this  past  behavior  of  thine  was  be- 
yond all  patience, 

Yet  have  I  borne  with  it  as  I  could. 


The  structure  of  a  period  will  be  easily  under- 
stood from  these  examples ;  but  as  some  difficul- 
ty will  arise,  where  the  simple  idea  does  not  im- 
mediately supply  materials  for  the  formation  oi 
the  period  ;  and  as  nothing  contributes  more  to 
the  true  elegance  of  style,  I  shall  give  a  few  gen- 
eral rules,  which,  as  far  as  it  can  be  done,  will 
enable  the  scholar  to  find  out  the  necessary  clau- 
ses or  members  proper  to  be  inserted.  In  con- 
sidering a  simple  proposition,  which  you  wish  to 
extend,  and  distribute  into  the  parts  of  a  period, 
it  will  be  easy  to  discover  whether  it  includes  the 
idea  of  cause,  condition,  concession,  time,  place, 
&c.  and  may  with  propriety  admit  the  insertion 
of  the  particles  mentioned  above,  proper  to  ex- 
press that  idea.  Suppose  the  subject  is,  the  De- 
struction of  Corinth.  The  first  idea  that  arises 
is  the  simple  fact  that  L.  Muramius  overthrew 
Corinth.  A  scholar,  therefore,  in  order  to  give 
it  the  first  requisite  mentioned  by  Cicero,  the 
Lalim,  would  say,  L.  Mummius  Connihum  fun- 
(lit lis  delevit.  But  if  he  wished  to  give  it  the 
form  of  a  more  finished  period,  the  question 
might  be  started.  Why  he  did  it  :    what  reasons 

19* 


2X4 

could  influence  the  Roman  commander   to  dc 
stro}^  that  ciiy,  at  that  time  (he  celebrated  seat 
of  arts.     Tfiis  (lucstion  bcin^  resolved,  will  im- 
mediately give  the  sentence  the  form  and  suuc- 
ture  of  a  period. 

L.  x'lummius,  becavse  he  himself  was  very 
igUimiLt  of  the  liberal  arts, 
Ovr-rtiirew  Corinth  with  unparalleled  barbarity. 
And  by  dwelling  a  little  more  on  the  circnm- 
stauce  of  the  overthrow,  the  consideration  that 
this  famous  city  .was  the  seat  of  the  arts,  ma} 
?j:ive  another  member,  and  indeed  more  orna- 
ment  to  the  period. 

L.   Mummius,   being  himself  very  ignorant 
and  illiterate, 

roved,  with  the  most  unparalleled  bar- 
the  famous  city,  Corinth, 
V  ,.ich  was,  as  it  were,  the  eye,  and  the  parent 
of  Greece. 

Tiius  an  additional  clause  explanatory  of  the 
subject,  or  denoting  concession,  &:c.  may  very 
easily  be  found  out :  as, 

Industry  without  genius  is  of  very  little  use; 
It  will  soon  occur  to  the  mind,  that  industry  is 
very  commendable,  and  that  will  form  a  period- 
Industry,  though  in  itself  very  cominendable, 
Is  of  little  use  without  the  help  of  genius.  Or, 
iiulustry,  2/ it  is,  or  ichich  is,  without  genius,  &c. 

There  arc  other  methods  of  giving  to  a  simple 
'-'  **''vx*  the  form  of  a  period,  which  are  more 
-  I        .  and  which  use  will  soon  render  famiHar 
i«nd  easy  ;  as  by  changing  one  word  into  anotft 


2lij 

er.  liius  an  adjective  or  a  participle  might  he 
changed  into  qici^  ^c.  A  fortunate  unhoped-for 
hour  will. arrive;  say,  i(;/uc/t  shall  not  be  hoped 
for.  Propter^  ob,  may  be  changed  into  quiaj 
cum^  ^c.  All  men  respect  your  brother  for  his 
great  learning,  say,  because  he  is  endowed  with 
learning.  This  might  indeed  be  effected  by  us- 
ing a  periphrasis,  or  any  kind  of  circumlocution: 
In  the  structure,  however,  of  a  period,  let  it  be 
repeated,  that  great  care  must  be  taken  that  the 
aptt  and  congruenter  mentioned  by  Cicero,  be 
diligently  observed,  that  the  adoption  of  addi- 
tional clauses  be  appropriate  and  illustrative  of 
the  subject,  and  that  they  do  not  extend  beyond 
four  members  :  Pulcherrima  enim  est  ilia  Perio- 
dus^  qucB  membris  quatuor  absohiticr,  ut  q\i(B  ani- 
onum  suspendat^  et  aures  impleat ;  for  though  ma- 
ny ancient  writers  have  transgressed  this  rule, 
that  transgression  only  renders  the  sentences  too 
fatigueing  or  obscure.  Long  sentences  of  that 
kind  have  been  denominated  Ttvevuara^  which 
might,  and  rcxcTr^tg,  those  that  could  not,  be  prp- 
nounced  in  one  breath. 

0F    PROSE-MEASURE    OR    HARMONY. 

TO  what  has  been  said  concerning  the  strue- 
uire  of  the  period,  it  will  not  be  unnecessary  to 
add  a  few  observations  concerning  the  harmo- 
ny of  prose,  or  that  measured  equality  of  num- 
bers  and  exact  proportion  of  parts,  which  forms 
^  great  a  part  of  a  finished  period,  or  rather 
which  seems  naturally  to  arise  from  its  forma- 


lion.  This  (xerpov^  or  ratio  pedum, ^  which  Quin- 
tilian  pronounces  to  be  even  more  diflicult  in 
prose  than  in  verse,  and  to  which  Cicero  attiib- 
utes  an  incredible  force,  is  more  easily  felt  than 
explained,  and  rests  more  upon  the  judgment  of 
the  cars,  than  upon  any  rules  of  art.  Why,  for 
instance,  in  the  structure  of  a  period,  when  tlie 
sense  is  completed,  does  there  sometimes  seem 
something  wanting  ?  As  in,  Neminem  vestrum 
ignorarcj  arbitror,  judices,  hunc  per  hosce  dies  ser-- 
monem  vulgi^  atque  hanc  opinionem  populi  Roma- 
nifuisse.  Why  hosce  instead  of  hos  ?  Why  did 
not  the  sentence  end  at  sermonem  vulgi  fuisse^ 
when  the  sense  admitted  it  ?  Merely  because 
the  period  is  better  rounded  and  finished,  and 
pleases  the  car  better.  And  indeed  Cicero,  and 
many  of  the  ancient  writers,  bestowed  so  much 
attention  on  the  composition  of  their  sentences, 
that  they  observed  that  Concinnitas,  not  merely 
hi  the  principal  members  of  the  period,  but  even 
in  the  other  subdivisions  of  those  members, 
which  they  call  incisUj  commata,  and  those  arti- 
ficial stops,  which  a  nice  observer  will  easily  dis- 
tinguish, and  which  depend  upon  the  respira- 
tion: As  in  the  reading  of  this  line,  Animadver- 
ti^judices — omnem  accusatoris  orationem — in  du- 
os— divisam  esse  partes.  Here  it  is  easy  to  ob- 
serve that  Concinnitas  in  each  word  tha't  forms 
the  ''  '  Some  of  these  clausula'  miji;ht  ap- 
pea.  .*  ij  :amc,  if  suffered  to  end  too  abruptly, 
though  the  sense  might  permit  it ;  but  when 
they  are  taken  up  and  supported  by  other  words 
that  follow ,  the  course  of  the  sentence  become*? 


217 

dear  and  smooth,  as,  Non  vult,  P.  R.  ohsoletii> 
Cfimimbus  accusari  J^errem  :  It  is  easy  to  ob- 
serve a  harshness  in  this  conclusion,  but  this  is 
corrected  by  the  continuation,  nova  postulate  in- 
midita  desiderata  which  completes  the  sentence. 

This  harmony  of  numbers  may  be  defined,  a 
certain  measure  or  part  of  any  thing,  as  of  a  sen- 
tence, made  equal  to  the  other  parts,  each  to 
each  :  As  in  poetical  numbers,  tlie  feet  are  equal 
to  each  other ;  the  two  short  syllables,  for  in- 
stance, of  a  dactyl  being  equal  in  time  to  the 
long  syllable  of  the  spondee,  the  dactyl  and  the 
spondee  are  equal  to  each  other.  This  measur- 
ed equality,  or  proportion  of  parts,  being  con- 
nected together,  and  answering  to  one  another, 
contributes  indeed  greatly  to  perspicuity  and 
smoothness  of  style.  But  to  be  too  sohcitous  on 
this  subject,  would  be  a  foolish  and  supersti- 
tious adherence  to  rules,  wliich  might  often  sac- 
rifice the  sense  to  the  wish  of  pleasing  the  ear. 
For  it  must  be  observed  in  the  construction  of 
these  harmonic  numbers,  that  the  sense  and  the 
subject  must  afford  materials  for  it,  and  then  it 
may  be  easily  effected  by  variation  and  copious- 
ness. Nor  is  it  necesary  to  mention  w  hat  feet 
and  what  measure  are  most  adapted  to  create 
harmony,  but  merely  that  it  is  their  proper  dis- 
position, which  produces  it,  and  briefly  to  state 
that  long  syllables  have  more  weight  and  au- 
thority, and  render  sentences  more  dignified, 
but  may  also  tend  to  make  them  too  heavy : 
that  short  syllables  have  more  rapidity,  and  thus 
by  being  properly  mixed  with  the  long,   make 


2U 

the  sentences  run  smoothly.  But  it  uouUl  be 
wrong  to  study  too  much  precision  in  these 
things,  for  though  the  sentence  may  ha\  e  its 
members,  it  is  not  to  have  a  regular  quantity  : 
nor  is  it  necessary  to  observe  that  minuteness, 
which  some  recommend,  of  noun  answering  to 
noun,  and  even  syllable  to  syllable ;  but  that 
there  should  be  some  equality  preserved  between 
each  member  of  the  period ;  with  this  excep- 
tion, that  if  there  is  a  difference,  the  sentence 
should  rise  by  a  kind  of  climax,  and  that  the 
last  member  should  be  longer  than  the  prece- 
ding. For  this  reason,  Quintilian  recommends 
that  more  attention  should  be  paid  to  the  end- 
ing o^  the  sentence,  that  it  may  leave  a  good 
impression  upon  the  reader  or  hearer,  as  that  is 
the  place  where  he  is,  as  it  were,  to  breathe  and 
refresh  himself  before  he  enters  upon  the  next 
sentence :  And  therefore  Cicero  prefers,  for  the 
ending,  a  ditrochee  [-vj-u]  as  c&mprohavit^  or  a 
j)aeon  tertius  [uu-u]  esse  mdmtur :  this  last  he 
also  assigns  to  the  beginning  of  a  sentence ;  and 
chiefly  the  dochimus,  which  consists  of  the  bac- 

chic  and  iambic  ]}> ^'-"]j  ^^  ^^  ^^^^  iambic 

and  crctic  [u u— ]   Servare  qiuim  plunmos; 

as  it  would  be  wrong  to  say,  Pater,  postquam 
liter  as  ad  te  missas  legerat,  et  se  rescript  urum  esse 
promiserat^obiit.  There  is  here  an  evident  inequal- 
ity between  the  last  member  of  the  sentence  and 
the  two  preceding,  which  may  be  easily  correct- 
ed by  lengthening  the  last,  obiit,  and  saying, 
pradr.r  ovminm  obiit  opinionem. 

Wi)<u  lias  been  said  concerning  numbers  may 


219 

be  further  illustrated.  When  1  say,  Nemo  p^- 
testy  sine  hibore^  ad  doctrinani  accedere.  Here 
the  two  nouns,  tabore  and  doctmiam,  answer  to 
each  other.  But  if  I  say  Nemo  potest ^  sine  laboris 
assiduitate  ad  doctrinam  accedere ^  the  tw  o  members 
will  be  unequal ;  and  therefore  I  would  add,  ne- 
mo potest,  sine  laboris  assiduitate,  ad  doctrincB 
suavitatem  accedere.  Here  is  a  complete  harmo- 
ny of  numbers. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  What  Caius  studied  to  do  through  love,  that  Titius  tried 
to  prevent  through  hatred,  (Render  the  first  member  unequal 
by  the  addition  of  another  word ;  induced  by  his  love,  for  in- 
stance, and  you  will  see  the  necessity  of  having  also  a  partici- 
ple to  answer  it  in  the  last  member,  and  to  say,  Titius  impelled 
by  his  hatred,) 

2.  For  who  will  grant  you  that  mankind,  dispersed  at  first 
in  the  uoods  and  mountains,  sheltered  themselves  within  the 
walls  of  towns,  more  by  the  advice  of  the  prudent,  than  the 
oratory  of  the  eloquent? — Here  the  opposition  will  be,  in  the 
members  of  the  sentence,  between  the  advice  of  the  prudentf 
and  the  oratory  of  the  eloquent,  which  answer  to  each  other. 
But  make  it  each  a  member  of  three  words,  instead  of  two, 
and  you  must  add  a  participle  to  each,  applicable  to  the  idea 
of  each  member,  and  to  agree  with  mankind. 

3.  For  this,  my  lords,  is  not  a  w  ritten  but  an  innate  law — 
we  have  not  been  taught  it  by  the  learned,  we  have  not  re- 
ceived it  from  our  ancestors,  we  have  not  taken  it  from  books ; 
but  it  is  derived  from,  it  is  forced  upon  us  by  nature,  and  stam- 
ped in  indelible  characters  upon  our  very  frame.  It  was  not 
conveyed  to  us  by  instruction,  but  wrought  into  our  constitu- 
tion; it  is  the  dictate,  not  of  education,  but  instinct,  that  if  our 
lives  should  be  at  anytime  in  danger  from  concealed  or  more  open 
assaults  of  robbers  or  private  enemies,  every  honourable  meth- 
od should  be  taken  for  our  security.  Here  the  opposition  will 
be  seen  to  be  equally  supported  between  written  and  innate ; 
and  the  three  next  members  will  be  equally  answered  by  the 
three  that  relate  to  nature  :  and  the  same  opposition  in  the  three 
diflereut  members  continued  to  the  end. 


220 

4.  It  certainly  was  tlie  custom  o(  the  Pythagoreans,  botli 
when  they  awoke,  to  rouse  their  minds  by  the  sound  of  the 
lyre,  that  they  might  be  more  ready  to  act :  and  when  they 
composed  themselves  to  rest,  to  lull  their  minds  by  tlie  same 
sound,  that  they  might  hush  such  perturbed  ideas  as  might  har- 
rass  them. 

5.  Bui  in  Herodotus,  as  in  my  opinion,  every  thing  flows 
smoothly,  so  the  dialect  itself  has  such  a  sweetness,  that  it 
seems  even  to  possess  concealed  numbers. 


In  short,  where  a  division  or  an  expression  in 
English  is  shorter  than  the  other,  the  harmony, 
as  has  been  said  above,  may  be  effected  by  varia- 
tion, or  copiousness,  by  adding  a  word,  as  a  noun 
or  a  verb,  or  by  a  phrase  instead  of  a  word  ;  As 
for.  What  your  crueky  has  done,  I  will  not  do. 
Here  the  disproportion  is  very  discernible,  but  it 
may  be  rendered,  my  humanity  will  not  do.  The 
observance  of  this  is  not  strictly  necessary  in  tii- 
fling  and  common  subjects,  as  epistles,  but  in 
graver  subjects,  which  command  more  attention, 
as  in  orations,  &c.  it  is  very  requisite. 

More  examples  might  be  produced  to  illustrate 
this  subject ;  but  these  will  suffice.  These  rules 
I  have  given,  not  to  be  followed  too  servilely  by 
the  scholar,  for  that  could  not  fail  to  render  his 
style  forced  and  full  of  affectation ;  but  merely 
to  show  the  ease,  with  which  he  might,  with  a 
little  care  and  study,  acquire  this  harmony.  I 
shall  only  add,  that  it  should  not  appear  to  bc^ 
sought  and  studied,  but  to  flow  spontaneously, 
from  the  structure  of  the  periods,  and  from  the 
sentences  themselves,  if  we  thoroughly  undei 
stuud  them,  and  feel  their  force. 


221 

CPAPTER  VII. 

r  PKRSPICUITY  AND  THE  STRUCTURT:  OFTHEMKS. 


Nobis  prima  sit  virtus  perspicuitas,  propria  verba,  rectus  ordo, 
non  in  longum  dilata  conclusio,  nihil  neque  desit,  neque  su- 
perfluat.  Ita  sermo  et  doctis  probabilis,  et  planus  imperi- 
tis  erit.     Haec  est  eloquendi  observatio. — Quint. 

vcuiNTiLiAN  has  here  comprised,  in  very  few 
words,  the  most  essential  requisites  of  perspicuity. 
Nothing  renders  the  style  more  perspicuous  than 
the  selection  of  pertinent  and  appropriate  words : 
and  though  we  have  already  taken  notice  of 
this,  yet  it  will  not  be  unnecessary  in  this  part  to 
repeat  that  not  only  must  our  ideas  be  clearly 
arranged,  but  the  words  must  correspond  with 
the  greatest  propriety  to  each  idea. 

When  the  scholar  is  able  to  determine  the  true 
Latinity  of  words,  a  selection  of  which,  a  dili- 
gent reading  of  the  authors  of  the  Augustan  age 
will  greatly  facilitate  ;  (and  it  must  not  be  for- 
gotten, that  all  English  idioms,  foreign  express- 
ions, grecisms,  words  of  doubtful  authority,  and 
ambiguous  meaning,  are  to  be  carefully  avoid- 
ed) his  first  care  will  be  to  attend  to  the  ct^njunc- 
tion  and  suitableness  of  each  ;  that  the  verb  for 
instance  be  appropriate  and  answerable  to  the 
substantive  :  thus,  a  tvaywas  taken  aivayfrom  me, 
or  given  me.  We  should  not  say,  vice  mi  hi  sunt  erep- 
tce^  but  occlusce^  obseptce  :  nor  datce,  but pattfaQ- 

20 


222 

/«,  apertcB^  ^-c.  We  cannot  say,  accipere  gradum 
honoris,  but  ad  honoris  gradiun  ascendere  or  per- 
venire.  We  should  not  say,  naufragium  pad,  but 
tacere ;  nor  damnum  pati^  hutfacere,  accipere ;  not 
pcenas  accipere^  but  dare,  lucre,  persolvere. 

Thus  also  many  Roman  phrases,  though  deriv- 
ed from  their  own  customs,  must  be  preserved  ; 
as  we  say,  dictatorem  dicere,  because  the  Consul 
alone  created  him  ;  we  say  legem  f err e,  because 
it  was  caiTied  to  the  people  for  their  approba- 
tion, and  then  legem  jubere  or  sciscere,  because 
the  people  alone  had  the  power  to  order  it  to  be 
ratified. 

In  the  use  of  adverbs  also,  care  must  be  taken 
that  they  be  suitable  to  the  verbs,  to  which  they 
are  joined  :  as  we  should  say  enixt  rogare,  not 
ohnixe ;  facile pati,  not  libenter,  for  no  one  receiA  es 
pleasure  in  suffering.  The  same  rule  may  be 
applied  to  substantives  and  adjectives.  Acljec- 
tives  must,  in  their  meaning,  strictly  correspond 
to  the  idea  conveyed  by  the  substantive  :  w  e 
hould  not  say  sapiens  consilium,  but  honum  or 
jidtle,  for  wisdom  belongs  strictly  to  men  and 
not  to  the  counsel;  and,  accurately  speaking, 
we  should  not  say  prudens  consilium,  but  pru- 
dentis  viri  consilium;  nor  can  we  s^ay  bona  ant 
mala  conscientia ;  it  is  only  what  we  are  con- 
-.  lous  of,  that  can  be  good  or  bad ;  therefore  we 
ou^ht  to  say  conscientia  rccte  vel  malt  actonwi. 
Speaking  of  the  stature  of  a  man,  we  should  not 
say  magnus  vir,  but  procerus  ;  for  magnus  refers 
to  his  virtues  or  actions.  And  with  a  little  con- 
sideration also,  it  will  be  easy  to  discover  the 


238 

mie  force  and  meaning  of  a  word,  whether  it  is 
taken  in  a  metaphorical  or  literal  sense  :  as  finis 
used  for  consilium ;  we  should  not  say  bo7ius, 
egregiiiSj  but  we  may  say  certus^felix ;  we  should 
not  say  materna  lingua^  but  vemacula. 

Such  and  so  many  adjectives  must  also  be 
joined  to  the  substantives,  as  will  tend  to  define 
their  proper  attributes  and  qualities,  and  thus  il- 
lustrate the  whole  subject.  Speaking  of  benefits, 
we  shall  find  that  number  and  greatness,  being 
the  attributes  of  benefits,  we  may  say,  mnlta  et 
magna  benejicia ;  as,  we  ought  to  love  God, 
not  on  account  of  his  benefits  merely,  but  on  ac- 
count of  his  many  and  great  benefits  :  and  here, 
if  we  wished  to  join  some  adjectives  to  GW,  we 
should  find  that  the  attributes  of  God,  more 
particularly  applicable  to  the  idea  of  this  sen- 
tence, are  his  liberality  and  his  mercy  ;  there- 
fore we  may  say,  Deiim  liberaUssimum  ct  benig- 
nissimum. 

Or,  instead  of  an  adjective,  if  we  wish  to  de- 
fine more  clearly  any  one  substantive,  and  to 
give  greater  elegance  and  perspicuity  to  the  sub- 
ject, another  substantive,  denoting  the  quality, 
the  property,  or  the  cause  of  the  former,  is  oft- 
en added,  and  then  the  first  substantive,  or  pro- 
noun /7/e,  ^'C.  is  put  in  the  genitive.  Thus,  Cic- 
ero desiring  the  historian  Lucceius  to  celebrate 
his  actions  in  his  writings,  tells  him  that  he  wishes 
to  enjoy  the  benefit  of  his  testimony^  benevolence 
and  genius,  But  because  the  testimony  of  Luc- 
ceius will  have  great  weight  among  his  readers, 
he  says^  auctoriiate  testimonii :  the  testimony  of 


2U 

the  historian  will  be  a  certain  proof  of  his  be- 
jQevoIence,  he  says,  mdicio  benevolentite  :  and  be- 
cause the  genius  of  an  eminent  and  elegant  wri- 
ter conveys  great  pleasure  and  satisfaction  to 
the  reader,  he  says,  suavitate  tngenii. 

As  :  Though  1  had  always  wished  most  ard- 
ently to  see  your  writings,  yet  they  gi-eatly  ex- 
ceeded my  fondest  expectations ;  and  I  was  so 
charmed  and  enraptured  with  them,  that  I 
quickly  formed  a  wish  to  have  the  memorial  of 
my  actions  engraved  on  such  lasting  monuments. 
Nor  were  my  views  carried  merely  to  the  hope 
of  living  for  ever  in  the  annals  of  posterity,  but 
also  to  the  desire  of  having  the  full  enjoyment, 
during  my  own  life,  of  your  testimony^  your  be- 
nevolence and  your  genius. 

The  army  being  drawn  up,  rather  according 
to  the  j)lace^  the  decHvity  of  the  hill,  and  accord- 
ing to  the  time,  than  agreeable  to  order  and  the 
rules  of  w  ar,  the  legions  were  forced  to  engage 
separately,  some  in  one  place,  some  in  another 
— (Here,  nature  of  the  place,  and  necessity  of  the 
time,  may  be  supplied.) 


The  peculiar  beauty  of  Terence  is  elegance 
vnd  perspicuity.  In  the  following  passage,  for 
instance,  Simo  will  be  found  to  deliver  himsell 
in  simple  and  appropriate  language.  It  is  et 
doctis  prohabilis,  et  planus  imperttis. 

Si  sensero  hodie  quicquam  in  his  te  nuptiis 

Fallacice  conari,  quo  f  ant  minus, 

4ut  velle  in  ed  re  ostendere  quam  sis  callidus  : 


!':::[> 


Verberibus  ctesmuj  ie  inpisirinum^  Davc^  declam 
usque  ad  necem ; 

Ed  lege  atque  omine  ut^  si  te  inde  cxemcrim^ 
ego  pro  te  molam. 

Care  must  also  be  taken,  that  the  order  of  the 
words  be  Just  and  clear,  that  the  members  of  the 
sentence  be  not  too  prolix,  that  they  be  not 
drawn  out  into  superfluous  divisions  and  subdi- 
visions, w^hicli  would  only  render  the  style  ob- 
scure and  confused,  and  might  perhaps  answer 
the  purpose  of  that  master  in  Quintilian,  who 
exhorted  his  scholars  to  study  obscurity,  and 
who  often  used  to  exclaim,  Tanto  melius,  ipse 
91071  intelligo ;  but  would  make  the  style  neither 
intelligible  nor  elegant.  This  Period  of  Pliny, 
on  the  contrary,  shows,  that  by  avoiding  any 
unnecessary  dilatation  of  the  members,  great 
perspicuity  may  be  given  to  the  sentence  : 

Ut  enim  cruduyn  vidnus  medentiwn  mamis  re- 
formidat, 

Deiiide  patitur,  atque  uliru  rci/ui/it  ; 

Sic  rccens  animi  dolor  consolationes  rejint  nr 
refugit, 

Mox  desiderata  et  clementer  admotis  adquicscit. 

As  therefore  what  we  write  or  speak  is  with  a 
V  iew  to  be  understood,  and  to  attract  the  atten- 
tion of  our  readers  or  hearers,  so  perspicuity 
must  be  regarded  as  the  primary  excellence  of 
language.  But  perspicuity  does  not  merely  re- 
late to  words,  but  also  to  arguments,  and  to  a 
nice  and  accurate  arrangement  of  them  ;  in  such 
a  manner  that  the  sense  may  be  perceived  at 
once,  and  that  nothing  be  left  to  conjecture  ;  an 

20* 


226 

error  which  young  beginners  usually  comniii. 
who  studying  either  too  much  copiousness  or  an 
affectation  of  stvle,  are  liable  to  fall  into  obscuri- 
ty :  as  they  are  apt  to  think  beauty  and  difiuit} 
of  style  consist  hi  the  selection  of  fine  words 
and  expressions,  which  are  seldom  used.  But 
dignity  itself,  as  we  have  already  seen,  dej>ends 
not  so  much  on  the  w^ords  as  on  the  idea  ;  as, 
what  words  can  be  more  familiar  and  simple, 
and  at  the  same  time  moi'e  sublime  and  digni- 
fied than  these :  God  said^  let  there  be  lights  and 
there  was  light. 

In  naming  the  princijial  sources  of  perspicui- 
ty, we  may  mention  causes,  or  argiuncnts,  ex- 
•imples,  testimonies  and  comparisons;  and  as  a 
Theme,  which  is  given  and  intended  as  a  mod- 
el or  specimen  not  merely  of  perspicuity  and  el- 
egant style,  but  of  close  and  accurate  reasoning 
is  generally  distributed  into  these  several  parts  o; 
divisions,  it  may  not  be  improper  to  lay  down 
a  few  rules,  which  may  render  its  composition 
more  easy  to  the  scholar :  and  indeed  it  must 
have  often  been  observed  that  boys  may  ha\  ( 
accjuired  a  great  readiness  in  writing  good  Lai 
in,  and  may  possess  a  kind  of  mechanical  facili- 
ty in  versification,  who  will  at  the  same  time 
entertain  an  almost  invincible  dread  of  Themes, 
and  who  v\  ill  not  be  abh*  to  venture  alone  on 
this  unpleasant  task  without  the  constant  aid 
;ind  particidar  direction  of  the  teacher. 

It  would  seem  almost  unnecessary  to  observr 
that  when  the  ThcNis,  or  suJiJect,  is  given,  the 
sr]»(»lnr  mu^t  not  <^it  down  an<!  commit  to  pnnei* 


227 

the  first  thought  that  arises  in  his  mind.     He 
must  not  begin  to  write  before  he  is  fully  ac- 
quainted with  the  whole  scope,  and  the  differ- 
ent bearings  of  his  subject :  before  he  has  fully 
weighed,    maturely   considered,    and   carefully, 
compared  with  each  other,  the  arguments  u])on 
wiiich  the  truth  of  his  Thesis  is  to  be  establish- 
ed.    But  above  all,  he  must  attend  to  the  con- 
nexion as  well  of  the  arginnents  as  of  each  par- 
ticular sentence.     Not  only  before  he  sits  down 
to  writing  ought  he  to  consider  this  connexion 
well,  as  far  as  it  regards  the  w^iolc  subject,  but 
also  when  he   has  committed  to  paper  one  or 
two  arguments,  and  adjusted  together  one  part 
of  his  materials,  he  must  read  over  and  examine 
each  sentence,  to  see  whether  the  dependency 
and  relation  of  the  parts  is  regular,  and  proper- 
ly maintained :  and  even  after  the  whole  is  fin- 
ished, it  should  be  well  reconsidered,  since  what 
appeared  suitable  and  apparent  at  first,  may  not 
upon  a  second  review,  appear  equally  so. 


OF  THE  STRUCTURE  OF  THEMES. 

Themes  are  nearly  the  same  as  what  are  call- 
ed Onitiones  Umbraticce^  or  Linh(jLaxa7.Lxov.  Their 
business  is  to  prove  and  to  please.  When  the 
Thesis,  or  subject,  is  given,  the  first  considera- 
tion will  be  to  find  out  from  what  field  of  know  1- 
edgCj  and  from  w^hat  sources,  the  whole  appa- 
ratus of  proofs  and  arguments,  is  to  be  sought. 
Speaking,  for  instance,  of  liberty,  the  Histories 
of  Greece  and  Rome  would  find  an  ample  field 


228 

©f  knowledge,  from  which  araumenls  might  be 
drawn. 

Some  \\  rJters  have  given  its  a  number  of  cir- 
cumstances as  a  kind  of  chie  to  direct  us.  They 
ay,  and  not  inaptly,  that  the  whole  invention 
may  be  derived  from  all,  or  most  of  these  seve- 
ral points  or  circumstances :  fHio  and  What  ? 
Where  ?  By  what  means  and  helps  ?  Why  ? 
How  ?  When  f 

Suppose  the  subject  given  is,  '  Death  ought 
not  to  be  feared  P  It  will  at  first  sight  appear 
that  the  whole  apparatus  of  arguments  is  to  be 
derived  from  the  history  and  exj)erience  of  man- 
kind. The  circumstance,  Who?  and  What? 
will  suggest  the  idea,  that  all  men  are  subject  to 
it :  and  here  the  question  might  be  started, — 
Why  are  all  men  subject  to  it  ?  The  answer  is, 
Oa  account  of  the  structure  of  the  human  body. 
But  in  the  arrangement  of  these  arguments, 
there  should  be  so  intimate  a  connexion  be- 
tween them  and  the  Thesis,  that  the  illustra- 
tion of  each  may  visibly  establish  the  truth  of 
the  subject,  which  is  proved  by  the  conclusion. 
Death  is  not  to  be  feared.  Why  ?  Because  all  men 
are  subject  to  it :  which  is  confirmed  by  two 
reasons,  daily  experience  and  the  structure  ofthr 
body.  Hence  I  conclude,  if  all  men  arc  subject 
toit^  f  ous;ht  not  to  fear  it.  How  does  that  fol- 
low ? — Why  should  a  loise  man  fear  that  ichich 
cannot  be  avoided  ?  Another  and  a  posterior 
cause  may  be  given.  It  is  the  way  to  eternal  hap- 
piness.  Is  this  true  ?  Yes.  The  Scriptures  teach 
it. — Then  1  conclude  if  death  is  the  way  to  eter- 


229 

nal  happiness^  why  should  I  fear  that^  which  leads 
me  to  a  better  place ^  than  that  in  which  I  live  ? 

Thus  in  writing  upon  any  given  subject,  it 
will  be  very  easy  to  carry  in  our  memory  this 
short  clue  of  circumstances,  and  it  will  soon  oc- 
cur to  us,  what  must  answer  to  all  or  any  one 
of  them.  When,  therefore,  the  scholar  has  fur- 
nished himself  with  a  sufficient  apparatus  of  ma- 
terials and  arguments,  the  next  business  will  be 
to  arrange  them  in  their  proper  order,  and  to 
distribute  them  into  distinct  parts  or  divisions. 

The  first  part  of  which  the  Theme  is  com- 
posed, is  the  Proposition,  or  the  Premises,  from 
which  the  subject  sets  out,  in  which  a  general 
view  of  the  question  is  given,  by  amplifying  or 
explaining  it  more  at  large,  or  by  the  assertion 
of  some  other  principle  closely  connected  with, 
or  easily  referable  to  the  main  subject.  The 
next  is  the  Ratio  Probans,  or  what  is  called 
by  some  the  jEtiologia,  in  which  we  prove  the 
truth  of  the  Theme,  by  some  reason  or  argu- 
ment. Thus  the  whole  must  assume  the  form 
of  a  just  and  close  reasoning. 

In  aid  of  this,  will  be  introduced  as  another 
division,  the  Confirmatio,  which  is  generally  a 
common  place  or  moral  thought,  which  de- 
monstrates the  subject,  or  by  inverting  it,,  or 
showing  the  unreasonableness  of  a  conti'ary  o- 
pinion,  tends  more  fully  to  prove  the  ti'uth  of  the 
Thesis.  Suppose  the  Thesis  is,  Horatius  Codes 
is  to  be  praised :  the  Reason  or  Mtiologia^  because 
he  is  a  great  man  ;  the  Common  Place y  or  Con- 
firmation, every  brave  man  is  to  be  praised. 


To  this  must  be  added  illustrations  of  the  sub- 
ject draun  from  Similes,  Comparisons,  Exam- 
ples and  Testimonies.  ^ 

For  instance ;  the  Thesis  or  Proposition  is,  It 
is  for  the  advantage  of  the  Commonwealth  that 
there  be  many  accusers^  provided  they  do  not  ca- 
lumniate. 

The  reason  to  prove  this,  or  jEtiologia,  which 
will  include  a  common  place,  or  confirmation, 
may  be  thus : 

Any  one  may  be  innocent,  and  yet  not  free 
from  suspicion :  and  though  it  be  a  misfortune, 
yet  the  accuser  may  be  forgiven,  because  the 
innocent,  if  accused,  may  be  acquitted,  but  the 
guilty  cannot  be  condemned  without  beins  ac- 
cused. It  is  better  that  the  innocent  should  be 
sometimes  accused,  than  that  the  guiky  should 
not  be  brought  to  judgment. 

This  will  be  illustrated  by  a  Simile  : 

Dogs  are  kept  in  the  capitol,  to  announce  by 
their  barking,  the  approach  of  thieves :  and 
though  they  may  bark  in  the  day-time,  and  at 
the  innocent,  yet  the  error  is  on  the  right  side. 
Thus  it  is  with  pubUe  accusers,  who,  though 
they  may  be  allowed  to  bark  at  innocence  un- 
knowingly, yet  should  cast  all  their  wholesome 
venom  against  the  guilty. 

This  comparison  is  one  of  the  chief  sources  of 
perspicuity,  since  we  can  neither  define  nor 
judge  with  sufficient  accuracy  of  the  magnitude, 
beauty  or  (pialily  of  any  thing,  without  com- 
paring it  with  something  else,  which  is  at  least 
equally  known  and  common*      Thus,  when  I 


2S1 

say,  /  love  you  sincerely^  I  do  not  speak  with  s« 
much  perspicuity,  as  when  I  compare  my  love 
for  you,  with  the  love  of  others,  who  are  noted 
for  it :  as,  /  love  you^  as  a  father  loves  his  children. 

Comparison  may  be  either  longer  and  more 
diffuse  ;  as  when  we  previously  explain  and  con- 
firm, by  illustrative  arguments,  the  object  to 
which  we  compare  any  thing  :  as 

Great  is  the  love  of  parents  to  their  children, 
so  that  nothing  can  equal  it :  there  is  nothing, 
indeed,  which  they  will  refuse  to  their  advantage, 
comforts  and  liappiness  ;  nay,  parents  will  often 
prefer  the  conveniences  of  their  children  to  their 
own.  But,  however  great  and  transcendant  that 
love  may  be,  yet  I  greatly  doubt,  whether  the  ten- 
der affection  I  feel  lor  you  is  at  all  inferior  to  it. 

Or,  Comparison  may  be  shorter ;  as 
1  love  you  as  I  love  my  father. 

Or,  metaphorically  speaking : 

You  are  a  father  to  me, — In  you  I  honor  a 
father. 

A  Simile  should  edso  be  apt  and  appropriate, 
and  should  convey  no  low  and  offensive  ideas  to 
the  mind.  It  would  be  an  uni)leasing  idea  to 
compare  the  instruction  of  a  master,  with  the 
dung  which  softens  and  fertilizes  the  ground, 
though  it  might  be  a  just  comparison. 

But  the  comparison  of  a  greater  with  a  lesser 
object,  is  chielly  to  be  imitated,  as  conducive  to 
perspicuity.  Our  first  business  is  to  show  the 
apparently  superior  greatness  of  the  object,  to 
which  we  compare  any  thing,  and  then  show 
the  real  superiority  of  the  thiiag  itself:  as, 


232 

Learnhio'  is  certainly  glorious  nnd  desirabk% 
as  it  enlightens  the  mind  ;  but  how  much  more 
glorious  is  virtue,  which  ennobles  and  purifies 
the  soul ! 

Was  there  any  one  of  us  so  void  of  taste,  and 
of  so  unfeeling  a  temper,  as  not  to  be  affected 
lately  w  ith  the  death  of  that  excellent  person  ? 
For  though  he  died  in  an  advanced  age,  yet  such 
was  the  excellence  and  inimitable  beauty  of  his 
art,  that  we  thought  him  worthy  of  living  for 
ever.  Was  he  then  so  great  a  favorite  with  ug 
all,  on  account  of  the  graceful  motions  of  his  body  ; 
and  shall  we  be  insensible  to  the  surprising  ener- 
gy of  the  mind,  and  the  sprightly  sallies  of  genius? 

Your  forefathers  often  engaged  in  war,  to  re- 
venge the  insults  offered  to  their  merchants  and 
seamen.  How  then  ought  you  to  be  fired,  when 
you  call  to  mind,  that  in  consequence  of  a  sin- 
gle express,  so  many  thousand  Roman  citizens 
ivere  butchered  in  one  day  ? 

If  many  of  the  greatest  men  have  been  care- 
ful to  leave  their  statues  and  pictures,  these  rep- 
resentations not  of  their  mvnds  but  of  their  bodies, 
ought  not  we  to  be  much  more  desirous  of  leav- 
ing the  portraits  of  our  enterprizes  and  virtues, 
drawn  and  finished  by  the  most  eminent  artists? 


One  thing  may  be  also  compared  with  its  op- 
posite, or  illustrated  by  contrasting  it ;  as  the 
beauty  of  any  virtue  will  appear  the  brii^hter  by 
being  conti'asted  with  the  defonnliy  of  the  op- 
posite vice ;  as, 

Nothing  is  more  base  or  unworthy  of  a  man 


than  avarice ;  but  let  us  consider  liberality^  and 
see  how  noble  it  is,  and  how  much  it  is  the 
mark  of  a  generous  disposition. 

Cicero  thus  compares  his  own  study  of  the 
sciences  with  the  pursuit  of  other  men  after 
pleasures : 

Who  then  can  censure  me,  or  injustice  be  an- 
gry with  me,  if  these  hours,  which  others  em- 
ploy in  business,  in  pleasures,  in  celebrating  pub- 
lic solemnities,  in  refreshing  the  body,  and  un- 
bending the  mind  ;  if  the  time,  which  is  spent 
by  some  in  midnight  banqueting,  in  diversions, 
and  in  gaming,  1  employ  in  reviewing  these 
studies  ? 

To  this  inust  be  added  Examples :  by  w  hich 
we  bring  instances  from  history  to  corroborate 
the  truth  of  the  Thesis, 

Examples  so  far,  have  greater  authority  than 
arguments,  that  they  remove  every  doubt  of  the 
possibihty  or  feasibility  of  any  thing,  convince 
us  that  what  has  been  done  by  others  may  be 
achieved  by  ourselves,  and  place  the  truth  of 
whatever  is  to  be  proved  immediately  before 
our  eyes.  An  example  must,  in  every  feature 
and  pai'ticular,  be  suited  to  the  subject  of  which 
we  treat.  Thus  if  we  speak  of  the  contempt  of 
death,  we  may  introduce  Socrates,  who  did  re- 
ally contemn  death,  and  not  Cicero,  who,  though 
he  had  beautifully  discoursed  upon  it,  yet  trem- 
bled at  its  approach.  If  we'  speak  of  the  con- 
tempt of  riches,  we  should  instance  the  same 
Socrates,  or  Fabricius,  or  Curius,  who  despised 
riches  when  they  were  within  thek  reach,  and 

21 


234 

Hot  those,  who  behig  poor,  pretend  to  despise 
what  they  cannot  obtain,  nor  the  rich,  whose 
contempt  of  what  they  enjoy,  must  be  very  sus- 
picions. In  our  praise  of  any  virtue,  we  must 
not  adduce  a  man  who,  though  possessed  of 
that  virtue,  is  disgraced  by  some  notorious  infa- 
my ;  lest,  by  that  means,  the  autliority  of  the  ex- 
ample should  be  weakened.  In  praising  valor, 
the  pahn  should  not  be  given  to  Catiline.  Ex- 
amples should  also  be  true,  and  not  fictitious  ; 
because  the  ignorant  alone  can  be  deceived  by 
fables.  They  may  also  be  illustrated  by  some 
argument,  to  show  the  motive  and  design  with 
which  the  action  was  done.  As  in  adducing  So- 
crates, to  exemplify  a  contempt  of  riches,  va- 
rious causes  may  be  added,  to  corroborate  the 
Thesis  itself;  as,  He  knew  that  true  riches  con- 
sisted  ill  wisdom  and  virtue,  not  in  thinp^s  exter- 
nal and  perishable.  Or,  He  had  learned  that  ev- 
ery man  who  can  be  satisfied  is  siifficiently  rich. 

Cicero,  speaking  of  the  happy  union  of  learn- 
ing with  an  excellent  and  virtuous  disposition, 
thus  introduces  his  examples. 

"  Such  was  that  divine  man,  Africanus,  whom 
our  fathers  saw ;  such  were  C.  Laelius,  and  L. 
Furius,  persons  of  the  greatest  tem|)erance  and 
moderation  ;  such  was  ohl  Cato,  amanof^roat 
bravery,  and,  for  the  times,  of  great  learning, 
who  surely  would  never  have  applied  to  the 
study  of  literature,  had  they  thought  it  of  no 
service  towards  the  acquisition  and  improve- 
ment of  virtue." 

And  again,  Cicero  having  laid  it  down  as  it 


2:33 


were  a  Thesis,  that  learning  and  studies^  must  be 
admired  even  by  those  that  do  not  possess  them, 
says, 

"Though  we  ourselves  were  incapable  of 
them,  and  had  no  relish  for  their  charms,  still 
we  should  admire  them,  when  we  see  them  in 
others." 

And  then  he  thus  illustrates  the  subject  by 
this  example,  in  which,  celebrating  the  powers 
of  an  inferior  art,  he  takes  occasion  from  thence 
to  bestow  the  more  merited  praise  upon  the  su- 
perior excellence  of  learning. 

"  Was  there  any  of  us  so  void  of  taste,  and 
of  so  unfeeUng  a  temper,  as  not  to  be  affected 
lately  with  the  death  of  Roscius  ?  For  though 
he  died  in  an  advanced  age,  yet  such  was  the 
excellence  and  inimitable  beauty  of  his  art,  that 
we  thought  him  worthy  of  living  for  ever.  Was 
he  then  so  great  a  favorite  with  us  all  on  ac- 
count of  the  graceful  motions  of  his  body,  and 
shall  we  be  insensible  to  the  surprising  energy 
of  the  mind,  and  the  sprightly  sallies  of  genius? 

It  will  also  be  necessary  to  introduce  Quota- 
tions into  the  Theme,  which  will  serve  to 
strengthen  what  we  say  by  the  opinion  and  Tes- 
timony of  poets,  or  other  good  authors.  These 
may  be  either  formally  introduced,  by  mention- 
ing the  name  of  the  author,  and  showing  the 
propriety  of  the  application  ;  as  Cicero  often  in- 
serts whole  verses  from  Ennius,  by  way  of  testi- 
mony ;  as  where  he  says,  that  ignorant  and  fool- 
ish old  men  often  lay  their  own  faults  and  infif- 


loi) 


mitics  lo  the  charge  of  old  aj2;e,  he  then  rcasows 
upon  the  contrary  practice  of  Ennius,  in  these 
words  : 

Quod  non  faciebat  u\  cujus  modb  meniwnem 
fecty  Ennius, 

Si  cut  fort  is  equus,  spatio  qui  scept  supremo 

Vicit  Olympia,  nunc  scnio  confectii^  quiescit. 

Equifortis  et  victoris  senectuti  comparat  sucun^ 
^c. 

Or,  quotations  may  be  assimilated  in  a  famil- 
iar manner  to  the  subject,  and  incorporated  into 
it ;  as  in  this  passage  of  Seneca  : 

Jnfrigora  septenirionemque  vergentibus  imman- 
sueta  ingenia  sunt,  lit  aitpoeta, 
suoque  simiUima  ccelo. 

Or,  sometimes  quotations  are  introduced  by 
authors,  in  different  words  from  the  original,  and 
clothed  as  it  were  in  a  new  dress  ;  as  where  Ci- 
cero has  expressed  these  words  of  Euripides : 
To  &  j^/:pa$  a^dog  aisL 
Boipvrepov  Autvac,  cxoniTji^nf 
'ETtt  xfxirl  xstrat, 
in  his  own  language,  and  as  a  part  of  his  own 
argument : 

Senectus  plerisque  senibus  tarn  odiosa  est,  ut 
onus  se  jEtnd  gravius  dicant  sustincre. 

What  has  been  said  concerning  Quotations  or 
Testimonies,  may  also  be  applied  to  Similes  and 
Examples,  which  it  is  by  no  means  necessary 
always  to  introduce  distinctly  and  in  separate 
heads,  but  that  they  may  be  inserted  into  the 
very  body  of  the  arjiument,  so  that  when  mate- 
rials crowd  upon  the  mind,  tlic  ardor  of  the  wri- 


257 

tcr  i.^  not  supposed  to  allow  him  to  do  more  than 
merely  to  advert  to  them  in  a  short  and  curso- 
ry manner. 

The  Conclusion,  where  it  is  regularly  in- 
troduced, and  where  the  sense  of  it  is  not  ex- 
pressed in  the  body  of  the  Theme,  is  a  short  re- 
capitulation, tending  to  prove  the  truth  of  the 
Thesis,  and  including  some  pertinent  observa- 
tion upon  the  subject. 


Though  some  of  the  following  specimens  are 
taken  from  Cicero's  Orations,  and  other  Latin 
writers,  and  are  chiefly  applicable  to  longer  dis- 
sertations, yet  they  will  easily  admit  of  being 
formed  and  adapted  to  the  use  of  Themes,  and 
may  with  great  propriety  be  received  as  elegant 
models  for  introducing  testimonies,  examples, 
quotations,  &c. 

FORMS   OF  CONFIRMATION. 

Quam  ego  rem  argumentis,  non  multis  sed 
probis  validisque,  sum  probaturus. 

Verbis  tam  discrtis,  rationibus  tam  claris  con- 
firmata,  ut  non  atramento,  sed  solis  radio  exa- 
rata  videantur. 

Liceat  autem  hoc  propositum,  vcluti  arcem 
munitissimam  fortissimis  instruere  propugnato- 
vibus. 

Quinetiam  res  ista  voce  naturae  promulgata, 
jure  gentium  sancitur,  usu  deniquc  et  consuetu- 
dine  firmatur. 

Hie  mihi  liceat  in  aciem  et  justum  praelium 
cducere  validissimarum  rationum  hastatos,  re- 
21  ^ 


238 

luni  certissiniarum  principes,  locupletibsimaj  fi- 
dei  Triarios. 

FORMS  OF   CITING    EXAMPLES. 

Plurima  sunt  ct  obvia  exempla. 

Excmpla  si  qua^rantur  illustriuiii  virorum. 

Excmplorum  |)leiii  libri,  plenae  mejiiorhe. 

Exemplorum  nullum  illustrius,  quam  ilkul 
Thalctis. 

Inter  multa  pra^clara  facinora  alia,  nihil  clar- 
ius  quam  quod  .... 

Atque  ne  ha^c  obscura  ct  nuda  vidcantur  sine 
cxenij)lorum  appositionc,  videte  quaeso  .... 

Quam  quidem  rem  probe  intellexisse,  ct  recta 
reputasse  via  mihi  videntur,  qui  .... 

Pristinam  vcritatis  facicm  historia  prisca  rote- 
git  :  hue  provoco. 

Non  referam  tibi  Socratem,  Chrysippum,  &:c. 
et  ceteros,  magnos  quidem  viros  .... 

Nonne  profecto  hoc  illustravit  ille  omnium 
prince ps  .... 

Pythagoras  mihi  primus  e  memoria  in  linguam 
venit,  Italia*  splendor  clarissimus. 

Prodeat  Pericles  ille,  cujus  fulo;ura,  tonitrua, 
fulmina  in  concione  visa  ct  audita  metuerunt 
Athenrn. 

Quod  ad  mores  indolemque,  quid  justius  ? 
Quid  sanctius,  in  omni  antiquitate  ?  Virtus  ipsa 
domicilium  I^acedrrmone  habuit;  ct  consensu 
quodam  in  laudts  masculi  populi  conspirasse 
scriptores  fere  omncs  videntur. 

FORMS    OP    CrriNQ    TESTIMONIES. 

Haec  ita  clara,  ita  cxplorata  simt,  ut  frustili 
quis  testium  nubcm  in  (idem  vocaverit. 


230 

Cujus  verba  in  praesidium  advoco. 
Testis  niearum  senteiitiariim  .... 

Ad  vetercs  provoco,  ct  antiquitutis  magnum 
illud,  et  venerabilc  tribunal. 

Nee  disscntiunt  a  me  prudentes  .... 
Quod  poeta  his  versibus  depinxit. 

Aureum,  facetum,  et  verum  Bionis  illud  .... 

Dignissima  est  aureis  inscribi  literis,  menti 
commendanda  pcnitiis,  et  saepe  memoria  re- 
tractanda  ilia  M.  C.  sententia. 

Ad  rem  ct  apposite  Tullius. 

Nee  vates  ille  vanus  qui  cecinit. 

Praiclara  ilia  vox,  et  praeclaro  viro  dignissima, 

Non  injuria  exclamat  ille  .... 

Judicio  meo  suffragatur  philosophus;  hujusrci 
locupletissimus  testis  est  .... 

Atqui  huic  opinioni  adstipulatur  Seneca. 

Non  temere  igitur  dictum,  si  Hcsiodo  credimus. 

Qiiare  bene  sciteque  praecijiit,  canit  .... 

Herodotus,  lac  musarum. 

Thuycydides,  oculus  verecundiae. 

Honicrus,  pcctarum  antiquissinms :  Phoebus 
ille  Poctarum.  "Aptorog  xat  Oscoraro;  tqv  Ttoiyi- 
tLjv. 

Virgilius,  Latinus  Homerus,  Mantuanus  ille 
vates,  Poetarura  princeps  .... 

Cicero:  longe  omnium  qui  scripserunt,  aut 
locuti  sunt,  copia  dicendi  et  gravitate  princeps. — 
Disertissimus  omnium  Romuli  nepotum-.Flos  il- 
libatus  populi,  suadaeque  medulla.  Quasi  Deus 
Oratoi  um  :  noraudg  ;^pt>aoto  l:eovrog. 

Demosthenes:  frequens  et  magnus  auditor 
Platoni'^. 


84# 

Qui  unus  inter  omnes  emicuit  omni  dicendi 
generc. 

Horatjus:  Niimerosus  ille  Horatius:  Latirm:5 
Pindarus,  Lyricorum  priuceps,  Venusinus  illo 
vates  : 

Romanse  fidicen  lyrae. 

FORMS   OF  CONCLUDING. 

Sed  et  uiide  orsa  est,  in  eodem  terminetiir 
oratio  mea. 

Jam  vero,  ne  in  vestram  luimanitatem  injuri- 
osa  longitudine  peccet  oratio  mea  .... 

Non  est  autem  cur  pergam :  orationis  igitur 
vela  contraho  .... 

De  qua  re  non  plura  dicam,  ne  vestrae  benig- 
nitatis  aures,  diutiiis  obtundam  ingratus. 

Scd  ut  aliquando  extrcmum  habeat  oratio  mea, 
finem  jam  faciam. 

Rcliqua  quae,  &c.  si  persequerer,  non  deesset 
oratio,  decssent  latera,  quibus  exclamarem,  &c. 

Habetis  sermonem  bene  longum  hominis  uti« 
nam  non  impudeutis,  illud  quidem  corte,  non 
nimls  verecundi,  qui  qnu^om.  (]c  kr,  tnm  nuilto 
dixerim. 


SPECIMEN  OF  A  LATIN  THEME. 


Ad  pccnitcndum  properat  cito  quijudicat, — Syr. 

Prop.  Bene  cautus  reruinjudex  tempus  et  clil- 
igentiam  ad  cas  prius  trutinandas  adhibebit. 
quam  quicquam  pro  certo  statuat. 

Rat.  Adeo  enim  densa  crroris  nebula  mortales 
visas  obducta  hebetat,  ut  res  ssepcnumero  iion 
e^e  videantur,  quee  sunt. 

Conf.  Quid  autem  obscurius,  quid  magis  igno- 
tum,  quam  verum  est  ?  Finxerunt  veteres  in 
imo  puteo  demersam  latere  veritatem ;  hoc 
scilicet  comniento  intellectum  voluerunt,  earn 
non  nisi  longa  argumentorum  serie  hauriri, 
inque  lucem  proferri  posse.  Quare  vitanda 
est  festinatio,  quae  turn  omnibus  in  rebus,  turn 
maxime  in  vero  indagando  nocet. 

Simi.  Facilis  currentibus  lapsus ;  per  obscura 
et  ignota  eunti,  timide,  caute  et  pedetentim 
progrediendum  est. 

Argiim.  Tempus  rerum  abdita  promens  in  aper- 
tum,  temerc  raptimque  judicata  reprehendit, 
arguit,  corrigit :  dumque  eunt  dies,  aliam  men- 
tern,  aliud  judicium  firmioribus  fultum  argu- 
mentis  secum  adferunt.  Qui  fit  tandem,  ut 
priora  ilia  eversa  ruerint,  nisi  quod  non  satis 
altejacto  fimdamento  nitebanturp 


242 

Test     '*  Da  spatium  tenuemquc  moram  ;  mala 
cuncta  ministrat 

Impetus." 
Exam.     Qiiis  enim  riescit  cunctando  rem  olini 

Romanam,  duce  Fabio,  restitutam  fuisse  ? 
Cone,     Ut  igitur  quisque  ad  sentcntiam  de  rebus 

minus  pertpectis  fcrendam  maxime  festinat ; 

ita  maxime  verendum  est,  ne  judicem  temcra- 

rium  latae  poeniteat 


These  are  the  several  parts  into  which  a  Theme 
is  usually  divided ;  but  it  must  be  observed  that 
it  is  not  necessary  to  adhere  too  rigidly  to  them. 
For  though  this  method  tends  to  give  a  precision 
of  thinking  to  the  scholar,  yet  it  is  not  meant  lo 
preclude  some  partial  deviation  from  this  sys- 
tem ;  in  such  a  manner,  however,  that  he  may 
not  be  allowed  to  wander  from  the,  subject,  but 
that  in  proving  and  illustrating  his  Thesis,  he 
may  sometimes  follow  that  arrangement  which 
will  best  suit  his  fancy  or  his  capacity.  In  the 
following  specimen,  for  instance,  it  will  be  seen 
that  Examples  form  the  most  prominent  features 
of  the  Theme,  and  that  the  proofs  and  illustra- 
tions are  chiefly  derived  from  thcni. 


24^3 


Integer  vitce,  scelerlsquc  purus, 
No7i  eget  Mauri  jaciilis. — Hor. 

QuuM  a  Philosopho  quodam  quaererctur,  u- 
trr:m  ad  rempublicam  tutandam,  plus  adjumenti 
afJ'erret  justilia,  an  arma;  si,  inquit,  ex  justitiae 
prccceptis  viveretur,  nullum  armis  opus  foret. 
Praeclarum  sane  responsum  !  E  scelcre  enini  et 
injuria  bella  solent  prolicisci.  Quae  autem  bella 
integi'o  vitae  scelerisque  puro  sunt  gerenda? 
Quae  pugna  committenda  ?  Qui  enses  acuendi  ? 
llii  cum  onmibus  pax  intercedit.  Summae  enim 
esset  perversitatis  et  malitiae  innocuo  nocere. 

iEneae,  Troja  capta,  victores  Danai  peperce- 
runt,  quod  pads,  Helenaeque  reddendae  auctor 
fuerat :  ei  igitur  Patrem  et  Penates  per  medios 
hostes,  per  caedes,  et  incendia  portanti,  tutum 
fuit  iter.  Usque  adeo  pietas  vel  inter  hostes 
tuta  et  honorata  est. 

Quis  nescit  Numam  ilium  pium  et  tranquillum 
legem  ?  Hoc  regnante,  ne  unum  quidem  diem 
Templum  Jani  apertum  est;  sed  quadraginta 
annos  clausum  stetit,  dum  pax  florebat  undique 
perpelua,  Justitia  et  lenitas  sui  Regis  non  Ro- 
nianam  gentem  solum  cultam  et  mansuetam 
reddidit ;  sed  etiam  ad  proximas  civitates,  ab 
ejus  exemplo,  ut  a  sacro  quodam  fonte,  amor 
yirtutis  et  justitiae  fluxit.  Neque  odio,  neque 
invidioe  erat  obnoxius ;  regni  affectatio  neque 
privatas  neque  publicas  in  regnum  insidias  struxit. 
Sive  Deorum  metus,  qui  plerumque  pios  tuentur, 
sive  illius  virtu tis  reverentia  de  improbis  homi- 
num  cordibus  tiiumphurit ;  certum  est,  vel  hy- 


246 

To  free  any  one  from  dangers,  to  avert  them  :  deprecari 

alicujus  perirula, 

p.  22.  To  be  cast  in  a  suit :  causd  cadere. 

p.  25.  Presence  of  mind  :  prcesentis  animi  consilium, 

p.  26.  To  entertain  too  sanguine  a  hopie  of  success  :  spcm 

fenierariam  habere. 

To  abdicate  the  sovereign  power  or  magistracy  :  imperium 

deponere  ;  se  magistratu  abdicare, 

p.  30.  The  thing  in  question  :  de  quo  agitur. 
To  serve  for  the  twentieth  time :  vicesima  stipcndin  mcrcri. 
To  whose  decision  they  appealed  :  quern  judiccm  fcccrint. 
To  assert  one's  right  to  a  territory  :  agrum  vindicare. 
He  rested  the  point  of  controversy  :  controversiatn  refcrebat, 
p.  31.  To  make  a  toil  of  pleasure:  amara  jucundis  inter- 

juiseere, 

p.  32.  When  there  is  such  a  noise  :  vhi  tot  obstrepunt  gra- 

cult, 

p.  S3.  It  became  the  first  object  of  my  wishes  to  acquire 

your  love ;  nihil  optative  f^^H^  quam  ut  abs  te  amnrer, 
p.  34.  To  assault  by  covert  ways :  cunicuUs  oppugnare, 
p.  35.  From  motives  of  state  policy  :  reiptibUcxe  vausii. 
No  one  invested  with  supreme  power  and  authority :  nemo 
urn  viribus  plurimnm  posset. 
To  condescend  to  listen  to  justice,  wiiiiout  a  violent  effort 

on  one's  part :  ad  jus  sine  vi  descendere. 

p.  36,  Which  must  from  their  antiquity  have  obtained  the 

force  of  nature  :  qucejam  naturw  vim  obtineret  per  vetustatcm. 
lie  had  erected  monuments  to  his  fame :  monumenta  ^ibi 

extruxerat,    . 

p.  38.  Toils  and  intrigues  of  ambition  :  ambitionis  labor. 
Having  contracted  a   lameness   from   a   wound :  gravi- 

Icr  rhiiiflirnnti  ex  vulnere, 

y.  .;  '.  To  bind  any  one  by  the  strongest  ties   of  ^^atitude  : 

1  ruf/ysi/num  aliciii  facer e, 

p.  4J.  1  am  bound  to  him  by  the  strongest  obligalioiis  :  hie 

de  me  optima  meritus  est. 

He  obtained  the  first  celebrity  and  pre-eminence  in  the  fo- 

1  am  :  clarus  in  tog/i,  et  princepa. 

To  have  influence  with  any  one :  apiid  aliqvrm  valere, 
p.  42.  To  pay  attention  to  a  thing :  in  aliqxiid  incumbere^ 

pel  alicui  rei. 


1'47 

Entitled  to  the  hiijhest  commendation  :  suiinnd  hiude  flignus. 

p.  44.  I  received  inrormation  of:  rciiuntiatum  est  mihi  de. 

Not  in  endeavouring  to  blot  out  the  memory  of  the  ancient 
quarrel,  but  in  concerting  measures  to  renew  the  war  :  71011  ad 
oblivionem  vrteris  belli,  sed  ad  comparationem  novi, 

p.  45.  Not  unaccompanied  with  :  plenam. 

When  no  longer  attended  with  danger  :  secura. 

To  be  struck  dumb  with  astonishment :  obstupescere. 

p.  48.  To  inform  any  one  of  what  has  been  done  :  acta  edo- 
cere. 

p.  50.  With  some  degree  of  accuracy  :  acpiiraiiiis. 

I  must  live  and  die  with  the  conviction  of:  mihi  vivendum 
afque  moricnditm  conscio, 

p.  51., To  amuse  himself  with  projecting  the  conquest  of 
I  he  world  :  orbem  terramm  inncere  mcditaretur. 

Common  and  possible  events  :  commumn  esse,  ctjicri  posse. 

p.  52.  To  act  from  the  best  of  motives,  &:c.  :  optimo  animo 
ctjudicio  agerc, 

p.  53.  To  let  slip  an  opportunity  :  oblatani  occasionem  di- 
miftere,  prcv.icnnittcrc. 

The  mind  is  filled  with  disappointment  and  bitter  anguish  : 
spc  destitutus  graviter  doleo. 

p.  55.  To  be  noted  for  the  wisest  person  :  inte?*  sapientissi- 
nios  haben, 

p.  56.  To  meet  with  a  sudden  reverse  of  fortune :  ,9?{6/M  re- 
rum  conversione  pcenc  npprimi, 

p.  57.  To  have  an  ascendancy  over  any  one  :  apud  aVqxiem 
auctoritatem  hahere,  volere. 

lie  knows  and  has  found  for  certain :  cognitum  compertutn" 
que  sibi. 

To  be  disaffected  to :  alicno  animo  esse  in, 

p.  60.  Intoxicated  with  fury  :  furens  audacia. 

The  smoke  had  intercepted  their  view :  conspectum  fumus 
abstulerat. 

p.  61.  To  weigh  the  force  and  motive  of  every  duty:  offici- 
arum  omnium  momenta  perpendere. 

To  give  rules  for  the  attainment  of  the  liberal  arts  :  vias  op- 
timarum  nrtium  tradcrc, 

p.  62.  To  associate  the  sons  into  a  share  of  the  kingdom  : 
regni  consortium  jungere  cum. 

As  his  own  free  gift : '  sui  muneris. 


246 

To  free  any  one  from  dangers,  to  avert  them  :  depi^ecari 
qVicujus  pericula, 

p.  22.  To  1)6  cast  in  a  suit :  causit  cadere. 

p.  25.  Presence  of  mind  :  prcpsentis  animi  consilium, 

p.  26.  To  entertain  too  sanguine  a  hope  of  success  ;  spent 
tenierariam  habere. 

To  abdicate  the  sovereign  power  or  magistracy  :  imperium 
deponere  ;  se  mngistraiii  abdicare. 

p.  SO.  The  thing  in  question  :  de  quo  agitur. 

To  serve  for  the  twentieth  time  :  incesima  stipend  in  mercri. 

To  whose  decision  they  appealed  :  quem  judicem  fecerint. 

To  assert  one's  right  to  a  territory :  agnim  vindicare. 

He  rested  the  point  of  controversy  :  controversiam  referebat* 

p.  31.  To  make  a  toil  of  pleasure:  amara  jucundis  inter- 
miscere, 

y,.  ^\1.  When  there  is  such  a  noise  :  vhi  tot  obstrepunt  gra* 

p.  ?)o.  It  became  the  first  object  of  my  wislies  to  acquire 
your  love :  nihil  optative  f^^if^  quam  ut  abs  ie  amnrer. 

p.  34.  To  assault  by  covert  ways :  cunicuUs  oppugnare, 

p.  35.  From  motives  of  state  policy  :  reipyblirce  cansCi, 

No  one  invested  with  supreme  power  and  authority :  nemo 
cum  virihus  plurimnm  posset. 

To  condescend  to  listen  to  justice,  without  a  violent  effort 
on  one's  part :  ad  Jus  sine  I'i  descendere. 

p.  36.  Which  must  from  their  antiquity  have  obtained  the 
force  of  nature  :  qucejam  natura*  vim  ohiineret  per  vvtustatem. 

lie  had  erected  monuments  to  his  fame :  monumcnta  ^ibi 
extruxerat. 

p.  38.  Toils  and  intrigues  of  ambition  :  ambitionis  labor. 
Having  contracted  a   lameness   from   a   wound :  gravi- 
tcr  claudicnnti  ex  vulnere. 

p.  39.  To  bind  any  one  by  the  strongest  lies  of  Matltudc  : 
gratissimum  alicvi  facer c. 

p.  41.  I  am  bound  to  him  by  the  strongest  obligations  :  hie 
de  me  optimr  meritus  est. 

He  obtained  the  first  celebrity  and  pre-eminence  in  the  fo- 
rum :  clarus  in  tog/i,  et  princeps. 

To  have  influence  with  any  one :  apud  aliqucm  valere. 

p.  42.  To  pay  attention  to  a  thing ;  in  aliquid  incumbere, 
vcl  alicui  rei. 


Entitled  to  the  hic^hcst  cuiimiendation  :  summtt  laude  dlgiius. 

p.  44.  I  received  inrormation  of:  rcniinliatum  est  mihi  de. 

Not  in  endeavouring  to  blot  out  the  memory  of  the  ancient 
quarrel,  but  in  concerting  measures  to  renew  the  war  :  non  ad 
oblivionem  vrteris  belli,  sed  ad  comparatioaem  novi. 

p.  45.  Not  unaccompanied  with  :  plenam. 

When  no  longer  attended  with  danger  :  secura. 

To  be  struck  dumb  with  astonishment :  ohstujyescere. 

p.  48.  To  inform  any  one  of  what  has  been  done :  acta  edo- 
cere. 

p.  50.  With  some  degree  of  accuracy  :  accuratius. 

I  must  live  and  die  with  the  conviction  of:  mihi  vivendwn 
atque  moricndum  conscio. 

p.  5 1.. To  amuse  himself  with  projecting  the  conquest  of 
'li?  world  :  orhem  terrarinn  innccre  meditaretur. 

Common  and  possible  events  :  communia  esse,  el  Jicn  posse, 

p.  52.  To  act  from  tlie  best  of  motives^  &c. :  ojjtimo  animo 
ctjudicio  agerc. 

p.  53.  To  let  slip  an  opportunity  :  ohlalain  occasionem  di- 
mitterCj  'prccicrmittcrc. 

The  mind  is  filled  with  disappointment  and  bitter  anguish  : 
spc  destitatus  grnviter  doleo, 

p.  55.  To  be  noted  for  the  wisest  person  :  inter  sapienlissi- 
nios  haberi. 

p.  56.  To  meet  with  a  sudden  reverse  of  fortune :  .<??«6/M  re- 
ritm  conversione  pwnc  npprimi. 

p.  57.  To  have  an  ascendancy  over  any  one  :  apiid  cd  qiicm 
auctoritatem  habere^  valere. 

lie  knows  and  has  found  for  certain :  cognitum  comptrtum" 
que  sibi. 

To  be  disaffected  to :  alieno  animo  esse  in, 

p.  60.  Intoxicated  with  fury  :  furcns  audacia. 

The  smoke  had  intercepted  their  view :  conspectum  fumus 
abstiderat. 

p.  6l.  To  weigh  the  force  and  motive  of  every  (hity:  o^ci- 
oruni  omnium  momenta  perpenderc. 

To  give  rules  for  the  attainment  of  the  liberal  arts  :  vias  op- 
timarum  nrtium  trudcrc, 

p.  62.  To  associate  the  sons  into  a  share  of  the  kingdom  : 
regni  con^'^ortiumjungere  cum. 

As  bis  own  free  gift :  sid  nmneris. 


24S 

To  fall  prostrate  at  the  feet  of  any  one :  gcnibua  advolvi 

To  have  an  absolute  power  over  any  one :  omnia  in  aliquem 
posse. 

p.  63,  The  gods  pour  down  their  vengeance  on  so  many 
perjuries :  Diis  tot  perjiiria  vindicatitlbus. 

To  be   reduced   to  eAtremc   ncn  ssity :  ad  incitas  redigi ; 
res  ad  extremum  pcrducta, 

p.  64.  The  skirts  of  places  facilitate  the  knowledge  of:  ora 
locorum  faiiliorcm  co^nitioncm  dant. 

To  adhere  to  the  rule  proposed  :  mnnerc  in  iiutiivto  suo. 

The  most  splendid  merit  is  recompensed  by  the  small  and 
reluctant  voice  of  praise :  recti  facto  exigna  laiis  ct  ab  inviti^ 
rpressa  proponitur. 

p.  65.  To  fall  into  neglect :  ohsolere. 

To  promote  with  the  greatest  zeal  and  ardor :  studiosins 
ndaugere. 

p.  66.  To  stand  in  the  way  of  the  designs  of  others  :  r/7/n- 
rum  consiJlis  officerc. 

p.  67.  To  sink  into  languor  and  inactivity  :•  in  moUuicm  ct 
lertinm  sold. 

p.  68.  It  affords  a  heartfelt  satisfaction  to  behold  :  incredi- 
bUiter  delectat  videre. 

p.  69.  The  mind  becomes  enervated  by  luxurious  ease  :  lux- 
nriatur  otio  animus. 

A  most  efficacious  method  :  res  cfficacissima. 

Every  man  distinguished  for  his  bravery  :  fortissimus  quis- 
que  vir. 

Avaricious  views  divert  into  the  pursuit  of  plunder  :  avari' 
fia  ad  prwdam  devocnt, 

p.  70.  Lvery  improvement  of  human  genius :  omnem  inge- 
ii  cultitm. 

p.  71  •  Intelligence  was  brought :  nvnriatum  est. 

I)r!\<  1  to  despair  by  the  stings  of  an  evil  conscience  :  con- 

i' ... ,     .relcrum  cxagitatus. 

To  kill  oneself:  nerem  sibi  consciscen  . 

Without  accomplishing  a  purpose:  reitjn  .,  . 

p.  72.  Report  by  its  rapidity  anticipates:  Jama  sud,  celcri- 
fntf  snperat.... 

Their  whole  thoughts  are  bent  on  worldly  and  perishable 

bjects  :  nihil  nisi  mortalc  tcrrcnumque  rogitunt. 
p.  73.  For  pnsuming  to  inquire,  or  at  all   concern  them.- 
<ielve.s  :  quod  nibi  qnmrendum  out  cogitandum piUaront. 


249 

They  assumed  the  mask  of  hypocrisy,  put  on  a  iiurried  step, 
and  displayed  reserve  and  composure  in  tlieir  countenances : 
falsi  ac  frstinantes,  vultuque  composito 

p.  75.  Perfumes  of  a  very  high  and  sweet  savor  :  ungucnta 
summd  ct  acemniil  suavitate  condita, 

p.  76,  To  take  the  foraging  party  in  the  rear  ifrumentarios 
a  tergo  aggredi. 

To  prove  by  the  most  convincing  reasons :  gravissimis  ra- 
tionibus  evincerc. 

To  feel  the  breast  glow  with  the  warmest  zeal :  incredihill 
studio  rapi, 

p.  77,  To  pay  all  possible  respect  to :  maximum  honorem 
pj'cestare  ;  maximd  observantil  habere. 

p.  79.  We  can  be  supplied  with  sufficient  materials  :  nobis 
suppctere  potest. 

The  mind  could  not  bear  being  stretched  to  such  a  degree  : 
animus  non  posset  f err e  tantam  contentionem, 

p.  80.  In  the  hour  of  despair :  spe  abjectd. 

p.  81.  To  leave  off  childish  play :  relinqucre  nuces  pueris, 

p.  85.  To  make  an  impression  on  the  senate :  senatum  com" 
jnovere, 

p.  86.  To  take  a  magnificent  view  of  one's  self:  sc  magni^ 
Jicc  circinnspicere. 

To  store  the  memory  with  an  immense  mass  of...  irjimensam,.. 
copiam  memoriO.  comprehendere. 

p.  88.  It  has  subjected  them  to  incurable  diseases  and  insu(- 
ferable  pains :  Us  morbos  insanabilcsy  ct  dolorcs  intolerabiles 
adjunxit. 

Minds  ready  to  sympathise  with  the  pains  of  the  bodies  : 
ammi  corporum  doloribus  congruentes. 

p.  89.  If  you  will  give  me  an  opportunity  of  showing :  si  per 
te  miki  licit umfucrit  indicare, 

p.  90.  Any  accident  that  may  befal  us :  res  incommodw. 

p.  91.  To  oblige  any  one  :  de  aliquo  bene  mereri. 

p.  95.  To  inflict  on  the  polluted  offspring,  the  punishments 
due  to  the  crimes  of  the  parents  :  parent um  pwuas  a  conscele^ 
ra t issim  is  filiis  repctere. 

To  take  pains:  laborare ;  laborem  in  aliquid  impendere, 

p.  96.  To  be  invested  with  honorable  offices :  summis  hon- 
or Ibits  funsi, 

"     •  22  ♦ 


250 

];.  98.  Words  removed  from  common  usage  :  verba  a  cuir 
muni  iisu  abducta. 

Inelcgimfly  coined  by  themselves :  a  se  inconcinnc  confictis. 

1  o  steal  Cicero's  invectives  against  Catiline :  Ciceroni 
( \itilinari(is  cotnpilare, 

p.  102.  The  first  object  of  moral  beauty:  primus  honesli 
iocus. 

To  bold  the  hand  stretched   out  as   a  mark  ;   prcrhcrr  pro 
copula  (lispausam  mnnum, 

p.  103.  Nature  p^ives  this  instinct :  hoc  a  natural  tributum. 

p.  104.  To  aspire  to  honor ;  ad  honorem  contendere,  (en- 

\  Wise  man  fashions  the  conduct  ol  his  iilc  according  to  the 
language  of  the  ignorant :  sapientis  vita  ex  insipientiinn  scr- 
none  pendet. 

What  regards  the  gratification  of  the  senses :  quod  spcciat 
ad  volupfatem. 

p.  106.  To  remove  imaginary  anxieties:  inancs  solicit  a- 
dines  detrahere, 

p.  108.  Moderation  in  the  exercise  of  supreme  power:  in 
unmnui  potestaie  tcrum  omnium  modus. 

To  keep  closely  besiegetl :  clausum  obsidere. 

p.  109.  To  instruct  any  one  to  the  perpetration  of  the  vilest 
practices  :  nliquem  mala  facinora  edocere, 

A  supine  indilVercnce,  by  which  the  state  was  nearl}'^  brought 
>  the  brink  of  ruiu :  socordia  aique  inertia  per  quas  pcenc  res- 
nthlica  interiit, 

p.  110.  To  exhibit  to  the  view  the  whole  tissue  of  a  man'* 
\  ices  and  ini^juities  :  omnia  w  (     "  '     'ominis  exempla  profcrrc, 

Tliis  single  trait  retrieves   1  <•  from  eternal  disLifire: 

hoc  unumf acinus  labem  oitemam  dclet, 

p.  H2,   I  will  grant  you  your  request:  cficiam  quo  ' 

.Men  of  the  first  dignity  and  eminence  :  homines  m»' 

I  claim  the  preference  iu  rising  to  address  you  :  ego  potissi' 
mum  tturgo. 

Reason  receiving  its  whole  support  from  itself,  and  continu- 
;  essive  advances  :   ratio  connixa  per  sc^  et 

From  the  general  disorder  which  prevails  through  the  whole 
norld :  /  ...  ,^^^ 

p.  111.  ;      ^^  ^€nd  to  :  spcctarc  ad. 


251 

ll6.  Di-awTi  by  motives  of  duty  :  aUqu.1  officii  ratione  ad- 
ducerctur. 

p.  119.  Intent  upon  the  recovery  of  liis  rights  :  ad  Uheriatem 
erectus. 

p.  120.  To  expose  to  the  manifest  view  of  all :  proferre  in 
medium. 

p.  121.  To  demand  the  payment  of  money :  cx/^er(?/?ecwn/a5. 

In  an  engaj^einent  or  pitched  battle  :  collalis  signis, 

p.^123.  What  has  a  most  extensive  effect :  quod  latissimc 
pafet. 

Whose  influence  is  felt:  quod plurlm''m  valet. 

Thus  our  aml3ition  is  gratified  :  ila  quce  volumus  consequi- 
mur. 

p.  123.  There  is  this  most  fortunate  circumstance  attending 
it :  hoc  adhuc  pervommodr  cadlt. 

Tlie  magisterial  offices,  witli  which  I  have  been  invested  by 
the  people  :  quos  tnihi  magistratus  p.ipulus  maiidavit, 

p.  126.  The  religious  obligation  with  which  I  bound  myself 
to  discharge  those  offices :  quci  omnium  qfficiortim  ohstringor 
religione. 

The  complexion  of  the  times  is  such:  tempus  esthujusmodi, 

p.  129-  The  manager  of  an  impeachment  :  actor  causK. 

Should  we  not  make  him  feel  the  full  weight  of  public  ven- 
geance ?  nonne  puhlice.  vindica/enus  ? 

p.  134.  It  contributes  to  make  them  strong,  and  to  render 
them  of  gigantic  size  :  vires  alit,  et  itnmani  corporum  rnagrn- 
tudine  homines  efficit, 

p.  1 37.  Amicable  alliances  are  founded  on  the  basis  of  re- 
eiprocal  wants ;  amicitice  propter  indigentiam  coluntur, 

p.  138.  They  are  reused  above  every  necessity  of  having  re- 
course to  the  assistance  of  uthers  :  minimc  alterius  indigent. 

They  do  not  give  a  metrical  or  harmonious  termination  to 
their  sentences  :  non  claudunf  numcris  senfentias. 

I  seem  to  have  preferred  my  own  private  interest :  aliquam 
bonam  gratiam  mi  hi  qua'sisse  videor. 

You  ought  to  rest  satisfied  :  satis  habeas, 

p.  139.  I  availed  myself  of  the  interest  I  had  with  your  wife 
and  sister  to  prevail  upon  them  to  deter  him  :  egi  cum  uxore 
tuiijct  cumvestrd  sorore  ut  dctcrrerent. 

His  blind  fury  received  no  checker  diminution  :  ncque furor 
minuebatur. 

He  took  up  and  conveyed  all  the  money  he  could  upon  his 


own  credit,  or  that  of  his  friend  :  pecuniam  sua  aut  arnicorutj} 
fide  s  Uinta  in  n.utua  .  portare* 

p.  140.  He  left  m.  no  other  alternative  than  to  swear :  nihil, 
fnfii  utjurarenij  reUqtdt, 

p.  141.  On  the  distant  view  of  the  navigation  of  a  vessel: 
cum  proriil  cursum  navigii  videris. 

p.  142.  iMore  perniciously  prodigal:  perditiiis prodigum, 

p.  143.  He  showed  the  most  persecuting  and  vindictive  spir- 
it towards  his  person  :  in  (jus personam  nmlta  fecit  asperius, 

p.  145.  To  harrass  the  mind  with  phantoms  of  iniac-inary 

ils  :  unimosjictorum  maloruiu  umbrd  defatigavi 

p.  146.  It  is  unavoidable  by  me  in  that  station  lu  wiiich  I 
have  been  raised  :  pro  hoc  gradu,  in  quo  me  P,  R.  collocavit, 
neccssaria, 

p.  148.  He  acts  the  part  of  an  implacable  enemy  towards 
me  :  se  mihi  implacabilem  prcebet. 

To  be  saved  from  the  gallows  :  c  fared  rcdimi, 
149. 1  foresaw  its  pernicious  tendency :  exit iosum  fore  videham. 

Their  cares  attend  us  in  our  entrance  into  the  world :  curia 
n08  adolescentes  prosequuntur, 

150.  To  pay  one's  debts  :  nomina  liherare. 

To  break  open  the  seal :  linum  mciderc. 

p.  151.  They  are  inured  to  poverty  and  iuuuMJip.^ :  pauper- 
tale  usi  ad  vers  18  mala  durati  sunt. 

p.  157.  To  pry  curiously  into  the  lives  of  others:  aliorum 
das  curlosii'8  pcrscrutari, 

p.  159.  ii  flow  of  genius:  flumcn  ingenii. 
.  p.  150.  To  drag  forth  before  the  tribunal  of  public  justice  from 
mere  patriotic  motives  :  in  judicium  reipublitcB  causa  vovare* 

A  man  stained  with  crimes  of  the  blackest  dye :  homo  dc" 
tcrrimus. 

To  admit  to  terms  of  peace:  infidem  recipete. 
p.  161.  There  has  been  an  alarm :  ad  arma  conclamafum  est. 

p.  16-?.  This  difference  of  opinion  in  our  discussions  being 

.iried  on  till  night :  hdc  controversid ^ usque  ad nocfrmductd. 

p.  16G.  It  shows  a  want  of  Iriendship,  and  of  that  regard, 
which  I  have  always  felt  fi)r  you,  to  observe  a  silence  of  indif- 
ference: nostrcB  necessitudinis  eaty  mcoB  in  te  benevolent  ice  ^ 
Hon  tacere. 

By  the  ties  of  our  mutual  friendship  :  pro  amove  nostra. 

p.  171.  Nature  has  implanted  that  principle  within  us:  hoc 
fKUurd  €st  iimtum. 


25S 

They  have  inflicted  an  awful  punishment  upon  their  moth- 
ers :  suppUcium  de  matre  sinnserunt. 

Those  persons  are  entitled  to  our  just  abhorrence :  justo  odio 
dig7u'ssi?ni  sunt. 

They  take  no  precautions  against  the  raisft>rtunes  and  troub- 
les which  await  tliem  .  quos  dolorcs  et  quas  mokstias  exceptU' 
ri  sint  tiou  provident, 

p.  172.  The  oration  is  replete  with  charges  of  the  most  fla- 
gitious nature  against  him:  in  oral lone per muUa  in  eum  iur- 
pia  nc  jia^iiioita  dicuntur. 

To  feel  a  thirst  for  glory,  and  passion  for  fame  :  appetens 
^lorice,  atqne  ovidiis  famce, 

A  stain  contracted  in  the  war :  macula  hello  ^uscepta. 

p.  173.  An  indelible  blot  on  the  reputation  of  the  Roman 
people:  macula^  qnce  inveteravit in popnli Romani nomine. 

p.  176.  Men  of  the  first  celebrity  for  learning  and  wisdom: 
homines  doctissi  i  os  sapieniissi  -osque. 

As  to  defy  the  ingenuity  of  any  man  to  comprehend  their  or- 
der and  connection  :  ut  vix  quisqnan  arte  ulla  ordinem  rerum 
ac  necessitudinem  persequi  possit. 

He  was  so  far  from  observing  the  appearance  of  any  hea- 
venly objects  :  nee  solum  nullum  ci  ohlata.f  ccelestium  speciem. 

p.  177.  I  have  been   induced  by  an  intimacy  of  such  long 

standing,  and  by  that  benevolence,  which  I  have  experienced 

from  your  youth  :  andciticR  nostrce  vetustas^  et  tua  suinma  er- 

^cl  me  henevoleniia^  quce  mikijam  a  pueritidiud  cognita  est, 

ue  horfnta  est. 

p.  180.  Continue  in  the  enjoyment  of  that  tranquility :  y/'M- 
<'re  isto  otio. 

p.  1 84.  They  are  so  lost  to  every  principle  of  virtue  and 
jeligion  :  ei  iniquitatis  at  que  i-tpiclatis  pervenemnt. 

What  can  be  a  mark  of  ^neater  folly,  than  in  a  mode  of  life 
which  depends  upon  your  will,  to  create  an  inability  of  contin- 
uing it :  quid  stidtiuSy  qua/a,  quod  h' ft*-' ^^f.^r  facias,  curare,  ut 
id  diutius  farere  non  passim. 

p.  1 86.  Their  lives  could  be  dispensed  witli :  tolerahilia 
fuerun!  ilia. 

The  atrocious  crimes  which  a  man  has  be^n  guilty  of  a- 
izainst  the  peace  of  society  :  jlagitiosiasima  ulliits  in  rempubli- 
cam  fnrinora. 

p.  187.  The  memory  of  which  might  have  reflected  lustre 


254 

on  my  humble  name :  ex  viemorid  qnoi^m  meum  ignohile  no- 
ncn  innotcscat. 

Never  shall  his  measures  disconcert :  nunqaaia  iUc  mc  op- 
primct  concilio, 

I  know  all  his  method  of  attack  :  novi  omnes  hominis  pcti- 
tioncs. 

Under  the  influence  of  these  terrors  :  in  illo  timore. 

He  roused  him  from  his  diffidence :  diffidcntern  suis  rebus, 
conjirmavit, 

p.  188.  With  his  hair  nicely  trimmed,  and  loaded  with  per- 
fumes :  composJto  ct  delibuto  capillo. 

Whence  jjresuming  on  so  well  known  an  instance  of  their 
bravery  they  laid  claim  to:  qud  exre  Jien,  uti  eamm  rerum 
memorid  sumerent 

p.  1 89.  Those  who  have  the  means  as  well  as  the  power, 
feel  a  natural  inclination  to  do  their  utmost  towards  :  n  qui 
valcnt  opibits  naturd  incitantur  ad 

Without  fixing  the  least  suspicion  :  sine  mspi done, 

p.  190.  How  ignorant  of  the  real  interests  of  the  people  are 
those  :  qitum  itial  ab  its  rapublicce  consuliitn\ 

p.  191.  It  is  to  your  good  offices  that  I  owe  the  happy  ter- 
mination of  this  business  :  per  tr  negotiniu  ex  seatentid  ptrfeii. 
To  enter  into  the  designs  of  any  one :  idem  sent  ire  rum  ahquo, 

p.  194.  To  be  drowned  amidst  the  shouts  of  armies  :  obstrC' 
pi  rlamore  militum. 

They  are  apt  to  entertain  a  suspicion  of  their  being  generally 
marked  as  objects  of  scorn  and  derision  :  contcinni  se  ptttant, 
despici,  illudi, 

p.  19^.  But  if  he  would  retire  and  leave  him  in  the  undis- 
turbed possession  of  his  country  :  -  *  discessissef,  ac  libc- 
ram  possessionem  regionis  sibi  trc           '  t. 

Misfortune  has  embittered  every  moment  of  my  life  :  omnia 
raihi  A  ^         '  ^/. 

Tl.  ijg  some  amelioration  of  destiny  :  ,«?;;<?.<? 

(diciijus  commodi  aluptando  recuperandi. 

p.  198.  An  opportunity  of  informing  yourself  jn>i  i.n^  m 
your  way  :  primuin  ie  ^pus  diseendi  nactus  es, 

p.  201.  Lc  •  to  your  own  conjectures  to  inform  you  : 

ea  vos  rnnject:-.  .  ,;.  jw'picitis. 

I  shall  not  expatiate  on  his  great  actions,  with  the  unusual 
surcess  that  has  n;  '  '  them  :  mm  sum  prcedicaiurus  qucm- 
tas  res,  quantdqiu  ic  gesserit. 


INDEX 


OF    THE 

CHIEF  CONTENTS  OF  THIS  BOOK. 


JBL^TIVE  absolute,  62,  63. 
M,  13. 

Antequmn,  priusquaniy  &c.  90. 
Alo,  iriquam,  105. 
,%fjectiiesy  145,  146,  223,  224. 
Adverbs,  158,  224. 
Affirmative  186. 
A^oy  189. 

Being,  55. 

r/a»aes,  arrangement  of,  117,  fee. 

<  'o7ij unctions,  or  connexion  of 
words  and  divisions  of  senten- 
ces, 127,  i^c. 

Copiousness  of  Sty]e,  169,  &ic. 

Ctrcum locution,  179,  toe. 

Concinnitas,  or  equality  of  parts, 
184,  toe.  and  216. 

f  irctiil,  of  a  j)eriod,  204,  toe. 

Contigit,  evenit,  toe.  188. 

Confirmaiio.     Vide  Themes. 

Comparison     Vide  Themes. 

Dignity  of  Style,  196,  toe. 

Elefrance,  1. 

English,  liovv  to  simplify  it,  in  ren- 
dering it  into  Latin,  6,  7,  8. 
Every,  16. 

Epistolary  Style,  75. 
Examples.    Vide  Themes. 

Fore  ut,  48. 

Figures  of  Rbctoric,  167,  toe. 


Fac  ecw,  toe.  195. 
Future  perfect,  75,  &tc. 

Gerunds,  67. 
Genitivts,  103. 
Grecisnis,  52. 

Homo  and  FtV,  12. 
Harmony,  215. 

Idioms,  4,  toe. 

Intermixture  of  words  to  be  avoid- 
ed, 9. 
///c  and  ?5/€,  12. 
/p^e  used  for  /o/u*,  15. 
Is  for  <a/u,  13. 
Idem  (or item,  toe.  15. 
Instead  of,  16,  17,  18,  &c. 
/£^  oMorf,  40. 
Infinitive,  52,  65,  toe. 
Impersonal,  57,  toe. 
Intensive  words ,  32. 
//a,  125,  &^. 

Moneo,  48. 

Motion,  71. 

-V//m',  //6i,  toe.  193. 

Measure,  prose.  Vid.  Harmony,  toe. 

jyescio  qnis  for  quidam,  12. 

JN-c  quid  em,  88. 

Neque,  133,  toe. 

JVwj,  140. 

»Yon  morfd — fferf  c/tow,  21 ,  158 


256 


INDEX. 


JW^a/iVf,  132,  he.  and  31. 
JVt)n  15  *i/m,  quij  Lc.  196. 
• 

One.  another,  1(5. 
Opiu  est",  21. 
Oportd,  2<>,  159. 
Ortier,  or  arrangement  of  words, 

87,  1«)(>,  ^c. 
0/Aer,91,6LC. 

PersMadtOt  48. 

Phrnsesy  choice  of,  2,  3,  4,  5. 

Pofticnl  endinsrs,  10. 

Primus,  u«u5,  kc.  22. 

Purtnplcsy  60,  iiic.  159.  &tc. 

Pcrsoi.^i  74. 

Pronouns,  97  &.C. 

Prf positions,  K>4,  155.  SiC. 

Plenita:^7nf  190,  Stc. 

Period,  structure  of,  204,  &lc. 

Perspicuity  J  221,  ^c. 

Proper  names,  97. 

Q/  .■;  vucc,  7Uorf,  28,  fcc.  122. 

(^  .i.f)in,h,(pmfjufwi,  kc.  13. 


r,' 


f,  iiic.  38,  40,  122. 


(^     'ly  50,  L.C. 

(^   ■<'?  quod,  130. 

<^u  >'lsi,  141. 

(^./o  /  uhi,qnodutinam,  194. 

Qu/,  ^'o,  15.3. 

Quam  ut,6\. 

Qf/m,52,  53. 

r  ! 

/.  .J,  58. 

(^u.niu,  yo,  kc.  125. 

(^fr^qiif,  94. 

40,  124,  192. 


Qko/,,40,124,  164. 
qnotits,AO,  122,38. 
Quamdilt,  3S,  125. 
Quolations.    Vide  Themes. 

RepttHion,  178,  201, 

Romans,  phrases  derived  from  CTls 

toins  of,  5,222. 
Ratio  probans.    Vide  Themes. 

Some,  16,  17,  &«. 
So  far  from,  20. 
Sw;//,25,  112 
Sentences,  113,&,c.  &ic. 
Suftstantives,  145,  &,c.  &,c. 
Supcrlallrts,  149,  Lc. 
Subjunctive,  29,  kc.  47,  kc      . 
Similes.     Vide  Themes. 

Tenses,  73,  kc. 

Tenses,  succession  of,  78,  &6.  be. 

and  85. 
Tfuw,  <«w,  131. 
Tuhtiim  abesl  ut,  ut,  21,  137. 
To/n*,  158. 
Thtme$,  221,  kf^   kc. 
Tts! (monies.    Vide  Themes. 

r//,  47,kc.kc. 

I7ft»',  126. 

(//  ui,  ubi,  %ibi,  192. 

r*r6*,  47,  kc.  156,  &c. 

Vocatives,  111. 

Vurialiuh  of  words,  144,  kc. 

Fero,  193. 

Fcreor,  44. 

WUfiouty  23,  24. 


ERR^^TA. — Page  19,  for pojum— rend  posmm. 

31,  fiir  nrdtrit — read  odtrit. 

32.  for  mm — read  turn. 


^RETURN     CIRCULATION  DEPARTMENT 
T0^-#>     202  Main  Library 

LOAN  PERIOD  1 
HOME  USE 

2                               3 

4 

5                               6 

ALL  BOOKS  MAY  BE  RECALLED  AFTER  7  DAYS 

\  -month  loans  may  be  renewed  by  calling  642-3405 

6-month  loons  may  be  recharged  by  bringing  books  to  Circulo 

Desk 

Renewals  and  rechorges  moy  be  mode  4  days  prior  to  due  c 

DUE  AS  STAMPED  BELOW 

Aiin     fi  1978 

HUU       0    'yiM 

Jl!  ?      7fi 

UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA, 
FORM  NO.  DD6,  40m,  3/78  BERKELEY,  CA  947 2^^ 


"i 


^'^  00076 


U.C.BERKELEY  LIBRARIES 


^^903 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CAUFORNIA  LIBRARY 


■fh 


tl^-^rV^ 


M 


